Type a keyword to start searching...

Use ⌘K or Ctrl+K to search from anywhere
All Subjects
MET

Marine Engineering Technology

Thermodynamics, heat transfer, combustion chemistry, steam turbines, condensers, evaporators, and cycle efficiencies.

609 Qs 61 Papers 547 Repeated 224 Diagrams
🔍
Showing 609 questions Click bookmark icon on any card to save
Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

Direct on line starting for large induction motors such as those for bow thruster units, may not be viable.

(a) State the reasons for this. (4)

(b) Sketch a starting system that may be used for such motors. (8)

(c) Describe the starting method sketched in Q. 1(b) (4)

Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Reasons why direct-on-line (DOL) starting of large induction motors such as bow thruster units may not be viable:

  • High starting current: on DOL starting the motor draws a starting (locked rotor) current of 5 to 8 times full-load current. For a large motor this can be several thousand amperes.
  • Voltage dip: this large inrush current causes a heavy voltage drop in the generator and cable impedance. The busbar voltage may fall below the acceptable limit (typically not below 85 to 90% of rated), which can cause contactors to drop out, other motors to stall, and sensitive electronic equipment to malfunction.
  • Generator overload: the sudden load may exceed the capacity of the running generators, causing the prime mover to slow, frequency to fall, and possibly the overload protection to trip the generator.
  • Mechanical shock: DOL starting applies full torque suddenly, causing high mechanical stress on the motor shaft, coupling, gearbox and the thruster unit, and can cause excessive wear.
  • Thermal stress: the high starting current produces high I squared R heating in the windings; frequent DOL starts can overheat the motor.
  • Starting torque may be too high for the driven load, causing damage to the propeller or thrust unit.
  • The supply system (cables, switchgear, fuses) must be rated for the starting current, which is uneconomic for a large motor.
Part (b)

Sketch of a starting system - Star-Delta starter (or auto-transformer starter). The circuit comprises:

  • A main contactor (line contactor) connecting the supply to the motor.
  • A star contactor which connects the three motor phase windings in star during starting.
  • A delta contactor which connects the windings in delta for running.
  • A timer (time delay relay) which changes over from star to delta after the motor has accelerated.
  • Overload relay, fuses or MCCB, start and stop push buttons, and an indicating lamp.
  • The motor has six terminals (U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2) brought out to the starter.
  • During starting the star contactor closes so each winding receives line voltage divided by root 3 (phase voltage = line/1.732), reducing starting current to about one third of the DOL value. After a set time the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes, reconnecting the windings in delta so full line voltage is applied for running.
Part (c)

Description of the starting method:

  • On pressing start, the line and star contactors close. The motor windings are connected in star, so each phase winding is subjected to phase voltage (line voltage / root 3). The starting current is therefore reduced to approximately one third of the DOL starting current, and the starting torque is reduced to about one third of the DOL torque.
  • The motor accelerates under reduced voltage. After a preset time (set by the timer, typically a few seconds, allowing the motor to reach near rated speed), the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes.
  • The windings are now connected in delta, so each winding receives full line voltage and the motor runs at its normal rated condition.
  • The changeover is timed so that the motor has accelerated sufficiently to avoid a large current surge when delta is applied. The overload relay protects the motor against sustained overload, and the timer prevents too early or too late a changeover.
Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Sketch a basic circuit showing a d.c., winch motor driven by a Ward Leonard circuit powered by a single speed squirrel cage motor. (8)

(b) Explain how reversal of the winch motor is achieved using the Ward Leonard system. (4)

(c) State advantage and disadvantage of the Ward Leonard drive system. (4)

Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Ward Leonard circuit for a d.c. winch motor:

  • A single-speed three-phase squirrel-cage induction motor (the drive motor) is connected to the three-phase supply and mechanically coupled to a d.c. generator.
  • The d.c. generator armature is connected directly to the armature of the d.c. winch motor (the two armatures are connected in series, forming a closed loop).
  • The field winding of the d.c. generator is supplied from a d.c. exciter (or from a controlled rectifier) through a field rheostat / reversing switch.
  • The field winding of the d.c. winch motor is separately excited from the same d.c. source (constant field).
  • The induction motor runs continuously at constant speed, driving the d.c. generator. By controlling the generator field current, the generator e.m.f. and hence the voltage applied to the winch motor armature is varied, giving smooth speed control of the winch motor from zero to full speed in either direction.
  • The circuit: 3-phase supply -> squirrel cage motor -> d.c. generator (armature) -> d.c. winch motor (armature) -> back to generator. Generator field circuit with reversing switch; motor field circuit separately excited.
Part (b)

Reversal of the winch motor:

  • The direction of rotation of a d.c. motor depends on the relative direction of the armature current and the field flux. In the Ward Leonard system the winch motor field is kept constant, so reversal is achieved by reversing the direction of the armature current.
  • This is done by reversing the polarity of the generator field current using a reversing switch (or by reversing the generator field connections). Reversing the generator field reverses the polarity of the generated e.m.f., which reverses the direction of current in the armature loop, and hence reverses the direction of rotation of the winch motor.
  • Because the generator field is a low-power circuit, reversal is easy and can be done smoothly. The motor can also be brought to rest and reversed by reducing the generator field to zero and then building it up in the opposite direction, giving smooth, controlled reversal without large current surges.
Part (c)

Advantages:

  • Very smooth, stepless speed control from zero to full speed in both directions.
  • Excellent speed regulation and high torque at low speed, ideal for winches and windlasses.
  • Easy reversal with low-power control circuits.
  • Regenerative braking is possible (the motor can act as a generator and return power to the system).
  • High starting torque with controlled current.

Disadvantages:

  • Low overall efficiency because power is converted three times (electrical to mechanical in the drive motor, mechanical to electrical in the generator, electrical to mechanical in the winch motor).
  • High initial cost and large physical size (three machines plus exciter).
  • Requires more maintenance (commutators and brushes on two d.c. machines).
  • The drive motor runs continuously even when the winch is idle, wasting power.
  • Slow response compared to modern thyristor/static drives.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Draw a circuit diagram of a transistor connected as a common emitter amplifier including bias resistors, coupling and decoupling capacitors. (10)

(b) Explain the operation of the circuit components. (6)

Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram of a common emitter amplifier:

  • A single NPN transistor (or PNP) with the emitter common to input and output.
  • Bias resistors: R1 and R2 form a potential divider across the supply (Vcc) to set the base voltage and hence the quiescent operating point. Rc is the collector load resistor, Re is the emitter resistor (with a decoupling capacitor Ce across it) for d.c. stabilisation.
  • Coupling capacitors: C1 couples the input signal to the base, and C2 couples the amplified output from the collector to the next stage or load. These block d.c. and pass only the a.c. signal.
  • Decoupling capacitor: Ce across Re bypasses the a.c. signal to earth so that the a.c. gain is not reduced by negative feedback from Re, while still providing d.c. bias stabilisation.
  • Supply: Vcc connected through Rc to the collector; emitter through Re to earth; base biased by R1 (to Vcc) and R2 (to earth).
  • Output taken from the collector.
Part (b)

Operation of the components:

  • R1 and R2: potential divider sets the base potential so the transistor operates in the active region (base-emitter junction forward biased, base-collector reverse biased), giving a stable quiescent point.
  • Rc (collector load): converts the collector current variation into a voltage variation at the output. The amplified output voltage is developed across Rc.
  • Re (emitter resistor): provides d.c. negative feedback for bias stabilisation - if collector current rises, the voltage across Re rises, reducing base-emitter voltage and opposing the rise, stabilising the operating point against temperature and transistor variations.
  • Ce (emitter decoupling capacitor): presents a low impedance to the a.c. signal, so the a.c. signal is not attenuated by Re; it restores the full a.c. voltage gain while keeping d.c. stabilisation.
  • C1 (input coupling capacitor): blocks the d.c. bias from the signal source and passes only the a.c. input signal to the base.
  • C2 (output coupling capacitor): blocks the d.c. collector potential from the load and passes only the amplified a.c. signal.
  • The transistor: amplifies the small base current/voltage signal; a small change in base current produces a much larger change in collector current (current gain beta), giving voltage and power amplification. The output at the collector is 180 degrees out of phase with the input.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe a brush less alternator with a.c. exciter and static A.V.R. (8)

(b) State the output voltage characteristics for this type of machine. (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Nov 2024 Oct 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the exiter rotor windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly and fed to the main rotor. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the purpose of a rectifier and the effect of over current and of overvoltage on rectifiers. (6)

(b) Three equal resistors are connected to a three-phase system, If one resistor is removed find the reduction in load if they are connected in (i) Star, (ii) Delta. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Purpose of a rectifier and effects of overcurrent and overvoltage:

  • A rectifier is a device (using diodes or thyristors) that converts alternating current (a.c.) into direct current (d.c.). It allows current to flow in one direction only, so the output is a unidirectional (pulsating) d.c. voltage. Rectifiers are used to supply d.c. for battery charging, excitation of generators, d.c. motors, and electronic equipment.
  • Effect of overcurrent: excessive current heats the semiconductor junction beyond its rated temperature, causing thermal breakdown and permanent damage to the diode/thyristor. It can also blow fuses, damage the transformer and cause the device to fail short-circuit. Overcurrent must be limited by fuses, circuit breakers or current-limiting circuits.
  • Effect of overvoltage: if the reverse voltage across a diode exceeds its peak inverse voltage (PIV) rating, the junction breaks down (avalanche) and conducts in the reverse direction, causing overheating and destruction. Overvoltage can also be caused by switching surges, lightning or inductive loads; surge suppressors (varistors, RC snubbers) are fitted to protect the rectifier. Both overcurrent and overvoltage must be limited to protect the semiconductor devices.
Part (b)

Three equal resistors on a three-phase system, one removed:

Let each resistor have resistance R and the line voltage be V.

(i) Star connection:

  • With three resistors in star, each phase voltage = V / root 3. Power per resistor = (V/root3)^2 / R = V^2 / (3R). Total power P3 = 3 x V^2/(3R) = V^2 / R.
  • With one resistor removed, two resistors remain in star. Power P2 = 2 x V^2/(3R) = 2V^2/(3R).
  • Reduction in load = P3 - P2 = V^2/R - 2V^2/(3R) = V^2/(3R).
  • Fractional reduction = (V^2/(3R)) / (V^2/R) = 1/3 = 33.3%.

(ii) Delta connection:

  • With three resistors in delta, each phase voltage = line voltage V. Power per resistor = V^2/R. Total P3 = 3V^2/R.
  • With one resistor removed, two resistors remain in delta. Power P2 = 2V^2/R.
  • Reduction = 3V^2/R - 2V^2/R = V^2/R.
  • Fractional reduction = (V^2/R)/(3V^2/R) = 1/3 = 33.3%.

So in both cases the load is reduced by one third (33.3%) when one of three equal resistors is removed.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (i) peak load current, (ii) DC load current, (iii) AC load current. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short-circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50 V on open- circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

No-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator:

  • The saturation (magnetisation) curve is a graph of generated e.m.f. E against field current If, with the armature on open circuit and driven at constant rated speed.
  • Starting from zero field current, a small residual e.m.f. is generated due to residual magnetism in the pole cores.
  • As field current increases, the e.m.f. rises almost linearly at first (the iron is unsaturated, so flux is proportional to field current).
  • As the field current is increased further, the iron begins to saturate and the e.m.f. rises more slowly, the curve bending over (knee of the curve).
  • At high field currents the curve flattens off as the iron is fully saturated and further field current produces little increase in flux or e.m.f.
  • The curve is used to determine the operating point, the field current required for a given voltage, and the effect of armature reaction and demagnetisation. The knee represents the most economical operating point (maximum e.m.f. per ampere of field current).
Part (b)

Synchronous impedance and reactance of the alternator:

  • Synchronous impedance Zs = open-circuit e.m.f. / short-circuit current (same field current) = 50 / 200 = 0.25 ohm.
  • Synchronous reactance Xs = sqrt(Zs^2 - Ra^2) = sqrt(0.25^2 - 0.1^2) = sqrt(0.0625 - 0.01) = sqrt(0.0525) = 0.229 ohm.
  • Induced voltage to deliver 100 A at 0.8 p.f. lagging with terminal voltage 200 V:

Assume a three-phase star-connected alternator. Phase voltage Vph = 200 / root 3 = 115.5 V. Load current per phase I = 100 A (line = phase for star). cos phi = 0.8, sin phi = 0.6.

  • E = sqrt[(Vph cos phi + I Ra)^2 + (Vph sin phi + I Xs)^2]
  • = sqrt[(115.5 x 0.8 + 100 x 0.1)^2 + (115.5 x 0.6 + 100 x 0.229)^2]
  • = sqrt[(92.4 + 10)^2 + (69.3 + 22.9)^2]
  • = sqrt[102.4^2 + 92.2^2] = sqrt[10486 + 8501] = sqrt[18987] = 137.8 V per phase.
  • Line value of induced e.m.f. = 137.8 x root 3 = 238.6 V.

So the alternator must be excited to give an induced e.m.f. of about 137.8 V per phase (238.6 V line).

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail. (6)

(b) Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three -phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kVAr (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kVAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started? (6)

(b) A 500 V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46 kW and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8 Ω. If the iron and friction losses are 500 W and excitation losses are 800 W, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What is intrinsic electric safety? (6)

(b) Can live maintenance be done on intrinsically safe circuits? (5)

(c) Describe intrinsically safe equipment used on board ship. (5)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Intrinsic electric safety (IS) is a protection technique applied to electrical equipment and wiring used in hazardous areas. Its core principle is to prevent ignition of flammable atmospheric mixtures—such as gases, vapours, or dusts—by limiting the electrical and thermal energy available in the circuit to levels below those required for ignition.

This ensures that any sparks or hot surfaces produced by the equipment, even under fault conditions (e.g., short circuits, open circuits, component failures), cannot ignite the surrounding atmosphere.

Key characteristics of intrinsic safety:

  • Energy Limitation: Voltage and current are strictly limited using components such as resistors, Zener diodes, and fuses.
  • No Ignition Source: The design ensures that no spark or hot surface can release enough energy to ignite the hazardous atmosphere.
  • Fault Tolerance: The system remains safe even with multiple independent faults (e.g., “ia” protection level withstands two faults).
  • Use of Barriers: Intrinsically safe circuits are typically connected to non-IS circuits in a safe area through IS barriers that limit energy transfer.

Part (b)

Although intrinsically safe circuits are designed to remain non-igniting even under fault conditions—making them theoretically safe for live work in hazardous areas—live maintenance is generally NOT permitted or recommended on ships or in most industrial settings.

Reasons include:

  • Regulatory Restrictions: Marine regulations, company safety systems, and permit-to-work procedures typically prohibit live work in hazardous areas regardless of equipment protection type. The standard requirement is to de-energize and obtain proper permits.
  • Risk of Misidentification: Personnel may accidentally work on a non-IS circuit or introduce non-IS test equipment/tools into the hazardous zone.
  • Unpredictable Faults: Incorrect installation, hidden damage, or unexpected circuit faults may compromise intrinsic safety.
  • Best Practice: Always isolate, de-energize, and verify zero energy before maintenance in hazardous areas.

Thus, while IS circuits are designed to make live work safe, practical safety protocols and regulations almost universally prohibit live maintenance.

(c) Intrinsically safe equipment used onboard ship.

Intrinsically safe (IS) equipment is essential for safe operation in hazardous areas on ships—particularly tankers, gas carriers, and vessels transporting dangerous goods. Hazardous zones include cargo tanks, pump rooms, cofferdams, gas-dangerous deck zones, paint lockers, and battery rooms.

Common types of intrinsically safe equipment used onboard:

  • Portable Gas Detectors: Used to check for flammable gases, toxic gases, or oxygen deficiency before entering enclosed or hazardous spaces. Designed so that batteries, sensors, and circuits cannot ignite vapours.
  • Portable Two-Way Radios: Specially designed walkie-talkies preventing sparks or RF energy from igniting the atmosphere.
  • Portable Lighting (Torches/Hand Lamps): Battery-operated lights engineered to prevent sparks at switches, filaments, or terminals.
  • Tank Gauging Systems: Intrinsically safe sensors and transmitters installed in cargo tanks or pump rooms for measuring level, temperature, and pressure.
  • Fixed Gas Detection Systems: Permanently installed sensors in hazardous spaces (e.g., pump rooms) that continuously monitor for gas leaks, with IS-certified local wiring.
  • Process Control Instrumentation: Pressure transmitters, temperature sensors, valve indicators, and similar devices used in cargo handling systems within hazardous zones.
  • Personal Electronic Devices: IS-certified phones, tablets, and cameras used during inspections or data collection.

All intrinsically safe equipment carries an ‘Ex’ marking, specifying the explosion protection type (e.g., Ex i, Ex ia, Ex ib) and the applicable gas group and temperature class.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x

With reference to testing High Voltage equipment:

(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential (3)

(b) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down (3)

(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making reference to personnel safety. (4)

(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems: (6)

(i) earthed

(ii) insulated

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (d)

(i) Earthed Neutral System:

  • In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
  • Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
  • A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
  • This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
  • The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.

(ii) Insulated Neutral System:

  • An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
  • No earth leakage condition:
    • No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
    • Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
    • The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
  • Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
    • A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
    • Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
    • The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
    • This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
    • The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain what is meant by, and the significance of, four of the following terms: (16)

(a) Voltage stabilization

(b) Filter choke

(c) Impedance

(d) Rectification

(e) Grid bias voltage

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q4 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

Explain the meaning of "p" and "n" type semi-conductor materials and give a brief description of the mechanism by which current passes through them. (16)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

P-Type and N-Type Semiconductor Materials and the Mechanism of Current Conduction

A semiconductor is a material whose electrical conductivity lies between that of a conductor and an insulator. Pure semiconductor materials such as silicon (Si) and germanium (Ge) have limited conductivity. Their conductivity can be greatly increased and controlled by adding a small amount of a suitable impurity. This process is known as doping.

Depending on the type of impurity added, a semiconductor becomes either an N-type or a P-type semiconductor.

1. N-Type Semiconductor

An N-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a pentavalent impurity to a pure semiconductor such as silicon or germanium. Pentavalent impurities have five valence electrons. Examples include phosphorus, arsenic and antimony.

The pure semiconductor atom forms four covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms. When a pentavalent impurity atom replaces one of these atoms:

  • Four of its five valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • The fifth electron is weakly bound and becomes a free electron.
  • This free electron can move through the crystal structure when an electric field is applied.

Therefore, an N-type semiconductor has an excess of free electrons.

  • Majority charge carriers: Free electrons.
  • Minority charge carriers: Holes.

The letter "N" denotes that the majority charge carriers are negative electrons. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in an N-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across an N-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The free electrons gain energy from the electric field and drift through the crystal towards the positive terminal (anode). Their movement through the conduction band constitutes the main mechanism of current conduction.

Thus:

Applied voltage → Electric field → Movement of free electrons → Current flow

Although conventional current is considered to flow from positive to negative, the actual electrons move in the opposite direction, from the negative terminal towards the positive terminal.

2. P-Type Semiconductor

A P-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a trivalent impurity to a pure semiconductor. Trivalent impurities have three valence electrons. Examples include boron, gallium and indium.

When a trivalent impurity atom is introduced into the semiconductor crystal:

  • Its three valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • One bond remains incomplete because there is a shortage of one electron.
  • This missing electron position is called a hole.

A hole behaves as a positive charge carrier because it represents a deficiency of an electron.

Therefore, a P-type semiconductor has an excess of holes.

  • Majority charge carriers: Holes.
  • Minority charge carriers: Free electrons.

The letter "P" denotes that the majority charge carriers are effectively positive holes. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in a P-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across a P-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The holes act as the main charge carriers. However, the actual physical movement is still carried out by electrons. An electron from a neighbouring covalent bond moves to fill a nearby hole. This movement leaves a new hole at the electron's original position.

The process continues as follows:

Electron fills a hole → A new hole is created → Another electron fills the new hole → Progressive movement of holes

As a result of this continuous electron movement, the holes appear to move through the material towards the negative terminal (cathode). The resulting progressive movement of holes in the valence band constitutes the main current flow in a P-type semiconductor.

Summary of P-Type and N-Type Semiconductors

Feature

N-Type Semiconductor

P-Type Semiconductor

Impurity added

Pentavalent impurity

Trivalent impurity

Examples of impurities

Phosphorus, arsenic, antimony

Boron, gallium, indium

Valence electrons of impurity

Five

Three

Main charge carriers

Free electrons

Holes

Majority carriers

Electrons

Holes

Minority carriers

Holes

Electrons

Main conduction mechanism

Movement of free electrons through the conduction band

Apparent movement of holes due to successive electron movement in the valence band

Direction of majority carrier movement

Electrons move towards the positive terminal

Holes move towards the negative terminal

Q5 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram. (6)

(b) A balanced delta connected load is connected to a 415V, 50 Hz supply. If the per phase impedance of the load is (8+ j12) ohm, calculate: (10)

(i) the phase current of the load.

(ii) line current

(iii) power consumed by each phase.

Appeared In: Jul 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Line and phase relations in star and delta:

Star connection:

  • The three phase windings have one end of each connected to a common neutral point; the other ends form the three line terminals.
  • Line current = phase current: IL = Iph (the same current flows through the winding and the line).
  • Line voltage = root 3 x phase voltage: VL = root 3 x Vph. The line voltage is the phasor difference of two phase voltages, which are 120 degrees apart, giving a magnitude of root 3 times the phase voltage.
  • Vector diagram: three phase voltages VRN, VYN, VBN at 120 degrees; the line voltage VRY is the phasor sum of VRN and (-VYN), equal to root 3 Vph and leading the phase voltage by 30 degrees.

Delta connection:

  • The three windings are connected end to end to form a closed loop, the junctions forming the three line terminals.
  • Line voltage = phase voltage: VL = Vph (each winding is directly across two lines).
  • Line current = root 3 x phase current: IL = root 3 x Iph. The line current is the phasor difference of two phase currents, giving root 3 times the phase current.
  • Vector diagram: three phase currents at 120 degrees; the line current is root 3 times the phase current and lags the phase current by 30 degrees.
  • Power in both cases: P = root 3 x VL x IL x cos phi.
Part (b)

Balanced delta-connected load, 415 V, 50 Hz, per phase impedance Z = 8 + j12 ohm:

  • |Z| = sqrt(8^2 + 12^2) = sqrt(64 + 144) = sqrt(208) = 14.42 ohm.
  • cos phi = R/|Z| = 8/14.42 = 0.555.

(i) Phase current: in delta, phase voltage = line voltage = 415 V. Iph = Vph/|Z| = 415/14.42 = 28.78 A.

(ii) Line current: IL = root 3 x Iph = 1.732 x 28.78 = 49.85 A.

(iii) Power consumed by each phase: Pph = Iph^2 x R = 28.78^2 x 8 = 828.3 x 8 = 6626 W (6.63 kW).

  • Total power = 3 x 6626 = 19.88 kW (also = root 3 x 415 x 49.85 x 0.555 = 19.88 kW).
Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) The star-connected rotor of an induction motor has a stand-still reactance of 4.5 Ω/phase and a resistance of 0.5 Ω/phase. The motor has an induced emf of 50 V between the slip-rings at stand-still on open circuit when connected to its normal supply voltage. Find the current in each phase and the power factor at start when the slip-rings are short-circuited. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain the purpose of interpoles and state their magnetic polarity relative to the main poles of both generators and motors. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20kW. The various resistances are as follows; armature (including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series field 0.025ohm, interpole field 0.028ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115ohm. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction. (8)

(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.

The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC. Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency. Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.

The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.

Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.

The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.

A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.

The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
  • Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
  • Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
  • Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
  • Increased safety for ship and crew
  • Low noise power generation

Q2 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a Silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. (8)

(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system. (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

It is proposed to operate a Bow thruster unit from a 3.3 KV electrical supply.

Outline suitable options for the design of installation under each of the following heading. (16)

(a) Protection of the main switch board

(b) Overload of bow thruster motor

(c) Cable protection.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Protection of Main Switchboard (MSB):

  • Design a separate HV side panel for the bow thrusters, isolated from adjacent LV panels.
  • Ensure independent earthing system for the HV side, connecting to the ship's hull.
  • Incorporate harmonic filters on both ends of the HV busbar to avoid waveform distortion.
  • MSB should be robust to withstand maritime conditions such as vibration, humidity, high temperatures, and exposure to sea water.
  • Implement a neutral earth resistor (NER) for neutral point earthing.
  • Choose circuit breakers suitable for HV, such as vacuum or SF6 types, with manual or motor-driven closing mechanisms.
  • Integrate standard interlocks and trips for under voltage, overcurrent, and short circuit protection.
  • Include monitoring instruments for incoming voltage, frequency, current, in/out power lamps, and load status lamps.
  • Additional features like anti-condensation heaters and interlocks for main-emergency power and door closure are recommended.
Part (b)

Overload Protection for Bow Thrusters Motor:

  • Utilize a combined motor protection relay offering overcurrent (inverse time relay), differential current monitoring, and earth fault monitoring.
  • Connect the relay to a 'Lock-out' relay to trip the motor power in the event of overload.
  • Implement thermistor trip/protection for single phasing and high-temperature conditions.
Part (c)

Cable Protection:

  • Ensure proper cable rating based on the electrical system specifications (1900/3300V for earthed neutral system; 3300/3300V for insulated neutral system).
  • Choose conductors rated for short circuit and maximum fault current.
  • Select high-quality insulation materials such as EPR (ethylene propylene rubber) or XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene).
  • Use sheet material with ratings for short circuit, heat, oil, chemical resistance, and flame retardancy.
  • Plan cable tray routing and ensure proper junctions with terminals.
  • Consider the complexity of insulation design for HV cables, emphasizing clearance and creepage distance.
  • Recognize that less copper area is required for HV conductors, allowing for space and weight savings during installation.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three-phase shipboard electrical distribution system: (16)

(a) Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system.

(b) Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system.

(c) Describe how the earthed neutral system is Earthed.

(d) Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an Earthed neutral system with regard to the risk of electric shock from either system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) A series circuit having resistance, Inductance and capacitance is to be operated on a constant voltage supply of available frequency. Indicate graphically how changes will take place in the resistive terms, reactive terms, i.e. capacitive reactance and inductive reactance. (6)

(b) A resistance of 130 Ω and a capacitor of 30µF are connected in parallel across a 230 Volt, 50Hz supply. Find the current in each component, total current, phase angle and the power consumed. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series RLC circuit on constant voltage supply of variable frequency:

  • The resistance R is independent of frequency; it is a horizontal straight line on the graph of reactance/resistance against frequency.
  • Inductive reactance XL = 2 pi f L increases linearly with frequency (a straight line through the origin, rising with f).
  • Capacitive reactance XC = 1/(2 pi f C) decreases with frequency (a hyperbola, falling as f increases).
  • The net reactance X = XL - XC. At low frequency XC dominates (capacitive); at high frequency XL dominates (inductive).
  • At the resonant frequency f0, XL = XC, the net reactance is zero, and the circuit behaves as purely resistive. The impedance is a minimum (equal to R) and the current is a maximum.
  • Below resonance the circuit is capacitive (current leads voltage); above resonance it is inductive (current lags voltage).
  • The graph shows R as a horizontal line, XL rising linearly, XC falling hyperbolically, and the two curves crossing at resonance.
Part (b)

Resistance 130 ohm and capacitor 30 uF in parallel across 230 V, 50 Hz:

  • Capacitive reactance XC = 1/(2 pi f C) = 1/(2 x 3.1416 x 50 x 30 x 10^-6) = 1/0.009425 = 106.1 ohm.
  • Current in resistor: IR = V/R = 230/130 = 1.769 A (in phase with voltage).
  • Current in capacitor: IC = V/XC = 230/106.1 = 2.168 A (leads voltage by 90 degrees).
  • Total current: I = sqrt(IR^2 + IC^2) = sqrt(1.769^2 + 2.168^2) = sqrt(3.129 + 4.700) = sqrt(7.829) = 2.798 A.
  • Phase angle: cos phi = IR/I = 1.769/2.798 = 0.632, so phi = 50.8 degrees (current leading voltage, since capacitive).
  • Power consumed: P = V x IR = 230 x 1.769 = 406.9 W (only the resistor consumes power; also P = V I cos phi = 230 x 2.798 x 0.632 = 406.9 W).

So IR = 1.77 A, IC = 2.17 A, total current = 2.80 A, phase angle = 50.8 degrees leading, power = 407 W.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the working principle of a three-phase induction motor. What are the various types of rotors? (6)

(b) An 18.65kW, 6-pole, 50Hz, 3 phase slip ring induction motor runs at 960 rpm on full load with a rotor current per phase of 35A, allowing 1kW for mechanical losses, find the resistance per phase of 3-phase rotor winding. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A three-phase induction motor operates on the principle of electromagnetic induction. A rotating magnetic field is created in the stator (stationary part) by supplying three-phase AC power to its windings. This rotating field induces currents in the rotor (rotating part), which in turn creates its own magnetic field. The interaction between the stator's rotating magnetic field and the rotor's magnetic field produces a torque that causes the rotor to rotate. The rotor speed is slightly less than the speed of the rotating magnetic field, a difference known as slip. The slip is necessary to induce the currents in the rotor that produce the torque.

Types of Rotors in Three-Phase Induction Motors:

Squirrel-Cage Rotor:

  • Consists of laminated steel sheets with parallel slots carrying heavy copper or aluminum bars. The ends of these bars are short-circuited by end rings, forming a closed loop resembling a squirrel cage.
  • The simplicity and ruggedness of the squirrel-cage rotor make it the most commonly used type in induction motors.

Wound Rotor (Slip-Ring Rotor):

  • Features a laminated iron core with three-phase windings placed in the slots. These windings are connected to external slip rings via brushes, allowing for external connections.
  • The wound rotor design allows for external resistances to be added to the rotor circuit, enabling control over the motor's starting torque and speed. This feature is particularly useful in applications requiring precise speed control and higher starting torque.
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain why the iron losses in a transformer are substantially independent of the load current. (6)

(b) The equivalent circuit for a 200/400-V step-up transformer has the following parameters referred to the low-voltage side. (10)

Equivalent resistance = 0.15 Ω: Equivalent reactance = 0.37 Ω

Core-loss component resistance = 600 Ω: Magnetising reactance = 300 Ω

When the transformer is supplying a load at 10 A at a power factor if 0.8 lag, Calculate:

(i) the primary current.

(ii) secondary terminal voltage.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In a practical transformer, iron (core) losses remain nearly constant from no-load to full-load operation. This means that the power loss occurring in the transformer core does not change significantly with changes in the load current.

Iron losses consist of two main components:

  1. Hysteresis loss
  2. Eddy current loss

Both of these losses are produced by the alternating magnetic flux in the transformer core and depend mainly on the supply voltage, frequency, and core material properties, rather than on the load current.

1. Hysteresis Loss

Hysteresis loss is caused by the continuous reversal of magnetization in the iron core as the alternating current produces an alternating magnetic field.

During every AC cycle, the core undergoes repeated magnetization and demagnetization. This repeated reversal requires energy because of the inherent magnetic properties of the core material, and the energy is dissipated as heat.

The magnitude of hysteresis loss depends on:

  • The area of the hysteresis loop of the core material.
  • The frequency of the alternating supply.
  • The magnetic properties of the core, such as coercivity and magnetic permeability.

Since these factors remain practically constant for a transformer operating at constant supply voltage and frequency, hysteresis loss is essentially independent of the load current.

2. Eddy Current Loss

Eddy current loss is caused by circulating currents induced within the transformer core due to the alternating magnetic flux.

These induced currents flow through the resistance of the core material, producing heat and resulting in power loss.

The magnitude of eddy current loss depends on:

  • The electrical resistivity of the core material.
  • The frequency of the alternating supply.
  • The core geometry and thickness of the laminations.

Since these factors are determined by the transformer design and operating frequency, eddy current loss also remains practically independent of the load current.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Sketch a graph of starting current, and torque against the speed of rotation for a single cage motor. (6)

(b) A 230 V motor, which normally develops 10kW at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85%, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 Ohm and the shunt field resistance is 220 Ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A by means of the shunt regulator what output in kW could be expected as a generator, if the armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Graph of starting current and torque against speed for a single-cage induction motor:

  • Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
  • Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
  • The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
Part (b)

230 V motor, 10 kW at 1000 rev/min, efficiency 85%, used as a generator:

  • As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
  • Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
  • Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
  • Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
  • As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
  • E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
  • Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
  • Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
  • Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
  • Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.

So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 Ohm, and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motor of the three phase a.c. induction motor in respect of the following: (16)

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Torque characteristic

(c) Speed variation.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships: (16)

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on A.C. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems:

(a) High starting current. (8)

(b) Low starting torque. (8)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable Insulation in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies for these problems. (8)

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables. (8)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an induction motor? (4)

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an induction motor in installed condition? (3)

(c) What is the purpose of 'fuse back up protection' provided to an induction motor? (3)

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque? (3)

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum running torque in an induction motor? (3)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000 kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 KVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate: (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit.

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (a) 0.8 lagging and (b) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an A.C. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohms. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, A.C. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the “full-in” position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the “full-in” position of the plunger. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Specifications of the three batteries are given below: (10)

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In a three-phase AC system, a star connection means that one end of each of the three phase windings is joined together to form a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to the three line terminals.

For a star-connected system:

$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$

$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$

In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:

$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$

Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three-phase shipboard electrical distribution system:

(a) Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(b) Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(c) Describe how the Earthed neutral system is Earthed. (4)

(d) Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an Earthed neutral system with regard to the risk of electric shock from either system. (4)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction. (4)

(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction. (4)

(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three phase circuit using capacitors. (4)

(d) Explain ONE method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected. (4)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Meaning of power factor correction:

Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.

In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.

Part (b)

Advantages of Power Factor Correction

  • By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
  • With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
  • Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
  • Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
  • By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
  • With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
  • Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
Part (c)

Power Factor correction in a three-phase circuit using capacitors:

A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.

  • The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
  • The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
  • The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Part (d)

Other methods for Power Factor correction:

Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.

Q3 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

List at least two factors that cause a deterioration of the frequency response of a transistor amplifier. Explain how each factor affects the performance of the amplifier and the portion of the frequency range where it is effective. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The frequency response of a transistor amplifier refers to how its voltage gain changes with signal frequency. Ideally, the gain should remain constant over the desired frequency range. However, in practice, the gain deteriorates at both low and high frequencies due to various circuit components and effects.

The two main factors that cause deterioration are:

1. Coupling and Bypass Capacitors (Affecting Low-Frequency Response):

At low frequencies (below f₁, the lower cut-off frequency), the following capacitive components contribute to the drop in gain:

  • Input Coupling Capacitor (Cin) and Output Coupling Capacitor (Cout):
  • These capacitors have high reactance at low frequencies, which restricts the AC signal from passing through effectively. As a result, only a small part of the signal reaches the amplifier, reducing the voltage gain.
  • Emitter Bypass Capacitor (Cb):
  • At low frequencies, the reactance of this capacitor is also high, and it cannot effectively bypass the emitter resistor (Re). This causes more of the input signal to drop across Re, reducing the output.

Effect on Performance:

  • Causes reduced signal transfer through the amplifier.
  • Leads to drop in amplifier gain at frequencies below the lower cut-off frequency (f₁).

2. Diffusion and Stray Capacitances (Affecting High-Frequency Response):

At high frequencies (above f₂, the upper cut-off frequency), internal capacitances cause deterioration:

  • Base-Emitter Diffusion Capacitance:
  • At high frequencies, this capacitance presents low reactance, increasing base current. This results in reduced current amplification (β) and thus lowers the voltage gain.
  • Collector-to-Earth Stray Capacitance:
  • Also decreases in reactance with frequency, introducing a loading effect and further lowering the amplifier’s output gain.
  • Cout at High Frequencies:
  • Acts as an additional load to the next stage, further reducing the voltage gain.

Effect on Performance:

  • Results in loss of gain due to internal capacitance effects.
  • Leads to drop in amplifier gain at frequencies above the upper cut-off frequency (f₂).

Conclusion:

  • At low frequencies (< f₁): Gain drops due to high reactance of coupling and bypass capacitors (Cin, Cout, Cb).
  • At high frequencies (> f₂): Gain drops due to low reactance of base-emitter diffusion capacitance and stray capacitances.

The maximum, stable gain is maintained in the mid-frequency range, and the cut-off frequencies f₁ and f₂ are defined where the gain falls to 70.7% of its maximum value. For optimal performance, the amplifier should be designed to operate within this mid-frequency range.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Explain what is meant by the term single phasing. (5)

(b) Explain the probable effect of single phasing on a delta connected squirrel cage induction motor on 75% full load. (5)

(c) State a method by which a motor can be protected against the effects of single phasing. (6)

Appeared In: Mar 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Meaning of Single Phasing

Single phasing, also known as phase failure or phase loss, is a condition in a three-phase electrical system where one of the three supply phases becomes disconnected or open-circuited while the remaining two phases continue to supply power.

This condition may occur due to:

  • A blown fuse in one phase
  • Broken conductors or cables
  • Faulty contactors
  • Loose electrical connections
  • Open circuit in the supply line

When single phasing occurs, a three-phase motor connected to the supply may continue operating on the remaining two phases. However, the supply becomes unbalanced, resulting in abnormal current distribution and unsafe operating conditions.

Single phasing is particularly dangerous for induction motors because it can cause overheating and serious damage if not detected quickly.

Part (b)

When a delta-connected squirrel cage induction motor operating at about 75% of full load experiences single phasing, several harmful effects occur.

1. Motor Continues Running

Unlike some other electrical faults, the motor may not stop immediately.

  • The motor continues running because the remaining two phases still produce an unbalanced rotating magnetic field.
  • However, motor performance becomes poor and unstable.

2. Excessive Current in the Remaining Phases

To maintain the required load torque, the current in the remaining energized phases increases considerably.

In a delta-connected motor:

  • One winding effectively loses its proper supply.
  • The other two windings attempt to carry the entire load.

As a result:

  • Current in the energized windings may rise to approximately 1.73 to 2 times the normal full-load current, depending on the load condition.

3. Reduction in Torque and Speed

The motor is unable to develop normal torque under single phasing conditions.

This causes:

  • Reduction in torque output
  • Slight drop in motor speed
  • Difficulty in carrying the connected load

The motor may struggle to continue operating efficiently.

4. Severe Overheating

The most serious effect of single phasing is rapid overheating of the motor windings.

Due to excessive current:

  • Copper losses ((I^2R) losses) increase sharply.
  • Winding temperature rises rapidly.

This overheating can damage insulation very quickly.

5. Winding Burnout and Motor Failure

If the condition continues:

  • Insulation breakdown occurs,
  • Windings may short circuit,
  • The motor may eventually burn out completely.

Although thermal overload relays may trip the motor, they may not act quickly enough to prevent serious damage, especially when the motor is heavily loaded.

Part (c)

Protection of a Motor Against Single Phasing

The most effective method of protecting a motor against single phasing is by using a Phase Failure Relay (also called a Phase Loss Relay or Single Phasing Relay).

Working Principle of Phase Failure Relay

1. Continuous Monitoring

The relay continuously monitors:

  • Voltage in all three phases, or
  • Current in all three phases

to ensure balanced supply conditions.

2. Detection of Phase Failure

If:

  • One phase is lost,
  • Voltage becomes severely unbalanced, or
  • Current imbalance occurs,

the relay detects the abnormal condition immediately.

3. Tripping Action

Once single phasing is detected:

  • The relay operates its contacts,
  • The control circuit of the motor contactor is interrupted,
  • The contactor coil becomes de-energized.

4. Disconnection of the Motor

When the contactor drops out:

  • The main power contacts open,
  • The motor is disconnected from the supply.

This prevents overheating and protects the motor windings from damage.

Modern Motor Protection Relays

Modern electronic motor protection relays often include additional protective features such as:

  • Overcurrent protection
  • Under-voltage protection
  • Phase sequence protection
  • Earth fault protection
  • Thermal protection

These provide complete protection for the motor.

Limitations of Thermal Overload Relays

Thermal overload relays provide only indirect protection against single phasing.

  • They operate based on overheating,
  • But overheating may already have caused insulation damage before the relay trips.

Therefore, a dedicated phase failure relay is preferred because it detects the fault condition itself and acts much faster.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing controlled. (6)

(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)

(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault condition. (5)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Description of circuit breaker:

The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.

Main Components:

  • Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
  • Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
  • Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
  • Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
Part (b)

If a circuit breaker opens due to a short circuit:

  • The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
  • The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
  • In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
  • This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).

Checks following the event:

  • Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
  • Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
  • Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
Part (c)

If a main circuit breaker fails to open under fault conditions:

  • Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
  • Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
  • Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
  • Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
  • After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
  • Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
  • Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) the readings on the ammeters.

(ii) the form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is leakage flux as it applies to the iron-core transformer? How is it taken into account in the analysis of the transformer? (6)

(b) The following results were obtained on a 50 kVA transformer: open circuit test-primary voltage, 3300 V; secondary voltage, 415 V; primary power, 430 W. Short circuit test-primary voltage, 124V; primary current, 15.3 A; primary power, 525 W; secondary current, full load value. Calculate: (10)

(i) The efficiencies at full load and at half load for 0.7 power factor.

(ii) The voltage regulations for power factor 0.7 (I) lagging, (ii) leading

(iii) The secondary terminal voltages corresponding to (I) and (ii).

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In an iron-core transformer, when the primary winding is connected to a supply voltage, a current flows through the winding depending on the load and the winding resistance. This current generates a magnetic field, forming a magnetic north and south pole, thereby creating magnetic flux between them.

The magnetic flux consists of lines that ideally pass through the iron core and link both the primary and secondary windings. This mutual flux is responsible for the energy transfer from the primary to the secondary winding and is essential for transformer operation.

However, not all magnetic flux produced by the primary winding links to the secondary winding. Some of the magnetic lines spread into the surrounding air space and do not pass through the secondary coil. This portion of the magnetic flux is known as leakage flux.

Leakage Flux:

  • Leakage flux is the portion of the magnetic flux generated by the primary winding that does not couple with the secondary winding.
  • It occurs due to the physical separation between the windings and non-ideal magnetic coupling.
  • The leakage flux induces an electromotive force (emf) in the primary winding itself, which opposes the current flow in the primary. This results in an additional voltage drop.

How It Is Accounted for in Analysis:

  • The opposition caused by the leakage flux is modeled as an inductive reactance (i.e., a leakage inductance) in series with the primary winding resistance.
  • This series inductance creates a voltage drop equal to the emf generated by the leakage flux.
  • In transformer equivalent circuits, the leakage inductances of both primary and secondary windings are included to reflect this non-ideal behavior.

Minimising Leakage Flux:

Interleaving Technique:

  • Leakage flux can be minimized by arranging the primary and secondary windings closely together on the same leg of the transformer core, a method known as interleaving.
  • This improves magnetic coupling and enhances energy transfer efficiency.
Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is a silicon controlled rectifier (SCR)? How is the breakover voltage of the SCR defined? (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)

(i) The speed;

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)

A Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) is a four-layer, three-terminal semiconductor switching device belonging to the thyristor family. Its four semiconductor layers are arranged in the PNPN configuration. The three terminals are Anode (A), Cathode (K), and Gate (G).

An SCR is a unidirectional device and is mainly used for switching, rectification, and controlling electrical power. It is normally triggered by applying a small current to the gate terminal.

symbol:

Modes of Operation

An SCR has three main modes of operation:

  1. Forward Blocking Mode (OFF state): The SCR is forward biased but remains in the non-conducting state.
  2. Forward Conducting Mode (ON state): When a suitable gate current is applied, the SCR is triggered and conducts current from anode to cathode. Once turned ON, it remains conducting until the current falls below the holding current.
  3. Reverse Blocking Mode (OFF state): When reverse biased, the SCR blocks the flow of current, apart from a small leakage current.

Breakover Voltage of SCR

The breakover voltage (VBOV_{BO}) is defined as the minimum anode-to-cathode voltage at which an SCR changes from the OFF state (high impedance) to the ON state (low impedance) without any gate current being applied.

When the anode-to-cathode voltage exceeds the breakover voltage, the SCR turns ON automatically due to avalanche breakdown, even though the gate has not been triggered.

  • Applications: SCRs are widely used in motor speed control, light dimming, and controlled rectifier circuits.
Part (b)

DC Motor – Speed and Gross Torque Calculation

Given:

Armature voltage, $$V = 480\ V$$

Armature current, $$I_a = 110\ A$$

Armature circuit resistance, $$R_a = 0.2\ \Omega$$

Number of poles, $$P = 6$$

Flux per pole, $$\Phi = 0.05\ Wb$$

Number of armature conductors, $$Z = 864$$

Lap-connected armature winding, therefore number of parallel paths, $$A = P = 6$$

(i) Speed of the Motor

For a DC motor:

$$V = E_b + I_aR_a$$

Therefore, the back EMF is:

$$E_b = V-I_aR_a$$

$$E_b=480-(110\times0.2)$$

$$E_b=480-22=458\ V$$

The EMF equation of a DC machine is:

$$E_b=\frac{P\Phi ZN}{60A}$$

For a lap winding, $$A=P$$. Therefore:

$$458=\frac{6\times0.05\times864\times N}{60\times6}$$

Since 6 cancels:

$$458=\frac{0.05\times864\times N}{60}$$

Therefore:

$$N=\frac{458\times60}{0.05\times864}$$

$$N=636.02\ rpm$$

Therefore:

$$N\approx636\ rpm$$

(ii) Gross Torque Developed by the Armature

The gross mechanical power developed by the armature is:

$$P_g=E_bI_a$$

The torque is given by:

$$T_g=\frac{60P_g}{2\pi N}$$

Therefore:

$$T_g=\frac{60E_bI_a}{2\pi N}$$

Substituting the values:

$$T_g=\frac{60\times458\times110}{2\pi\times636.02}$$

$$T_g\approx754.3\ N\cdot m$$

The same result can be obtained directly from the torque equation:

$$T_g=\frac{PZ\Phi I_a}{2\pi A}$$

Substituting:

$$T_g=\frac{6\times864\times0.05\times110}{2\pi\times6}$$

$$T_g\approx754.3\ N\cdot m$$

Therefore:

$$T_g\approx754\ N\cdot m$$

Final Answers

Speed of the motor = $$636\ rpm$$

Gross torque developed by the armature = $$754\ N\cdot m$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) List the factors that determine the maximum developed torque of the induction motor. (6)

(b) The primary and secondary windings of a 500 kVA transformer have resistances of 0.42 and 0.0019 respectively. The primary and secondary voltages are 11000 V and 415 V respectively and the core loss is 2.9 kW, assuming the power factor of the load to be 0.8. Calculate the efficiency on: (10)

(i) Full load.

(ii) Half load;

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The maximum developed torque of an induction motor is determined by several factors, primarily derived from its equivalent circuit parameters and supply conditions. These factors include:

  1. Stator Supply Voltage (V1): The maximum torque is directly proportional to the square of the stator supply voltage. A higher supply voltage leads to a significantly higher maximum torque.
  2. Stator Resistance (R1): Higher stator resistance tends to reduce the maximum torque. It contributes to the overall impedance that limits current flow.
  3. Stator Leakage Reactance (X1): Higher stator leakage reactance reduces the maximum torque. Leakage reactance represents the magnetic flux that does not link both stator and rotor windings.
  4. Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2'): Higher rotor leakage reactance (referred to the stator) reduces the maximum torque. Similar to stator leakage reactance, it impedes the flow of rotor current and thus the torque production.
  5. Supply Frequency (f): The maximum torque is inversely proportional to the supply frequency. This is because reactances (X = 2πfL) are directly proportional to frequency, and synchronous speed (ωs = 2πf/P) is also directly proportional to frequency.
  6. Number of Poles (P): The maximum torque is directly proportional to the number of poles of the motor. This is due to its inverse relationship with the synchronous speed (ωs = 2πf/P).
Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

A balanced star connected three phase load has a coil of inductance 0.2 H and resistance 50 Ω in each phase. It is supplied at 415 V, 50 Hz. Calculate EACH of the following: (16)

(a) the line current;

(b) the power factor;

(c) the value of each of three identical delta connected capacitors to be connected across the same supply to raise the power factor to 0.9 lag;

(d) the new value of the line current.

Appeared In: Mar 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Given

  • Three-phase balanced star-connected load
  • Resistance per phase, R = 50 Ω
  • Inductance per phase, L = 0.2 H
  • Supply voltage, VL = 415 V
  • Frequency, f = 50 Hz
Part (a)

Line Current

Step 1: Calculate inductive reactance

$$X_L = 2\pi fL$$

$$X_L = 2 \times \pi \times 50 \times 0.2$$

$$X_L = 62.83\,\Omega$$

Step 2: Calculate phase impedance

$$Z = \sqrt{R^2 + X_L^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{50^2 + 62.83^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{2500 + 3947.6}$$

$$Z = 80.3\,\Omega$$

Step 3: Calculate phase voltage

For a star-connected load,

$$V_{ph} = \frac{V_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$V_{ph} = \frac{415}{1.732}$$

$$V_{ph} = 239.6\,V$$

Step 4: Calculate phase current

$$I_{ph} = \frac{V_{ph}}{Z}$$

$$I_{ph} = \frac{239.6}{80.3}$$

$$I_{ph} = 2.98\,A$$

For a star-connected load,

$$I_L = I_{ph}$$

$$\boxed{I_L = 2.98\,A}$$

Part (b)

Power Factor

$$\cos\phi = \frac{R}{Z}$$

$$\cos\phi = \frac{50}{80.3}$$

$$\boxed{\cos\phi = 0.623 \text{ lagging}}$$

Part (c)

Capacitor Value Required to Improve Power Factor to 0.9 Lagging

Step 1: Calculate active power

$$P = \sqrt{3}V_LI_L\cos\phi$$

$$P = 1.732 \times 415 \times 2.98 \times 0.623$$

$$P = 1335\,W$$

Step 2: Initial reactive power

$$\phi_1 = \cos^{-1}(0.623)$$

$$\phi_1 = 51.46^\circ$$

$$Q_1 = P\tan\phi_1$$

$$Q_1 = 1335 \times \tan(51.46^\circ)$$

$$Q_1 = 1673\,VAR$$

Step 3: Reactive power at desired power factor

$$\phi_2 = \cos^{-1}(0.9)$$

$$\phi_2 = 25.84^\circ$$

$$Q_2 = P\tan\phi_2$$

$$Q_2 = 1335 \times \tan(25.84^\circ)$$

$$Q_2 = 647\,VAR$$

Step 4: Capacitor VAR required

$$Q_C = Q_1 - Q_2$$

$$Q_C = 1673 - 647$$

$$Q_C = 1026\,VAR$$

Step 5: Calculate capacitance per delta-connected capacitor

For a delta-connected capacitor bank,

$$Q_C = 3V_L^2\omega C$$

where

$$\omega = 2\pi f$$

$$\omega = 2\pi \times 50$$

$$\omega = 314.16\,rad/s$$

Therefore,

$$C = \frac{Q_C}{3V_L^2\omega}$$

$$C = \frac{1026}{3 \times 415^2 \times 314.16}$$

$$C = 6.33 \times 10^{-6}\,F$$

$$\boxed{C = 6.33\,\mu F}\:per\:capacitor$$

Part (d)

New Line Current

At the improved power factor of 0.9,

$$P = \sqrt{3}V_LI_{new}\cos\phi_2$$

$$1335 = 1.732 \times 415 \times I_{new} \times 0.9$$

$$I_{new} = 2.06\,A$$

$$\boxed{I_{new} = 2.06\,A}$$

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is Controlled.

(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event

(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Description of circuit breaker:

The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.

Main Components:

  • Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
  • Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
  • Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
  • Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
Part (b)

If a circuit breaker opens due to a short circuit:

  • The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
  • The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
  • In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
  • This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).

Checks following the event:

  • Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
  • Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
  • Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
Part (c)

If a main circuit breaker fails to open under fault conditions:

  • Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
  • Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
  • Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
  • Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
  • After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
  • Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
  • Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) With respect to measuring instruments what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type.

(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

With respect to power transformers kindly explain the following protections

(a) Overload protection

(b) Overcurrent protection for phase faults

(c) Earth Fault protection

(d) Differential protection

(e) Directional protection

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

With respect to power transformers, the following protections:

Part (a)

Overload protection:

  • Protects the transformer against sustained overcurrent above its rated capacity, which would cause overheating of windings and insulation and shorten life.
  • Usually provided by thermal overload relays or by an oil/winding temperature indicator (WTI/OTI) which operates on the temperature of the oil or windings. The relay has an inverse time characteristic - the higher the overload, the faster it operates.
  • The overload relay gives an alarm first and trips the circuit breaker if the overload persists. It allows short-term overloads (e.g. during motor starting) but trips on sustained overload.
Part (b)

Overcurrent protection for phase faults:

  • Protects against short circuits between phases (phase-to-phase faults), which produce very high fault currents.
  • Provided by overcurrent relays (IDMT - inverse definite minimum time) connected to current transformers on the primary and/or secondary. These have an inverse time-current characteristic so that larger fault currents trip faster.
  • The relay operates the circuit breaker to isolate the transformer quickly, limiting damage. Instantaneous elements may be added for very high fault currents.
Part (c)

Earth fault protection:

  • Protects against faults between a winding and earth (ground), which may not be detected by phase overcurrent relays if the fault current is small.
  • Provided by earth fault relays connected in the residual circuit of the current transformers (the residual current is the vector sum of the three phase currents, which is zero under balanced conditions but non-zero on an earth fault).
  • Alternatively, a core-balance (zero-sequence) current transformer surrounds all three conductors and detects any imbalance due to earth leakage. The relay trips the breaker on an earth fault.
Part (d)

Differential protection:

  • Compares the current entering the transformer primary with the current leaving the secondary, using current transformers on both sides.
  • Under normal and through-fault conditions the currents are balanced (allowing for the turns ratio and vector group) and the relay does not operate. On an internal fault (winding-to-winding or winding-to-earth inside the transformer), the currents are unbalanced and the relay operates to trip the breaker.
  • This gives fast, sensitive protection for internal faults and is the main protection for large power transformers. It is biased to prevent operation on through-faults and magnetising inrush current.
Part (e)

Directional protection:

  • Detects the direction of power flow and operates only when the fault current flows in a particular direction.
  • Used where a fault could be fed from more than one source, e.g. in parallel feeders or ring systems. The directional relay compares the phase of the current with the voltage (or with a reference) to determine the direction of the fault.
  • It ensures that only the circuit breaker on the faulted side operates, isolating the fault while leaving healthy sections in service. It is used for busbar and feeder protection where discrimination by time alone is not sufficient.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.

(a) (i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.

(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched

(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:

(i) Error operated;

(ii) Functional.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Voltage time graph showing voltage dip:

The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.

(ii) Effect on small power installation:

When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.

The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.

Part (b)

(i) Error-Operated Voltage Control:

In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.

Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.

(ii) Functional Voltage Control:

This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.

Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In some circumstances electrical current may be induced into the shafting of rotating machinery.

(a) state the problem that may be caused by this current.

(b) explain with the aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances:

(i) d.c. machines

(ii) main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Problem caused by shaft currents:

  • Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
  • This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
  • In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
  • The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
Part (b)

How currents may be avoided or reduced:

(i) d.c. machines:

  • The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
  • The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
  • A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
  • Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.

(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:

  • The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
  • The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
  • An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
  • The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the significance of the root mean square value of an alternating current or voltage wave form; Define the form factor of such a wave form (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)

(i) peak load current,

(ii) DC load current,

(iii) AC load current

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$

Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$

Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$

The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:

$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$

$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$

(i) Peak Load Current

The peak value of the supply voltage is:

$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$

$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$

Therefore, the peak load current is:

$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$

$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$

Peak load current:

$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$

(ii) DC Load Current

For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:

$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$

$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$

DC load current:

$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$

(iii) AC Load Current

For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$

The AC component of the load current is:

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$

$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vra Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles, and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)

(i) The speed;

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier:

  • A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
  • During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
Part (b)

D.C. motor: armature current 110 A at 480 V, armature circuit resistance 0.2 ohm, 6 poles, lap-connected armature with 864 conductors, flux per pole 0.05 Wb.

  • Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
  • For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
  • E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
  • (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
  • (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
  • (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)

So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system. Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed.

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent.

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The applied voltage (starting torque is proportional to the square of the applied voltage, T proportional to V^2).
  • The rotor resistance (increasing rotor resistance increases the starting torque up to a maximum, and shifts the maximum-torque point towards standstill).
  • The rotor and stator reactances (leakage reactance) - higher leakage reactance reduces the starting torque.
  • The number of poles and the synchronous speed (torque depends on the air-gap power and synchronous speed).
  • The rotor and stator winding resistances and the turns ratio.
  • The supply frequency.
  • The air-gap flux.
  • Comparison with rated torque: the starting torque of a standard squirrel-cage motor is typically about 1.5 to 2 times the full-load (rated) torque. It is generally greater than the rated torque so that the motor can start the load, but not excessively high. For a slip-ring motor the starting torque can be increased up to the maximum torque by adding rotor resistance.
Part (b)

Three-phase induction motor, 4 poles, 50 Hz supply:

  • (i) Synchronous speed Ns = 120 f / P = 120 x 50 / 4 = 1500 rev/min.
  • (ii) Speed at 4% slip: N = Ns (1 - s) = 1500 x (1 - 0.04) = 1500 x 0.96 = 1440 rev/min.
  • (iii) Rotor frequency when rotor speed is 600 rev/min:
  • Slip s = (Ns - N)/Ns = (1500 - 600)/1500 = 900/1500 = 0.6.
  • Rotor frequency fr = s x f = 0.6 x 50 = 30 Hz.

So synchronous speed = 1500 rev/min, rotor speed at 4% slip = 1440 rev/min, rotor frequency at 600 rev/min = 30 Hz.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What is leakage flux as it applies to the iron-core transformer? How is it considered in the analysis of the transformer? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(i) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) the 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In an iron-core transformer, when the primary winding is connected to a supply voltage, a current flows through the winding depending on the load and the winding resistance. This current generates a magnetic field, forming a magnetic north and south pole, thereby creating magnetic flux between them.

The magnetic flux consists of lines that ideally pass through the iron core and link both the primary and secondary windings. This mutual flux is responsible for the energy transfer from the primary to the secondary winding and is essential for transformer operation.

However, not all magnetic flux produced by the primary winding links to the secondary winding. Some of the magnetic lines spread into the surrounding air space and do not pass through the secondary coil. This portion of the magnetic flux is known as leakage flux.

Leakage Flux:

  • Leakage flux is the portion of the magnetic flux generated by the primary winding that does not couple with the secondary winding.
  • It occurs due to the physical separation between the windings and non-ideal magnetic coupling.
  • The leakage flux induces an electromotive force (emf) in the primary winding itself, which opposes the current flow in the primary. This results in an additional voltage drop.

How It Is Accounted for in Analysis:

  • The opposition caused by the leakage flux is modeled as an inductive reactance (i.e., a leakage inductance) in series with the primary winding resistance.
  • This series inductance creates a voltage drop equal to the emf generated by the leakage flux.
  • In transformer equivalent circuits, the leakage inductances of both primary and secondary windings are included to reflect this non-ideal behavior.

Minimising Leakage Flux:

Interleaving Technique:

  • Leakage flux can be minimized by arranging the primary and secondary windings closely together on the same leg of the transformer core, a method known as interleaving.
  • This improves magnetic coupling and enhances energy transfer efficiency.
Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A twelve-pole, three-phase, delta connected alternator runs at 600 rev/min and supplies a balanced star connected load. Each phase of the load is a coil of resistance 35 ohm and inductive reactance 25 ohm. The line terminal voltage of the alternator is 440V. Determine (10)

(i) frequency of supply,

(ii) current in each coil,

(iii) current in each phase of the alternator,

(iv) total power supplied to the load.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

(b) Given:

  • Number of poles, P = 12
  • Speed, N = 600 rev/min
  • Line voltage, VL = 440 V
  • Resistance per phase, R = 35 Ω
  • Inductive reactance per phase, XL = 25 Ω
  • The alternator is delta connected and supplies a balanced star-connected load.

(i) Frequency of Supply

The frequency of an alternator is given by:

$$f = \frac{P \times N}{120}$$

Substituting the given values:

$$f = \frac{12 \times 600}{120} = 60\ Hz$$

Answer: Frequency = 60 Hz

(ii) Current in Each Coil

Since the load is star connected, the phase voltage is:

$$V_{ph} = \frac{V_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$V_{ph} = \frac{440}{1.732} \approx 254.03\ V$$

The impedance of each coil is:

$$Z = \sqrt{R^2 + X_L^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{35^2 + 25^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{1850} \approx 43.01\ \Omega$$

The current through each coil is:

$$I_{coil} = \frac{V_{ph}}{Z}$$

$$I_{coil} = \frac{254.03}{43.01} \approx 5.91\ A$$

Answer: Current in each coil = 5.91 A

(iii) Current in Each Phase of the Alternator

For a star-connected load:

$$I_L = I_{coil} = 5.91\ A$$

Since the alternator is delta connected, the phase current is:

$$I_{phase} = \frac{I_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$I_{phase} = \frac{5.91}{1.732} \approx 3.41\ A$$

Answer: Current in each phase of the alternator = 3.41 A

(iv) Total Power Supplied to the Load

First, calculate the power factor:

$$cos\phi = \frac{R}{Z}$$

$$cos\phi = \frac{35}{43.01} \approx 0.814$$

Total three-phase power is given by:

$$P = \sqrt{3} \times V_L \times I_L \times cos\phi$$

$$P = 1.732 \times 440 \times 5.91 \times 0.814$$

$$P \approx 3662.4\ W$$

$$P \approx 3.66\ kW$$

Answer: Total power supplied = 3662.4 W (approximately 3.66 kW)

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) List the various losses which occur in a squirrel cage induction motor on load.

(b) State which of these losses is:

(i) Independent of load current and speed;

(ii) dependent on load current;

(iii) dependent on speed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Losses in a Squirrel-Cage Induction Motor

Part (a)

Various losses occurring when the motor is on load

When a squirrel-cage induction motor operates on load, part of the electrical input power is lost in the motor due to the following:

  1. Stator Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Loss due to the resistance of the stator windings. It is proportional to the square of the stator current.
  2. Rotor Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Loss occurring in the rotor bars and end rings due to their electrical resistance. It is proportional to the square of the rotor current.
  3. Core (Iron) Losses: These occur mainly in the stator core and consist of:
    • Hysteresis Loss – caused by repeated magnetisation and demagnetisation of the iron core.
    • Eddy Current Loss – caused by circulating currents induced in the laminated iron core.
  4. Rotor core losses also occur, but under normal operating conditions they are very small and are generally neglected because the rotor/slip frequency is low.
  5. Mechanical Losses: These consist of:
    • Friction Loss – caused mainly by friction in the bearings and other rotating contact points.
    • Windage Loss – caused by air resistance acting on the rotating rotor and cooling fan.
  6. Stray Load Losses: These are additional small losses caused by leakage flux, harmonic magnetic fields, and non-uniform current distribution in the stator and rotor.
Part (b)

Classification of losses

(i) Losses independent of load current and speed

  • Stator Core (Iron) Losses – Hysteresis and Eddy Current Losses

These losses depend mainly on the supply voltage and frequency. Therefore, when the supply voltage and frequency remain constant, they are approximately independent of load current and motor speed.

(ii) Losses dependent on load current

  • Stator Copper Loss
  • Rotor Copper Loss
  • Stray Load Loss

The stator copper loss varies as I₁²R₁, while the rotor copper loss varies as I₂²R₂. Therefore, these losses increase as the motor load and current increase. Stray load losses also increase approximately with load current.

(iii) Losses dependent on speed

  • Friction Loss
  • Windage Loss

These mechanical losses vary with the speed of rotation. Friction loss generally increases with speed, while windage loss increases more rapidly with speed and is approximately proportional to the cube of speed.

Note: Rotor core loss also varies with rotor/slip frequency (fᵣ = s × f) and is therefore related to slip and rotor speed. However, under normal operating conditions it is very small and is generally neglected.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In the event of a failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, an emergency source of power must be available. State the circuits which must be fed from such a source and discuss the reasons governing the selection of such circuits.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In the event of a failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, certain circuits must be fed from the emergency source of power to ensure the safety and operational capability of critical systems. These circuits are essential for maintaining the functionality of key equipment and systems that are essential for the safety of the vessel and its crew. The selection of these circuits is based on several factors aimed at prioritising important functions and ensuring the vessel's ability to respond to emergencies effectively.

  1. Steering Gear Motor: The steering gear motor is essential for controlling the direction of the vessel, ensuring manoeuvrability and avoiding collisions, especially in emergency situations.
  2. Emergency Fire Pump: The emergency fire pump is vital for supplying water to firefighting systems in case of fire onboard, helping to contain and extinguish fires to prevent them from spreading.
  3. Emergency Air Compressor: The emergency air compressor provides compressed air for starting from a dead ship or if all the air from the main air bottle is lost.
  4. Breathing air compressor: for filling SCBA bottles that can be used during fire fighting and entry into enclosed spaces.
  5. Sprinkler/Hi-fog Pump: These pumps are responsible for spraying water for fire suppression to control and extinguish fires in different areas of the vessel.
  6. Fire Detectors: Fire detection systems continuously monitor various areas of the ship for signs of fire or smoke, providing early warning to enable prompt response and evacuation if necessary.
  7. Navigation Equipment: Navigation equipment, including radar, GPS, and gyrocompass systems, is essential for maintaining situational awareness, determining the vessel's position, and navigating safely, especially in adverse weather conditions or restricted visibility.
  8. Communication Equipment: Communication systems, such as radios, satellite communication terminals, and distress alert systems, enable the crew to communicate with shore authorities, other vessels, and emergency responders in case of distress or emergencies.
  9. Watertight Doors: Watertight doors are important in maintaining the vessel's watertight integrity and preventing the ingress of water in case of flooding or damage to the hull.
  10. Lifeboat Davits: Lifeboat davits are used for launching lifeboats and rescue boat, providing a means of evacuation for the crew and passengers in emergencies such as abandon ship.
  11. CO2 Room Exhaust Fan: The CO2 room exhaust fan is essential for ventilating the spaces where carbon dioxide (CO2) fire suppression systems are installed, ensuring that the room is safe to enter.
  12. Engine Room Vent Fan: One of the Engine room blower power is supplied from the Emergency generator, which helps in air supply to E/R and provides safe entry to the Engine room.
  13. E/R Pumps and Systems for First Start from 'Dead Ship': These pumps and systems are necessary for restarting the required pumps and systems in the engine room, enabling the vessel to restore power and propulsion from a state of complete power loss ('Dead Ship').
  14. Emergency Lights: Emergency lights are provided in the Engine room, accommodation, upper deck, escape routes, stairwells, and muster stations, ensuring visibility during power outages or emergencies.
  15. Battery Chargers: Battery chargers maintain the charge of essential batteries, including those for emergency lighting, communication equipment, and control systems, ensuring their readiness for use in emergencies.
  16. E/R Alarm System: The engine room alarm system monitors various parameters and conditions in the engine room, providing early warning of abnormalities, malfunctions, or hazards that could jeopardise the safety and operation of the vessel.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Draw a circuit diagram illustrating how a single thyristor ('silicon controlled rectifier') may be used to provide a variable voltage d.c. output from a single phase a.c. supply.

(b) Explain how the firing angle of the thyristor is varied.

(c) Sketch waveforms for the output voltage when the firing angle is:

(i) 60°;

(ii) 120°.

Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

B)It is phase-angle firing that thyristor controllers commonly adopt to precisely regulate the power of electric heaters.

Phase-angle firing, also known as phase cutting, phase-angle control, or phase-fired control (PFC), is a power-limiting method used for AC voltages. It regulates power by triggering a thyristor, SCR, triac, thyratron, or similar gated device into conduction at a specific phase angle of the AC waveform.

In the heating power controller, the thyristor acts like a switch that controls the on/off state of the heater in the main circuit. As shown in the figure of the APR3H series three-phase power controller, each phase is equipped with one thyristor. During each half AC cycle, the thyristor is triggered into conduction at a certain phase angle between 0 and 180 degrees, and then it naturally turns off at 180 degrees. The earlier the thyristor is triggered within the phase angle, the greater the power the controller delivers to the heater. Zero-crossing means triggering at the zero phase angle, where the thyristor conducts for the entire half cycle.

Waveform with Phase-Angle Control

The output voltage waveform of a thyristor power controller is clipped depending on the firing angle. At higher firing angles, the waveform is clipped more, resulting in a smaller area under the curve and, therefore, less average power delivered to the heater.

Summary

SCR (SCR Power Controller): Ideal for applications requiring precise power and temperature control, such as industrial heating systems. SCR allows for smooth, continuous modulation of power, making it suitable for systems needing fine adjustments.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed A.C. motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor;

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (16 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded;

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean- square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the KVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, if the supply voltage is v(t) = V Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A series circuit comprising a 50Ω resistor, a coil having resistance and inductance and a capacitor is connected across a 50 V variable frequency supply. When the frequency is 400 Hz the current reaches its maximum value of 0.6 A and the voltage across the capacitor is 200 V. Calculate EACH of the following: (10)

(i) the value of the capacitance;

(ii) the resistance and inductance of the coil;

(iii) the power taken from the supply;

(iv) the circuit power factor.

Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Operation and Output Voltage Across Load Resistor

Let the input supply be: v(t)=Vm​sin(ωt)

  • During the positive half-cycle, the diode conducts whenever v(t) exceeds the voltage across the capacitor. The capacitor charges instantly (ideal case) to the peak value Vm​.
  • After reaching the peak, the diode becomes reverse biased (since v(t)<Vm​), and the capacitor holds its charge.
  • The load resistor (R) is connected in parallel with the capacitor; thus, the voltage across Ris the same as across C.
  • If we ignore the small discharge of C(assuming R is large and/or C is large so discharge is negligible between cycles):

Voltage Across Load Resistor

The voltage across R after initial peak is: vR​(t)≈Vm​That is, the output is a DC voltage nearly equal to the peak value of the AC input.

Mathematical Expression

If capacitor discharge is considered negligible: vout​(t)=Vm​If the discharge is not negligible (realistic case), the output will have slight ripple and can be given by: vout​(t)≈Vm​−ΔVwhere ΔV is the ripple voltage (depends on R, C, and frequency f).

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit;

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (I) 0.8 lagging and (II) 0.8 leading. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase Induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) A 3 ph, 440 V, 60 Hz 8 pole induction motor runs at a power factor of 0.85 lag and drives a load of 8 kW at a speed of 14.4 rev/sec. The stator loss is 1 kW and the rotational losses (windage and friction) amount to 0.8 kW. Calculate EACH of the following: (10)

(i) the synchronous speed;

(ii) the rotor copper loss;

(iii) the input power to the motor;

(iv) the motor current.

Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The square of the applied voltage (T proportional to V^2).
  • The rotor resistance (increasing rotor resistance increases starting torque up to a maximum).
  • The rotor and stator leakage reactances.
  • The number of poles / synchronous speed.
  • The supply frequency.
  • The air-gap flux and the winding turns ratio.
  • Comparison with rated torque: the starting torque of a standard squirrel-cage motor is typically about 1.5 to 2 times the full-load torque, so that the motor can start its load. It is generally greater than rated torque but not excessive.
Part (b)

3-phase, 440 V, 60 Hz, 8-pole induction motor, p.f. 0.85 lag, drives 8 kW load at 14.4 rev/s. Stator loss 1 kW, rotational losses 0.8 kW.

  • (i) Synchronous speed: Ns = 120 f / P = 120 x 60 / 8 = 900 rev/min = 15 rev/s.
  • (ii) Rotor copper loss:
  • Slip s = (Ns - N)/Ns = (15 - 14.4)/15 = 0.6/15 = 0.04.
  • Shaft output = 8 kW. Rotor gross mechanical power = shaft output + rotational losses = 8 + 0.8 = 8.8 kW.
  • Air-gap power Pg = rotor gross power / (1 - s) = 8.8 / 0.96 = 9.167 kW.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg = 0.04 x 9.167 = 0.367 kW (367 W).
  • (iii) Input power to the motor = air-gap power + stator loss = 9.167 + 1 = 10.167 kW.
  • (iv) Motor current: I = P_in / (root 3 x V x cos phi) = 10167 / (1.732 x 440 x 0.85) = 10167 / 648.1 = 15.69 A.

So synchronous speed = 900 rev/min, rotor copper loss = 0.367 kW, input power = 10.17 kW, motor current = 15.7 A.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q1 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x

Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:

Half-wave rectification:

  • Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
  • Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
  • Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
  • The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.

Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:

  • Less Average current
  • Less average RMS
  • High pulsation output
  • Lower voltage developed
  • More ripple as compared to others
  • Efficiency is less as compared to others.

Full-wave rectification:

  • Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
  • Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
  • More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
  • Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.

Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)

(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators. (4)

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly synchronized. (4)

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided / reduced. (4)

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel state the consequences of: (4)

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between two of the following types of electronic circuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit (6)

(b) Amplifier circuit (5)

(c) Oscillator circuit (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces. (8)

(b) As second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the Machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage. (8)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors on which the speed of a motor depends? Discuss them for series and shunt motors. (6)

(b) A shunt motor supplied at 230 V runs at 900 rpm. When the armature current is 30 A, the resistance of the armature circuit is 0.4 Ω, calculate the resistance required in series with the armature circuit to reduce the speed to 500 rpm. Assume that the armature current is 25 Amps. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(b) given:

$$V=230V$$

$$N_1=900rpm$$

$$I_{a1}=30A$$

$$R_{a1}=0.4\Omega$$

$$N_2=500rpm$$

$$I_{a2}=25A$$

$$R_{a2}=?$$

$$E_{b1}=V-I_{a}R_{a1}$$

$$=230-30\times0.4$$

$$E_{b1}=218V$$

$$\frac{E_{b1}}{E_{b2}}=\frac{N_1}{N_2}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{E_{b1}\times N_2}{N_1}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{218\times500}{900}$$

$$E_{b2}=121.11V$$

$$E_{b2}=V-I_{a2}R_{a2}$$

$$R_{a2}=\:\frac{V-E_{b2}}{I_{a2}}$$

$$R_{a2}=\frac{230-121.11}{25}$$

$$R_{a2}=4.35\Omega$$

$$R\:to\:be\:added=4.35-0.4=3.95\Omega$$

$$R_{a2}=3.95\Omega$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Derive an expression for the emf induced in an A.C. generator. (6)

(b) A 3000 KVA, 6-pole alternator runs at 1000 r.p.m. in parallel with other machines on 3300V bus-bars. The synchronous reactance is 25%. Calculate the synchronizing power for one mechanical degree of displacement and the corresponding synchronizing torque. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Derivation of the e.m.f. induced in an a.c. generator:

  • Consider a coil of N turns rotating in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B. The flux linking the coil is phi = B A cos(wt), where A is the coil area and w the angular velocity.
  • By Faraday's law, the induced e.m.f. is e = -N d(phi)/dt = -N d(B A cos wt)/dt = N B A w sin(wt) = Em sin(wt).
  • The maximum e.m.f. Em = N B A w = N phi_m w, where phi_m = B A is the maximum flux linking the coil.
  • For a machine with Z conductors, P poles, flux per pole phi, speed N rev/min, the average e.m.f. per conductor is E_av = 2 phi N P / 60, and the generated e.m.f. is:

E = (P x phi x Z x N) / (60 x A) volts,

where A is the number of parallel paths (A = 2 for wave winding, A = P for lap winding).

  • The r.m.s. value of the generated e.m.f. per phase for a distributed winding is E = 4.44 x f x phi x T x k_w, where T is the number of turns per phase, f the frequency, and k_w the winding factor.
Part (b)

3000 kVA, 6-pole alternator at 1000 rev/min in parallel on 3300 V busbars. Synchronous reactance 25%.

  • Synchronous speed Ns = 1000 rev/min (6-pole at 50 Hz). Angular speed (mechanical) w = 2 pi x 1000/60 = 104.72 rad/s.
  • Per-unit synchronous reactance Xs = 0.25 p.u. (based on 3000 kVA).
  • Synchronizing power: for a small angular displacement, the synchronizing power per phase = (Ef V / Xs) x (electrical angle in rad). At no load Ef = V.
  • In per unit, Ef V / Xs = 1 x 1 / 0.25 = 4 p.u. of the per-phase base power. Per-phase base power = 3000/3 = 1000 kW, so Ef V/Xs = 4 x 1000 = 4000 kW per phase; total for 3 phases = 12000 kW.
  • One mechanical degree = (P/2) electrical degrees = 3 electrical degrees = 3 x pi/180 = 0.05236 rad.
  • Synchronizing power Ps = 12000 x 0.05236 = 628.3 kW.
  • Synchronizing torque Ts = Ps / w = 628300 / 104.72 = 6000 N m.

So the synchronizing power for one mechanical degree of displacement is about 628 kW and the corresponding synchronizing torque is about 6000 N m.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain the purpose of interpoles and state their magnetic polarity relative to the main poles of both generators and motors. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20kW. The various resistances are as follows: armature (including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series field 0.025 ohm, interpole field 0.028 ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115 ohm. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A 72 KVA transformer supplies

(i) a heating and lighting load of 12 KW at unity power factor

(ii) a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor.

Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit the ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) Evaluate for a frequency of 15 kHz, the amplification and the phase difference between input and output signals of a voltage amplifier using a triode having an amplification factor of 48 and a mutual conductance of 1.2 mA/V with an anode-load resistant of 160 kΩ. The output p.d. is fed by a coupling capacitor of negligible reactance to a subsequent circuit of resistance 480 kΩ and the total shunt capacitance is 90 μF. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Both Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (CLCBs) and High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses are protective devices designed to interrupt fault currents and limit damage in electrical systems. Their effectiveness can be compared as follows:

Feature

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker (CLCB)

High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) Fuse

Mechanism

Detects overcurrent/short circuit and trips rapidly, limiting peak current by contact separation and arc quenching.

Metallic element melts and vaporizes under fault conditions, forming a high-resistance arc to interrupt current.

Current Limiting

Limits current by rapid contact opening and arc control, preventing the prospective peak fault current.

Inherently provides excellent “cut-off” characteristics via very rapid melting and arc formation; often superior for high fault currents.

Speed of Operation

Very fast (milliseconds).

Extremely fast; often faster than CLCBs for very high prospective faults.

Reusability

Resettable; allows quick restoration of power.

One-time use; requires replacement after operation.

Cost

Higher initial cost due to complex mechanism.

Lower initial cost, but replacement costs accumulate.

Maintenance

Requires periodic testing and calibration.

No maintenance; replace when blown.

Discrimination / Coordination

Adjustable trip characteristics allow easier selective coordination.

Coordination can be difficult; upstream fuses may blow prematurely.

Arcing

Arc formed between contacts; controlled by arc chutes and design.

Arc contained within fuse body, usually filled with sand.

Protection

Excellent for overloads and short circuits; may include advanced features like ground-fault protection.

Excellent for very high short-circuit currents due to rapid cut-off and low let-through energy.

Downtime

Very low—simply reset.

Higher—requires physical replacement.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction.

(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction.

(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three-phase circuit using capacitors.

(d) Explain ONE method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Meaning of power factor correction:

Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.

In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.

Part (b)

Advantages of Power Factor Correction

  • By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
  • With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
  • Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
  • Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
  • By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
  • With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
  • Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
Part (c)

Power Factor correction in a three-phase circuit using capacitors:

A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.

  • The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
  • The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
  • The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Part (d)

Other methods for Power Factor correction:

Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point.

(b) Explain why for most cases the neutral point is insulated.

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed.

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators.

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly synchronized.

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided / reduced.

(d) If two alternators operating in parallel what are the consequences of:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What is intrinsic electric safety?

(b) Can live maintenance be done on intrinsically safe circuits?

(c) Describe intrinsically safe equipment used onboard ship.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Intrinsic electric safety (IS) is a protection technique applied to electrical equipment and wiring used in hazardous areas. Its core principle is to prevent ignition of flammable atmospheric mixtures—such as gases, vapours, or dusts—by limiting the electrical and thermal energy available in the circuit to levels below those required for ignition.

This ensures that any sparks or hot surfaces produced by the equipment, even under fault conditions (e.g., short circuits, open circuits, component failures), cannot ignite the surrounding atmosphere.

Key characteristics of intrinsic safety:

  • Energy Limitation: Voltage and current are strictly limited using components such as resistors, Zener diodes, and fuses.
  • No Ignition Source: The design ensures that no spark or hot surface can release enough energy to ignite the hazardous atmosphere.
  • Fault Tolerance: The system remains safe even with multiple independent faults (e.g., “ia” protection level withstands two faults).
  • Use of Barriers: Intrinsically safe circuits are typically connected to non-IS circuits in a safe area through IS barriers that limit energy transfer.

Part (b)

Although intrinsically safe circuits are designed to remain non-igniting even under fault conditions—making them theoretically safe for live work in hazardous areas—live maintenance is generally NOT permitted or recommended on ships or in most industrial settings.

Reasons include:

  • Regulatory Restrictions: Marine regulations, company safety systems, and permit-to-work procedures typically prohibit live work in hazardous areas regardless of equipment protection type. The standard requirement is to de-energize and obtain proper permits.
  • Risk of Misidentification: Personnel may accidentally work on a non-IS circuit or introduce non-IS test equipment/tools into the hazardous zone.
  • Unpredictable Faults: Incorrect installation, hidden damage, or unexpected circuit faults may compromise intrinsic safety.
  • Best Practice: Always isolate, de-energize, and verify zero energy before maintenance in hazardous areas.

Thus, while IS circuits are designed to make live work safe, practical safety protocols and regulations almost universally prohibit live maintenance.

(c) Intrinsically safe equipment used onboard ship.

Intrinsically safe (IS) equipment is essential for safe operation in hazardous areas on ships—particularly tankers, gas carriers, and vessels transporting dangerous goods. Hazardous zones include cargo tanks, pump rooms, cofferdams, gas-dangerous deck zones, paint lockers, and battery rooms.

Common types of intrinsically safe equipment used onboard:

  • Portable Gas Detectors: Used to check for flammable gases, toxic gases, or oxygen deficiency before entering enclosed or hazardous spaces. Designed so that batteries, sensors, and circuits cannot ignite vapours.
  • Portable Two-Way Radios: Specially designed walkie-talkies preventing sparks or RF energy from igniting the atmosphere.
  • Portable Lighting (Torches/Hand Lamps): Battery-operated lights engineered to prevent sparks at switches, filaments, or terminals.
  • Tank Gauging Systems: Intrinsically safe sensors and transmitters installed in cargo tanks or pump rooms for measuring level, temperature, and pressure.
  • Fixed Gas Detection Systems: Permanently installed sensors in hazardous spaces (e.g., pump rooms) that continuously monitor for gas leaks, with IS-certified local wiring.
  • Process Control Instrumentation: Pressure transmitters, temperature sensors, valve indicators, and similar devices used in cargo handling systems within hazardous zones.
  • Personal Electronic Devices: IS-certified phones, tablets, and cameras used during inspections or data collection.

All intrinsically safe equipment carries an ‘Ex’ marking, specifying the explosion protection type (e.g., Ex i, Ex ia, Ex ib) and the applicable gas group and temperature class.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator.

(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator.

(c) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators.

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)
Part (a)

Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.

  • On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
  • On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.

If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.

However, some generator manufacturers include:

  • AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
  • Manual trimmer rheostat

even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:

  • Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
  • Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.

A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:

  • Reactors, and
  • Capacitors.

The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.

Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.

Part (c)
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors on which the speed of a motor depends? Discuss them for series and shunt motors. (6)

(b) A shunt motor supplied at 230 V runs at 900 rpm. When the armature current is 30 A, the resistance of the armature circuit is 0.4 Ω, calculate the resistance required in series with the armature circuit to reduce the speed to 500 rpm. Assume that the armature Current is 25 Amps. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(b) given:

$$V=230V$$

$$N_1=900rpm$$

$$I_{a1}=30A$$

$$R_{a1}=0.4\Omega$$

$$N_2=500rpm$$

$$I_{a2}=25A$$

$$R_{a2}=?$$

$$E_{b1}=V-I_{a}R_{a1}$$

$$=230-30\times0.4$$

$$E_{b1}=218V$$

$$\frac{E_{b1}}{E_{b2}}=\frac{N_1}{N_2}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{E_{b1}\times N_2}{N_1}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{218\times500}{900}$$

$$E_{b2}=121.11V$$

$$E_{b2}=V-I_{a2}R_{a2}$$

$$R_{a2}=\:\frac{V-E_{b2}}{I_{a2}}$$

$$R_{a2}=\frac{230-121.11}{25}$$

$$R_{a2}=4.35\Omega$$

$$R\:to\:be\:added=4.35-0.4=3.95\Omega$$

$$R_{a2}=3.95\Omega$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

Two three phase 415 V alternators supply a ship’s load comprising:

  • lighting totalling 800 kW at unity power factor; and
  • motors totalling 1700 kW at power factor 0.7 lag.

One alternator supplies 1400 kW at power factor 0.75 lag.

(a) Calculate EACH of the following for the other alternator: (16)

(i) the KVA output;

(ii) the power factor;

(iii) the line output current.

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Two 415 V alternators supply a ship's load: lighting 800 kW at unity p.f.; motors 1700 kW at 0.7 p.f. lag. One alternator supplies 1400 kW at 0.75 p.f. lag.

  • Total kW = 800 + 1700 = 2500 kW.
  • Reactive power of motors: kVA = 1700/0.7 = 2428.6 kVA; sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.49) = sqrt(0.51) = 0.714; kVAr = 2428.6 x 0.714 = 1734.7 kVAr (lagging). Lighting contributes no reactive power.
  • Total kVAr = 1734.7 kVAr (lagging).
  • Alternator 1: 1400 kW at 0.75 lag. kVA = 1400/0.75 = 1866.7 kVA; sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.5625) = 0.661; kVAr = 1866.7 x 0.661 = 1233.9 kVAr.
  • Other alternator (alternator 2):
  • (i) kW on alternator 2 = 2500 - 1400 = 1100 kW.
  • kVAr on alternator 2 = 1734.7 - 1233.9 = 500.8 kVAr (lagging).
  • kVA output = sqrt(1100^2 + 500.8^2) = sqrt(1,210,000 + 250,800) = sqrt(1,460,800) = 1208.6 kVA.
  • (ii) Power factor = 1100/1208.6 = 0.910 lagging.
  • (iii) Line output current: I = S / (root 3 x V) = 1,208,600 / (1.732 x 415) = 1,208,600 / 718.8 = 1681.5 A.

So the other alternator supplies 1100 kW at 0.91 p.f. lagging, kVA output 1208.6 kVA, line current 1681.5 A.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) With reference to an a.c. generator used in marine practice derive an expression for the frequency of the generated e.m.f. in terms of the speed of the machine and the number of poles. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20KW. The various resistances are as follows: armature (including brush contact) 0.15 Ω, series field 0.025 Ω, interpole field 0.028 Ω, shunt field (including the field-regulating resistance) 115 Ω. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor?

(b) A 72 kVA transformer supplies

(i) a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor,

(ii) a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power factor improvement capacitor which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse (6)

(b) Evaluate for a frequency of 15 kHz, the amplification and the phase difference between input and output signals of a voltage amplifier using a triode having an amplification factor of 48 and an mutual conductance of 1.2 mA/V with an anode-load resistant of 160 KΩ. The output p.d. is fed by a coupling capacitor of negligible reactance to a subsequent circuit of resistance 480 KΩ and the total shunt capacitance is 90μ F. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Both Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (CLCBs) and High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses are protective devices designed to interrupt fault currents and limit damage in electrical systems. Their effectiveness can be compared as follows:

Feature

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker (CLCB)

High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) Fuse

Mechanism

Detects overcurrent/short circuit and trips rapidly, limiting peak current by contact separation and arc quenching.

Metallic element melts and vaporizes under fault conditions, forming a high-resistance arc to interrupt current.

Current Limiting

Limits current by rapid contact opening and arc control, preventing the prospective peak fault current.

Inherently provides excellent “cut-off” characteristics via very rapid melting and arc formation; often superior for high fault currents.

Speed of Operation

Very fast (milliseconds).

Extremely fast; often faster than CLCBs for very high prospective faults.

Reusability

Resettable; allows quick restoration of power.

One-time use; requires replacement after operation.

Cost

Higher initial cost due to complex mechanism.

Lower initial cost, but replacement costs accumulate.

Maintenance

Requires periodic testing and calibration.

No maintenance; replace when blown.

Discrimination / Coordination

Adjustable trip characteristics allow easier selective coordination.

Coordination can be difficult; upstream fuses may blow prematurely.

Arcing

Arc formed between contacts; controlled by arc chutes and design.

Arc contained within fuse body, usually filled with sand.

Protection

Excellent for overloads and short circuits; may include advanced features like ground-fault protection.

Excellent for very high short-circuit currents due to rapid cut-off and low let-through energy.

Downtime

Very low—simply reset.

Higher—requires physical replacement.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

With reference to shipboard electrical distribution systems:

(a) describe the meaning of the term earth fault;

(b) explain why an insulated neutral is preferred for low voltage systems;

(c) sketch a circuit diagram of one arrangement for detecting phase to earth faults for a star neutral earthing resistor (NER)

(d) How is the ohmic value of a NER calculated to limit the earth fault current to the full load rating of a three-phase neutral earthed a.c. generator.

Appeared In: Oct 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Meaning of the term earth fault:

  • An earth fault is an unintentional connection between a live conductor (phase) and the earth (hull, frame, or earthed metalwork). It occurs when insulation fails, a cable is damaged, or moisture enters a terminal box, allowing current to leak from the live conductor to earth.
  • In a shipboard system, an earth fault can be a single phase-to-earth fault (which in an insulated system does not immediately cause a large fault current but leaves the system in a dangerous condition) or a more serious fault involving two phases.
Part (b)

Why an insulated neutral is preferred for low voltage systems:

  • In an insulated (unearthed) neutral system, a single phase-to-earth fault does not cause a large fault current to flow, because there is no direct earth return path. The system can continue to operate, and the fault is indicated by an earth fault alarm so it can be located and cleared at a convenient time.
  • This improves continuity of supply, which is important on a ship where loss of power could be dangerous.
  • It reduces the risk of electric shock and fire from a single earth fault, and prevents the large fault currents and arcing that would occur in an earthed system.
  • It allows the use of earth fault monitoring (insulation monitoring) to detect deterioration of insulation before it becomes a serious fault.
Part (c)

Circuit diagram for detecting phase-to-earth faults with a star neutral earthing resistor (NER):

  • The generator is star-connected with the neutral connected to earth through a neutral earthing resistor (NER).
  • The three phases are connected to the busbars through current transformers.
  • An earth fault relay is connected to the residual circuit of the three current transformers (the secondary windings are connected so that the relay sees the vector sum of the three phase currents, which is zero under balanced conditions).
  • On a phase-to-earth fault, the fault current flows through the NER to earth and returns through the faulted phase, producing an unbalanced current in the current transformers which operates the earth fault relay.
  • Alternatively, a core-balance (zero-sequence) current transformer surrounds the three phase conductors; on an earth fault the unbalanced current induces a signal that operates the relay.
  • The relay gives an alarm and/or trips the generator circuit breaker.
Part (d)

Calculation of the ohmic value of the NER:

  • The NER is chosen to limit the earth fault current to the full-load rating of the generator.
  • Full-load current of the generator: I_fl = S / (root 3 x V_line), where S is the rated kVA and V_line the line voltage.
  • The earth fault current is limited by the NER. For a star-connected generator, the phase-to-earth voltage is V_phase = V_line / root 3.
  • The NER resistance R = V_phase / I_fl = (V_line / root 3) / I_fl.
  • Substituting I_fl = S/(root 3 V_line): R = (V_line/root 3) / (S/(root 3 V_line)) = V_line^2 / S.
  • So the ohmic value of the NER = V_line^2 / S, where V_line is in volts and S in volt-amperes (or V_line^2 in kV and S in kVA gives R in ohms directly: R = (V_line in kV)^2 / (S in MVA) x 1000).
  • Example: for a 440 V, 1000 kVA generator, R = 440^2 / 1,000,000 = 0.1936 ohm.
Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In the event of failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, an emergency source of power must be available. State the circuits which must be fed from such a source and discuss the reasons governing the selection of such circuits.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In the event of a failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, certain circuits must be fed from the emergency source of power to ensure the safety and operational capability of critical systems. These circuits are essential for maintaining the functionality of key equipment and systems that are essential for the safety of the vessel and its crew. The selection of these circuits is based on several factors aimed at prioritising important functions and ensuring the vessel's ability to respond to emergencies effectively.

  1. Steering Gear Motor: The steering gear motor is essential for controlling the direction of the vessel, ensuring manoeuvrability and avoiding collisions, especially in emergency situations.
  2. Emergency Fire Pump: The emergency fire pump is vital for supplying water to firefighting systems in case of fire onboard, helping to contain and extinguish fires to prevent them from spreading.
  3. Emergency Air Compressor: The emergency air compressor provides compressed air for starting from a dead ship or if all the air from the main air bottle is lost.
  4. Breathing air compressor: for filling SCBA bottles that can be used during fire fighting and entry into enclosed spaces.
  5. Sprinkler/Hi-fog Pump: These pumps are responsible for spraying water for fire suppression to control and extinguish fires in different areas of the vessel.
  6. Fire Detectors: Fire detection systems continuously monitor various areas of the ship for signs of fire or smoke, providing early warning to enable prompt response and evacuation if necessary.
  7. Navigation Equipment: Navigation equipment, including radar, GPS, and gyrocompass systems, is essential for maintaining situational awareness, determining the vessel's position, and navigating safely, especially in adverse weather conditions or restricted visibility.
  8. Communication Equipment: Communication systems, such as radios, satellite communication terminals, and distress alert systems, enable the crew to communicate with shore authorities, other vessels, and emergency responders in case of distress or emergencies.
  9. Watertight Doors: Watertight doors are important in maintaining the vessel's watertight integrity and preventing the ingress of water in case of flooding or damage to the hull.
  10. Lifeboat Davits: Lifeboat davits are used for launching lifeboats and rescue boat, providing a means of evacuation for the crew and passengers in emergencies such as abandon ship.
  11. CO2 Room Exhaust Fan: The CO2 room exhaust fan is essential for ventilating the spaces where carbon dioxide (CO2) fire suppression systems are installed, ensuring that the room is safe to enter.
  12. Engine Room Vent Fan: One of the Engine room blower power is supplied from the Emergency generator, which helps in air supply to E/R and provides safe entry to the Engine room.
  13. E/R Pumps and Systems for First Start from 'Dead Ship': These pumps and systems are necessary for restarting the required pumps and systems in the engine room, enabling the vessel to restore power and propulsion from a state of complete power loss ('Dead Ship').
  14. Emergency Lights: Emergency lights are provided in the Engine room, accommodation, upper deck, escape routes, stairwells, and muster stations, ensuring visibility during power outages or emergencies.
  15. Battery Chargers: Battery chargers maintain the charge of essential batteries, including those for emergency lighting, communication equipment, and control systems, ensuring their readiness for use in emergencies.
  16. E/R Alarm System: The engine room alarm system monitors various parameters and conditions in the engine room, providing early warning of abnormalities, malfunctions, or hazards that could jeopardise the safety and operation of the vessel.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

With reference to squirrel cage induction, electric motor:

(a) Describe the construction of such a motor.

(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor.

(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load performance of an induction motor.

Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor

A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.

Main Components

1. Stator (Stationary Part)

  • Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
  • The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
  • When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).

2. Rotor (Rotating Part)

  • Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
  • These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
  • There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.

3. Air Gap

  • A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
  • Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.

4. Shaft and Bearings

  • The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
  • The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.

5. End Shields and Cooling System

  • End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
  • An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.

Characteristics

  • Simple and rugged construction.
  • Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
  • Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor;

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (16 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded.

(b) Explain how the parameters are monitored and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (26 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively and the curresponding leakage reactances are 1.1Ω and 0.035Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200V. Calculate (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of 0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the related torque.

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35Ω. When connected to a 220V, 50Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q1 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces.

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three-phase shipboard electrical distribution system:

(a) Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system

(b) Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system

(c) Describe how the Earthed neutral system is Earthed.

(d) Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an Earthed neutral system with regard to the risk of electric shock from either system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Sketch a magnetic overload device incorporating a dashpot and explain how the current and time settings of the device may be varied.

(b) With the aid of a sketch, outline the essential features of a three stage "preferential tripping" scheme for the main generators of a ship.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Magnetic overload device

Part (b)

Three-stage preferential tripping:

Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Describe Ingress protection rating and types of insulation. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Jan 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Ingress Protection (IP) Rating

Ingress Protection (IP) Rating is an internationally recognized standard defined by IEC 60529. It classifies and rates the degree of protection provided by electrical enclosures against:

  1. Solid foreign objects (dust, tools, fingers, etc.)
  2. Water/ moisture ingress

Format

The rating is expressed as IP followed by two digits:

Example: IP 56

  • First Digit (0–6): Protection against solids

Digit

Protection Description

0

No protection

1

Protection from large objects ( >50 mm )

2

Finger protection ( >12.5 mm )

3

Tools and wires protection ( >2.5 mm )

4

Small wires protection ( >1 mm )

5

Dust protected (limited ingress allowed)

6

Dust tight (no ingress permitted)

  • Second Digit (0–9): Protection against water

Digit

Protection Description

0

No protection

1

Vertical dripping water

2

Dripping water up to 15° tilt

3

Spraying water at angles up to 60°

4

Splashing water from any direction

5

Low pressure jets (all directions)

6

Powerful water jets

7

Temporary immersion in water

8

Continuous immersion in water

9K

High-pressure, high-temperature jets

Example Meaning:

  • IP 55 → Dust protected, protected against low-pressure water jets
  • IP 68 → Fully dust tight, can withstand continuous immersion

Types of Insulation

Electrical insulation prevents undesired flow of current and protects equipment and personnel from electric shock, fire hazards, and breakdowns.

A. Based on Application

Type of Insulation

Function

Primary Insulation

First level protection around current-carrying conductors

Secondary (Supplementary) Insulation

Additional protection if primary fails

Double Insulation

Combination of primary + supplementary to ensure complete safety (used in Class II equipment)

Reinforced Insulation

Single insulation with equivalent protection of double insulation

B. Based on Location in Electrical Machines

Type

Description

Slot insulation

Insulation between stator core and windings

Turn insulation

Between individual turns of a coil

Phase insulation

Between different windings/phases

Ground insulation

Between winding and earthed frame

Conductor insulation

Enamel or varnish on conductor wire

C. Based on Thermal Class (IEC 60085)

Materials are categorized by allowable operating temperature:

Class

Max Temperature

Example Materials

Class Y

90°C

Paper, cotton

Class A

105°C

Thermoplastic varnished paper

Class E

120°C

PVC

Class B

130°C

Mica, glass fiber, impregnated polyester

Class F

155°C

Silicone resin, Nomex

Class H

180°C

Silicone elastomers

Class C

>180°C

Mica, ceramic, glass (no organics)

D. Based on Environment/Installation

Type

Examples

Moisture-resistant

Rubber, PVC

Heat-resistant

Mica tapes, fiberglass

Chemical-resistant

Special polymers

Fire-retardant

Halogen-free insulation

Part (b)
Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding is located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, D.C. motor. (6)

(b) A 220 V, D.C. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kVAr (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kWAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction.

(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction.

(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three phase circuit using capacitors.

(d) Explain one method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Meaning of power factor correction:

Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.

In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.

Part (b)

Advantages of Power Factor Correction

  • By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
  • With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
  • Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
  • Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
  • By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
  • With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
  • Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
Part (c)

Power Factor correction in a three-phase circuit using capacitors:

A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.

  • The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
  • The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
  • The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Part (d)

Other methods for Power Factor correction:

Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)

(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators. (4)

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly synchronized. (4)

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided / reduced. (4)

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel state the consequences of: (4)

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What is intrinsic electric safety? (6)

(b) Can live maintenance be done on intrinsically safe circuits? (5)

(c) Describe intrinsically safe equipment used on board ship. (5)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Intrinsic electric safety (IS) is a protection technique applied to electrical equipment and wiring used in hazardous areas. Its core principle is to prevent ignition of flammable atmospheric mixtures—such as gases, vapours, or dusts—by limiting the electrical and thermal energy available in the circuit to levels below those required for ignition.

This ensures that any sparks or hot surfaces produced by the equipment, even under fault conditions (e.g., short circuits, open circuits, component failures), cannot ignite the surrounding atmosphere.

Key characteristics of intrinsic safety:

  • Energy Limitation: Voltage and current are strictly limited using components such as resistors, Zener diodes, and fuses.
  • No Ignition Source: The design ensures that no spark or hot surface can release enough energy to ignite the hazardous atmosphere.
  • Fault Tolerance: The system remains safe even with multiple independent faults (e.g., “ia” protection level withstands two faults).
  • Use of Barriers: Intrinsically safe circuits are typically connected to non-IS circuits in a safe area through IS barriers that limit energy transfer.

Part (b)

Although intrinsically safe circuits are designed to remain non-igniting even under fault conditions—making them theoretically safe for live work in hazardous areas—live maintenance is generally NOT permitted or recommended on ships or in most industrial settings.

Reasons include:

  • Regulatory Restrictions: Marine regulations, company safety systems, and permit-to-work procedures typically prohibit live work in hazardous areas regardless of equipment protection type. The standard requirement is to de-energize and obtain proper permits.
  • Risk of Misidentification: Personnel may accidentally work on a non-IS circuit or introduce non-IS test equipment/tools into the hazardous zone.
  • Unpredictable Faults: Incorrect installation, hidden damage, or unexpected circuit faults may compromise intrinsic safety.
  • Best Practice: Always isolate, de-energize, and verify zero energy before maintenance in hazardous areas.

Thus, while IS circuits are designed to make live work safe, practical safety protocols and regulations almost universally prohibit live maintenance.

(c) Intrinsically safe equipment used onboard ship.

Intrinsically safe (IS) equipment is essential for safe operation in hazardous areas on ships—particularly tankers, gas carriers, and vessels transporting dangerous goods. Hazardous zones include cargo tanks, pump rooms, cofferdams, gas-dangerous deck zones, paint lockers, and battery rooms.

Common types of intrinsically safe equipment used onboard:

  • Portable Gas Detectors: Used to check for flammable gases, toxic gases, or oxygen deficiency before entering enclosed or hazardous spaces. Designed so that batteries, sensors, and circuits cannot ignite vapours.
  • Portable Two-Way Radios: Specially designed walkie-talkies preventing sparks or RF energy from igniting the atmosphere.
  • Portable Lighting (Torches/Hand Lamps): Battery-operated lights engineered to prevent sparks at switches, filaments, or terminals.
  • Tank Gauging Systems: Intrinsically safe sensors and transmitters installed in cargo tanks or pump rooms for measuring level, temperature, and pressure.
  • Fixed Gas Detection Systems: Permanently installed sensors in hazardous spaces (e.g., pump rooms) that continuously monitor for gas leaks, with IS-certified local wiring.
  • Process Control Instrumentation: Pressure transmitters, temperature sensors, valve indicators, and similar devices used in cargo handling systems within hazardous zones.
  • Personal Electronic Devices: IS-certified phones, tablets, and cameras used during inspections or data collection.

All intrinsically safe equipment carries an ‘Ex’ marking, specifying the explosion protection type (e.g., Ex i, Ex ia, Ex ib) and the applicable gas group and temperature class.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator. (5)

(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator. (5)

(b) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators. (6)

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)
Part (a)

Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.

  • On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
  • On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.

If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.

However, some generator manufacturers include:

  • AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
  • Manual trimmer rheostat

even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:

  • Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
  • Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.

A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:

  • Reactors, and
  • Capacitors.

The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.

Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.

Part (c)
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors on which the speed of a motor depends? Discuss them for series and shunt motors. (6)

(b) A shunt motor supplied at 230 V runs at 900 rpm. When the armature current is 30 A, the resistance of the armature circuit is 0.4 Ω, calculate the resistance required in series with the armature circuit to reduce the speed to 500 rpm. Assume that the armature current is 25 Amps. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(b) given:

$$V=230V$$

$$N_1=900rpm$$

$$I_{a1}=30A$$

$$R_{a1}=0.4\Omega$$

$$N_2=500rpm$$

$$I_{a2}=25A$$

$$R_{a2}=?$$

$$E_{b1}=V-I_{a}R_{a1}$$

$$=230-30\times0.4$$

$$E_{b1}=218V$$

$$\frac{E_{b1}}{E_{b2}}=\frac{N_1}{N_2}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{E_{b1}\times N_2}{N_1}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{218\times500}{900}$$

$$E_{b2}=121.11V$$

$$E_{b2}=V-I_{a2}R_{a2}$$

$$R_{a2}=\:\frac{V-E_{b2}}{I_{a2}}$$

$$R_{a2}=\frac{230-121.11}{25}$$

$$R_{a2}=4.35\Omega$$

$$R\:to\:be\:added=4.35-0.4=3.95\Omega$$

$$R_{a2}=3.95\Omega$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

Two three phase 415 V alternators supply a ship’s load comprising:

  • lighting totalling 800 kW at unity power factor; and
  • motors totalling 1700 kW at power factor 0.7 lag.

One alternator supplies 1400 kW at power factor 0.75 lag.

(a) Calculate EACH of the following for the other alternator: (16)

(i) the KVA output;

(ii) the power factor;

(iii) the line output current.

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Two 415 V alternators supply a ship's load: lighting 800 kW at unity p.f.; motors 1700 kW at 0.7 p.f. lag. One alternator supplies 1400 kW at 0.75 p.f. lag.

  • Total kW = 800 + 1700 = 2500 kW.
  • Reactive power of motors: kVA = 1700/0.7 = 2428.6 kVA; sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.49) = sqrt(0.51) = 0.714; kVAr = 2428.6 x 0.714 = 1734.7 kVAr (lagging). Lighting contributes no reactive power.
  • Total kVAr = 1734.7 kVAr (lagging).
  • Alternator 1: 1400 kW at 0.75 lag. kVA = 1400/0.75 = 1866.7 kVA; sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.5625) = 0.661; kVAr = 1866.7 x 0.661 = 1233.9 kVAr.
  • Other alternator (alternator 2):
  • (i) kW on alternator 2 = 2500 - 1400 = 1100 kW.
  • kVAr on alternator 2 = 1734.7 - 1233.9 = 500.8 kVAr (lagging).
  • kVA output = sqrt(1100^2 + 500.8^2) = sqrt(1,210,000 + 250,800) = sqrt(1,460,800) = 1208.6 kVA.
  • (ii) Power factor = 1100/1208.6 = 0.910 lagging.
  • (iii) Line output current: I = S / (root 3 x V) = 1,208,600 / (1.732 x 415) = 1,208,600 / 718.8 = 1681.5 A.

So the other alternator supplies 1100 kW at 0.91 p.f. lagging, kVA output 1208.6 kVA, line current 1681.5 A.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) With reference to an A.C. generator used in marine practice derive an expression for the frequency of the generated e.m.f. in terms of the speed of the machine and the number of poles. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20kW. The various resistances are as follows: armature (including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series field 0.025 ohm, interpole field 0.028 ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115 ohm. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A 72 KVA transformer supplies

(i) a heating and lighting load of 12 KW at unity power factor

(ii) a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor.

Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit the ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) Evaluate for a frequency of 15 kHz, the amplification and the phase difference between input and output signals of a voltage amplifier using a triode having an amplification factor of 48 and a mutual conductance of 1.2 mA/V with an anode-load resistant of 160 kΩ. The output p.d. is fed by a coupling capacitor of negligible reactance to a subsequent circuit of resistance 480 kΩ and the total shunt capacitance is 90 μF. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Both Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (CLCBs) and High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses are protective devices designed to interrupt fault currents and limit damage in electrical systems. Their effectiveness can be compared as follows:

Feature

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker (CLCB)

High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) Fuse

Mechanism

Detects overcurrent/short circuit and trips rapidly, limiting peak current by contact separation and arc quenching.

Metallic element melts and vaporizes under fault conditions, forming a high-resistance arc to interrupt current.

Current Limiting

Limits current by rapid contact opening and arc control, preventing the prospective peak fault current.

Inherently provides excellent “cut-off” characteristics via very rapid melting and arc formation; often superior for high fault currents.

Speed of Operation

Very fast (milliseconds).

Extremely fast; often faster than CLCBs for very high prospective faults.

Reusability

Resettable; allows quick restoration of power.

One-time use; requires replacement after operation.

Cost

Higher initial cost due to complex mechanism.

Lower initial cost, but replacement costs accumulate.

Maintenance

Requires periodic testing and calibration.

No maintenance; replace when blown.

Discrimination / Coordination

Adjustable trip characteristics allow easier selective coordination.

Coordination can be difficult; upstream fuses may blow prematurely.

Arcing

Arc formed between contacts; controlled by arc chutes and design.

Arc contained within fuse body, usually filled with sand.

Protection

Excellent for overloads and short circuits; may include advanced features like ground-fault protection.

Excellent for very high short-circuit currents due to rapid cut-off and low let-through energy.

Downtime

Very low—simply reset.

Higher—requires physical replacement.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is controlled.

(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would required following such event.

(c) Give a Safe procedure to follow should a train circuit breaker fail to open under fault condition.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Description of circuit breaker:

The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.

Main Components:

  • Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
  • Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
  • Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
  • Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
Part (b)

If a circuit breaker opens due to a short circuit:

  • The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
  • The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
  • In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
  • This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).

Checks following the event:

  • Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
  • Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
  • Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
Part (c)

If a main circuit breaker fails to open under fault conditions:

  • Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
  • Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
  • Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
  • Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
  • After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
  • Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
  • Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) With respect to measuring instruments, what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type.

(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

With respect to power transformers, kindly explain the following protections

(a) Overload protection

(b) Overcurrent protection for phase faults

(c) Earth Fault protection

(d) Differential protection

(e) Directional protection

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

With respect to power transformers, the following protections:

Part (a)

Overload protection:

  • Protects the transformer against sustained overcurrent above its rated capacity, which would cause overheating of windings and insulation and shorten life.
  • Usually provided by thermal overload relays or by an oil/winding temperature indicator (WTI/OTI) which operates on the temperature of the oil or windings. The relay has an inverse time characteristic - the higher the overload, the faster it operates.
  • The overload relay gives an alarm first and trips the circuit breaker if the overload persists. It allows short-term overloads (e.g. during motor starting) but trips on sustained overload.
Part (b)

Overcurrent protection for phase faults:

  • Protects against short circuits between phases (phase-to-phase faults), which produce very high fault currents.
  • Provided by overcurrent relays (IDMT - inverse definite minimum time) connected to current transformers on the primary and/or secondary. These have an inverse time-current characteristic so that larger fault currents trip faster.
  • The relay operates the circuit breaker to isolate the transformer quickly, limiting damage. Instantaneous elements may be added for very high fault currents.
Part (c)

Earth fault protection:

  • Protects against faults between a winding and earth (ground), which may not be detected by phase overcurrent relays if the fault current is small.
  • Provided by earth fault relays connected in the residual circuit of the current transformers (the residual current is the vector sum of the three phase currents, which is zero under balanced conditions but non-zero on an earth fault).
  • Alternatively, a core-balance (zero-sequence) current transformer surrounds all three conductors and detects any imbalance due to earth leakage. The relay trips the breaker on an earth fault.
Part (d)

Differential protection:

  • Compares the current entering the transformer primary with the current leaving the secondary, using current transformers on both sides.
  • Under normal and through-fault conditions the currents are balanced (allowing for the turns ratio and vector group) and the relay does not operate. On an internal fault (winding-to-winding or winding-to-earth inside the transformer), the currents are unbalanced and the relay operates to trip the breaker.
  • This gives fast, sensitive protection for internal faults and is the main protection for large power transformers. It is biased to prevent operation on through-faults and magnetising inrush current.
Part (e)

Directional protection:

  • Detects the direction of power flow and operates only when the fault current flows in a particular direction.
  • Used where a fault could be fed from more than one source, e.g. in parallel feeders or ring systems. The directional relay compares the phase of the current with the voltage (or with a reference) to determine the direction of the fault.
  • It ensures that only the circuit breaker on the faulted side operates, isolating the fault while leaving healthy sections in service. It is used for busbar and feeder protection where discrimination by time alone is not sufficient.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.

(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.

(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched.

(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:

(i) Error operated;

(ii) Functional.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Voltage time graph showing voltage dip:

The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.

(ii) Effect on small power installation:

When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.

The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.

Part (b)

(i) Error-Operated Voltage Control:

In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.

Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.

(ii) Functional Voltage Control:

This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.

Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In some circumstances electrical current may be induced in the shafting of rotating machinery.

(a) State the problem that may be caused by this current.

(b) Explain with the aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances

(i) d.c. mahcines

(ii) main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Problem caused by shaft currents:

  • Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
  • This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
  • In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
  • The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
Part (b)

How currents may be avoided or reduced:

(i) d.c. machines:

  • The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
  • The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
  • A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
  • Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.

(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:

  • The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
  • The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
  • An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
  • The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the significance of the root mean square value of an alternating current or voltage wave form. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)

(i) peak load current,

(ii) DC load current,

(iii) AC load current.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$

Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$

Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$

The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:

$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$

$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$

(i) Peak Load Current

The peak value of the supply voltage is:

$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$

$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$

Therefore, the peak load current is:

$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$

$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$

Peak load current:

$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$

(ii) DC Load Current

For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:

$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$

$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$

DC load current:

$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$

(iii) AC Load Current

For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$

The AC component of the load current is:

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$

$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt. what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has 6 poles and the armature is lap connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)

(a) The speed,

(b) The gross torque developed by the armature.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier:

  • A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
  • During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
Part (b)

D.C. motor: armature current 110 A at 480 V, armature circuit resistance 0.2 ohm, 6 poles, lap-connected armature with 864 conductors, flux per pole 0.05 Wb.

  • Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
  • For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
  • E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
  • (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
  • (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
  • (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)

So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque?

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system. Calculate:

(i) The synchronous speed.

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent.

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The applied voltage (starting torque is proportional to the square of the applied voltage, T proportional to V^2).
  • The rotor resistance (increasing rotor resistance increases the starting torque up to a maximum, and shifts the maximum-torque point towards standstill).
  • The rotor and stator reactances (leakage reactance) - higher leakage reactance reduces the starting torque.
  • The number of poles and the synchronous speed (torque depends on the air-gap power and synchronous speed).
  • The rotor and stator winding resistances and the turns ratio.
  • The supply frequency.
  • The air-gap flux.
  • Comparison with rated torque: the starting torque of a standard squirrel-cage motor is typically about 1.5 to 2 times the full-load (rated) torque. It is generally greater than the rated torque so that the motor can start the load, but not excessively high. For a slip-ring motor the starting torque can be increased up to the maximum torque by adding rotor resistance.
Part (b)

Three-phase induction motor, 4 poles, 50 Hz supply:

  • (i) Synchronous speed Ns = 120 f / P = 120 x 50 / 4 = 1500 rev/min.
  • (ii) Speed at 4% slip: N = Ns (1 - s) = 1500 x (1 - 0.04) = 1500 x 0.96 = 1440 rev/min.
  • (iii) Rotor frequency when rotor speed is 600 rev/min:
  • Slip s = (Ns - N)/Ns = (1500 - 600)/1500 = 900/1500 = 0.6.
  • Rotor frequency fr = s x f = 0.6 x 50 = 30 Hz.

So synchronous speed = 1500 rev/min, rotor speed at 4% slip = 1440 rev/min, rotor frequency at 600 rev/min = 30 Hz.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What is leakage flux as it applies to the iron-core transformer? How is it considered in the analysis of the transformer? (6) x

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find: (10)

(i) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) the 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In an iron-core transformer, when the primary winding is connected to a supply voltage, a current flows through the winding depending on the load and the winding resistance. This current generates a magnetic field, forming a magnetic north and south pole, thereby creating magnetic flux between them.

The magnetic flux consists of lines that ideally pass through the iron core and link both the primary and secondary windings. This mutual flux is responsible for the energy transfer from the primary to the secondary winding and is essential for transformer operation.

However, not all magnetic flux produced by the primary winding links to the secondary winding. Some of the magnetic lines spread into the surrounding air space and do not pass through the secondary coil. This portion of the magnetic flux is known as leakage flux.

Leakage Flux:

  • Leakage flux is the portion of the magnetic flux generated by the primary winding that does not couple with the secondary winding.
  • It occurs due to the physical separation between the windings and non-ideal magnetic coupling.
  • The leakage flux induces an electromotive force (emf) in the primary winding itself, which opposes the current flow in the primary. This results in an additional voltage drop.

How It Is Accounted for in Analysis:

  • The opposition caused by the leakage flux is modeled as an inductive reactance (i.e., a leakage inductance) in series with the primary winding resistance.
  • This series inductance creates a voltage drop equal to the emf generated by the leakage flux.
  • In transformer equivalent circuits, the leakage inductances of both primary and secondary windings are included to reflect this non-ideal behavior.

Minimising Leakage Flux:

Interleaving Technique:

  • Leakage flux can be minimized by arranging the primary and secondary windings closely together on the same leg of the transformer core, a method known as interleaving.
  • This improves magnetic coupling and enhances energy transfer efficiency.
Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A twelve-pole, three-phase, delta-connected alternator runs at 600 rev/min and supplies a balanced star-connected load. Each phase of the load is a coil of resistance 35 ohm and inductive reactance 25 ohm. The line terminal voltage of the alternator is 440V. Determine (10)

(i) frequency of supply,

(ii) current in each coil,

(iii) current in each phase of the alternator,

(iv) total power supplied to the load.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

(b) Given:

  • Number of poles, P = 12
  • Speed, N = 600 rev/min
  • Line voltage, VL = 440 V
  • Resistance per phase, R = 35 Ω
  • Inductive reactance per phase, XL = 25 Ω
  • The alternator is delta connected and supplies a balanced star-connected load.

(i) Frequency of Supply

The frequency of an alternator is given by:

$$f = \frac{P \times N}{120}$$

Substituting the given values:

$$f = \frac{12 \times 600}{120} = 60\ Hz$$

Answer: Frequency = 60 Hz

(ii) Current in Each Coil

Since the load is star connected, the phase voltage is:

$$V_{ph} = \frac{V_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$V_{ph} = \frac{440}{1.732} \approx 254.03\ V$$

The impedance of each coil is:

$$Z = \sqrt{R^2 + X_L^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{35^2 + 25^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{1850} \approx 43.01\ \Omega$$

The current through each coil is:

$$I_{coil} = \frac{V_{ph}}{Z}$$

$$I_{coil} = \frac{254.03}{43.01} \approx 5.91\ A$$

Answer: Current in each coil = 5.91 A

(iii) Current in Each Phase of the Alternator

For a star-connected load:

$$I_L = I_{coil} = 5.91\ A$$

Since the alternator is delta connected, the phase current is:

$$I_{phase} = \frac{I_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$I_{phase} = \frac{5.91}{1.732} \approx 3.41\ A$$

Answer: Current in each phase of the alternator = 3.41 A

(iv) Total Power Supplied to the Load

First, calculate the power factor:

$$cos\phi = \frac{R}{Z}$$

$$cos\phi = \frac{35}{43.01} \approx 0.814$$

Total three-phase power is given by:

$$P = \sqrt{3} \times V_L \times I_L \times cos\phi$$

$$P = 1.732 \times 440 \times 5.91 \times 0.814$$

$$P \approx 3662.4\ W$$

$$P \approx 3.66\ kW$$

Answer: Total power supplied = 3662.4 W (approximately 3.66 kW)

Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements. (16)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Methods of Testing HV Insulation

Megger Testing:

  • This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.

Polarization Index (PI) Test:

  • This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
  • The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.

3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.

Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
  • Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

Briefly describe following with respect to protective relaying:

(a) Principle of operation and characteristics of induction type relays. (6)

(b) Static and digital relays. (5)

(c) Protection of alternators, motors, transformer and busbar. (5)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Jan 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Principle of operation and characteristics of induction type relays:

  • An induction relay works on the same principle as an induction motor. It has a laminated electromagnet (with a shading ring or split phase) producing a rotating or travelling magnetic field, and a moving disc or cup in which eddy currents are induced.
  • The interaction between the flux and the eddy currents produces a torque on the disc proportional to the product of the fluxes and the sine of the phase angle between them, i.e. proportional to the current (or power) being measured.
  • The disc is restrained by a spring and a permanent magnet (damping magnet) provides braking torque proportional to speed.
  • When the current exceeds the relay setting, the operating torque exceeds the restraining torque and the disc rotates, closing the contacts after a time determined by the disc travel.
  • Characteristics: the relay has an inverse time-current characteristic - the operating time decreases as the current increases. It can be made inverse, very inverse, or definite minimum time (IDMT). The time setting and current (plug) setting can be adjusted. The damping magnet gives a smooth, accurate time delay.
Part (b)

Static and digital relays:

  • Static relays: use solid-state electronic circuits (transistors, diodes, operational amplifiers, comparators) instead of moving parts to measure the current/voltage and provide the time-current characteristic. They have no moving disc; the operating time is produced by electronic timing circuits. They are faster, more accurate, have no mechanical wear, and can provide complex characteristics. They require a d.c. auxiliary supply.
  • Digital (numerical) relays: use a microprocessor or digital signal processor. The analogue current/voltage signals are converted to digital form by an A/D converter and processed by software. They can provide multiple protection functions (overcurrent, earth fault, differential, distance) in one unit, with programmable settings, self-monitoring, fault recording, and communication with a monitoring system. They are highly accurate, flexible, and can be tested and set remotely.
Part (c)

Protection of alternators, motors, transformer and busbar:

  • Alternators: overcurrent, earth fault, differential (for large machines), reverse power (to prevent motoring), over/under voltage, over/under frequency, field failure, and stator earth fault protection.
  • Motors: overload (thermal), short-circuit (overcurrent), earth fault, single-phasing (phase failure), under-voltage, and locked-rotor protection. Large motors may have differential protection.
  • Transformer: overcurrent, earth fault, differential (main protection for internal faults), overloading (thermal), Buchholz relay (gas and oil surge) for oil-filled transformers, and over-fluxing protection.
  • Busbar: differential (biased) protection which compares the currents entering and leaving the busbar; on an internal fault the currents are unbalanced and the relay trips all breakers connected to the busbar, isolating the fault quickly to prevent extensive damage.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests? (10)

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance? (6)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Part (b)

Equivalent Resistance:

  • Equivalent resistance (Req) is the total resistance of the transformer windings referred to either the primary or secondary side.
  • It represents the combined resistance of the primary and secondary windings, taking into account the turns ratio of the transformer.
  • Equivalent resistance is used in calculations related to voltage drop, power loss, and efficiency of the transformer.
  • It is determined from the short circuit test.

In simpler terms: Imagine the transformer windings as a single resistor. The equivalent resistance is the value of that single resistor that would have the same effect on the circuit as the actual windings.

Q4 (16 Marks) General

Discuss the fundamental principles and advantages of electrical propulsion systems in marine vessels compared to conventional mechanical propulsion. What are some of the components that make up an electrical propulsion system? (16)

Appeared In: Jun 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Fundamental Principles of Electrical Propulsion:

Electrical propulsion systems in merchant vessels replace the conventional main diesel engine with electric motors as the prime movers for the propeller. The system generally involves diesel generators (or gas turbines) producing electrical power, which is then supplied through transformers, converters, and advanced control systems to high-voltage propulsion motors. These motors directly drive the propeller shaft, thereby eliminating the need for a direct mechanical link between the prime mover and the propeller.

Advantages of Electrical Propulsion:

  1. Instead of a large main engine, ships use comparatively small electrical motors of equal or greater output power, saving space and weight for cargo capacity.
  2. Electrical motors require much less maintenance compared to main diesel engines.
  3. The bottom platform remains almost empty without main diesel engines, allowing greater flexibility for locating machinery.
  4. No scavenge space waste oil production, and no cylinder oil or main lube oil usage.
  5. Ship construction can omit main engine sump space for lube oil and associated cofferdams.
  6. No requirement for starting air pipelines or starting air compressors for the main engine.
  7. No HFO/MDO purifiers running as in diesel ships, leading to reduced maintenance and cost.
  8. Sludge production is minimal, and condensate from the main engine and associated tanks can be neglected.
  9. Watchkeeping is easier since there are fewer parameters to monitor in the absence of a main propulsion engine.
  10. No vibrations and noise compared to diesel engines.
  11. Electric motors can operate even at 1 or 2 RPM, providing significant navigational advantages.
  12. No limitations on the number of starts, unlike diesel engines.
  13. Departure or arrival notice time is much shorter compared to diesel engine-propelled ships.
  14. Complex electrical and electronic circuits, including transformers and speed control devices, are required (a disadvantage but part of the system design).
  15. Sea water piping and cooling circuits are smaller in size compared to diesel ships.
  16. Regular transfer of fuel is unnecessary, as the ship’s generators may run on gas.
  17. Such ships are generally classed as high-voltage vessels, operating around 6.6 kV to 11 kV.
  18. Electric motor starting problems are far fewer compared to diesel engine reversing and starting difficulties.
  19. Electrical braking of the propulsion shaft is more effective than mechanical braking in diesel systems.
  20. The total operational cost of the ship is significantly lower than that of diesel-engine-propelled ships.

Components of an Electrical Propulsion System:

  • Diesel generators or gas turbines (prime movers for electricity generation).
  • High-voltage switchboards.
  • Transformers (to step voltage up or down).
  • Power converters and inverters (for variable speed control of propulsion motors).
  • High-voltage propulsion motors (typically synchronous or asynchronous motors).
  • Propeller shaft and coupling arrangements.
  • Control and monitoring systems (including automation and protection devices).
  • Cooling systems for generators, motors, and converters.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Briefly explain the principle of Operation of induction Motors (4)

(b) What is slip for an induction motor? (4)

(c) Draw a simple ladder logic diagram of star delta starting of an induction motor. (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A three-phase induction motor works by using three-phase alternating current (AC) to produce a rotating magnetic field, which causes the rotor to spin and generate mechanical energy. The stator, the stationary part of the motor, has three sets of windings spaced 120 degrees apart. When a three-phase AC supply is applied, it creates a rotating magnetic field around the stator. This rotating field moves at a certain speed, called synchronous speed.

The rotor, typically a squirrel cage design made of copper or aluminum bars, is placed inside this rotating field. As the magnetic field rotates, it induces an electric current in the rotor bars, which generates its own magnetic field.

The interaction between the stator’s rotating magnetic field and the rotor’s magnetic field creates a torque, causing the rotor to turn. The rotor always lags slightly behind the stator's rotating field, which is why it operates at a slightly lower speed than synchronous speed. This process allows the motor to efficiently convert electrical energy into mechanical motion without needing additional starting components.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Describe International protection rating and types of insulation. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Jan 2025
Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) D.C. motors are used where very high torque and/or precise speed control is required. How does the control of magnetic field flux and armature current relate to the starting characteristics of a D.C. motor in such applications? (6)

(b) A 220 V, D.C. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed, the torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Control of magnetic field flux and armature current in relation to starting characteristics of a d.c. motor:

  • The torque of a d.c. motor is T = k phi Ia, and the speed is N = (V - Ia Ra)/(k phi). By controlling the field flux phi and the armature current Ia, both torque and speed can be controlled.
  • At starting, the armature current must be limited to a safe value (typically 1.5 to 2 times full-load current) because at standstill the back e.m.f. is zero and the armature would otherwise draw a very large current (V/Ra). This is done by inserting a starting resistance in series with the armature, or by applying a reduced voltage.
  • The field flux is kept at maximum (full field) during starting to give maximum torque per ampere of armature current, so that a high starting torque is obtained with a limited armature current. This is important for applications requiring very high starting torque.
  • For precise speed control, the field flux is weakened (field weakening) to increase speed above base speed, while the armature current (and hence torque) is controlled by the armature voltage. Below base speed, speed is controlled by armature voltage at full field; above base speed, by field weakening at constant power.
  • By controlling both flux and armature current, the motor can provide high torque at low speed and precise speed regulation, as required for deck machinery and traction.
Part (b)

220 V d.c. shunt motor, armature resistance 0.5 ohm, armature current 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux for a 50% reduction in speed, torque constant.

  • Back e.m.f. at full load: E1 = V - Ia Ra = 220 - 40 x 0.5 = 220 - 20 = 200 V.
  • Speed is proportional to E/phi: N proportional to E/phi.
  • For 50% reduction in speed, N2 = 0.5 N1, so E2/phi2 = 0.5 (E1/phi1), i.e. E2 = 0.5 E1 (phi2/phi1) = 100 (phi2/phi1).
  • Torque constant: T = k phi Ia, so phi1 Ia1 = phi2 Ia2, giving Ia2 = Ia1 (phi1/phi2) = 40 (phi1/phi2).
  • Back e.m.f. at new condition: E2 = V - Ia2 Ra = 220 - 0.5 x 40 (phi1/phi2) = 220 - 20 (phi1/phi2).
  • Equating: 100 (phi2/phi1) = 220 - 20 (phi1/phi2). Let r = phi2/phi1.

100 r = 220 - 20/r -> 100 r^2 - 220 r + 20 = 0 -> 5 r^2 - 11 r + 1 = 0.

  • r = [11 +/- sqrt(121 - 20)]/10 = [11 +/- sqrt(101)]/10 = [11 +/- 10.05]/10.
  • Valid root: r = (11 - 10.05)/10 = 0.095 (the other root 2.1 is not physically valid for a speed increase).
  • So phi2 = 0.095 phi1, i.e. the flux is reduced to about 9.5% of its original value.
  • Percentage reduction in flux = (1 - 0.095) x 100 = 90.5%.
  • New armature current Ia2 = 40/0.095 = 421 A.

So the flux must be reduced by about 90.5% (to about 9.5% of the original) for a 50% speed reduction at constant torque.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kVAr (lagging).

Determine the kW load on B, the kVAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in same direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each section of round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the mains at the load where it is lowest. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x

Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:

Half-wave rectification:

  • Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
  • Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
  • Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
  • The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.

Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:

  • Less Average current
  • Less average RMS
  • High pulsation output
  • Lower voltage developed
  • More ripple as compared to others
  • Efficiency is less as compared to others.

Full-wave rectification:

  • Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
  • Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
  • More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
  • Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.

Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)

(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed? (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators. (4)

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly synchronized. (4)

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided / reduced. (4)

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel state the consequences of: (4)

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What is intrinsic electric safety? (6)

(b) Can live maintenance be done on intrinsically safe circuits? (5)

(c) Describe intrinsically safe equipment used on board ship. (5)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Intrinsic electric safety (IS) is a protection technique applied to electrical equipment and wiring used in hazardous areas. Its core principle is to prevent ignition of flammable atmospheric mixtures—such as gases, vapours, or dusts—by limiting the electrical and thermal energy available in the circuit to levels below those required for ignition.

This ensures that any sparks or hot surfaces produced by the equipment, even under fault conditions (e.g., short circuits, open circuits, component failures), cannot ignite the surrounding atmosphere.

Key characteristics of intrinsic safety:

  • Energy Limitation: Voltage and current are strictly limited using components such as resistors, Zener diodes, and fuses.
  • No Ignition Source: The design ensures that no spark or hot surface can release enough energy to ignite the hazardous atmosphere.
  • Fault Tolerance: The system remains safe even with multiple independent faults (e.g., “ia” protection level withstands two faults).
  • Use of Barriers: Intrinsically safe circuits are typically connected to non-IS circuits in a safe area through IS barriers that limit energy transfer.

Part (b)

Although intrinsically safe circuits are designed to remain non-igniting even under fault conditions—making them theoretically safe for live work in hazardous areas—live maintenance is generally NOT permitted or recommended on ships or in most industrial settings.

Reasons include:

  • Regulatory Restrictions: Marine regulations, company safety systems, and permit-to-work procedures typically prohibit live work in hazardous areas regardless of equipment protection type. The standard requirement is to de-energize and obtain proper permits.
  • Risk of Misidentification: Personnel may accidentally work on a non-IS circuit or introduce non-IS test equipment/tools into the hazardous zone.
  • Unpredictable Faults: Incorrect installation, hidden damage, or unexpected circuit faults may compromise intrinsic safety.
  • Best Practice: Always isolate, de-energize, and verify zero energy before maintenance in hazardous areas.

Thus, while IS circuits are designed to make live work safe, practical safety protocols and regulations almost universally prohibit live maintenance.

(c) Intrinsically safe equipment used onboard ship.

Intrinsically safe (IS) equipment is essential for safe operation in hazardous areas on ships—particularly tankers, gas carriers, and vessels transporting dangerous goods. Hazardous zones include cargo tanks, pump rooms, cofferdams, gas-dangerous deck zones, paint lockers, and battery rooms.

Common types of intrinsically safe equipment used onboard:

  • Portable Gas Detectors: Used to check for flammable gases, toxic gases, or oxygen deficiency before entering enclosed or hazardous spaces. Designed so that batteries, sensors, and circuits cannot ignite vapours.
  • Portable Two-Way Radios: Specially designed walkie-talkies preventing sparks or RF energy from igniting the atmosphere.
  • Portable Lighting (Torches/Hand Lamps): Battery-operated lights engineered to prevent sparks at switches, filaments, or terminals.
  • Tank Gauging Systems: Intrinsically safe sensors and transmitters installed in cargo tanks or pump rooms for measuring level, temperature, and pressure.
  • Fixed Gas Detection Systems: Permanently installed sensors in hazardous spaces (e.g., pump rooms) that continuously monitor for gas leaks, with IS-certified local wiring.
  • Process Control Instrumentation: Pressure transmitters, temperature sensors, valve indicators, and similar devices used in cargo handling systems within hazardous zones.
  • Personal Electronic Devices: IS-certified phones, tablets, and cameras used during inspections or data collection.

All intrinsically safe equipment carries an ‘Ex’ marking, specifying the explosion protection type (e.g., Ex i, Ex ia, Ex ib) and the applicable gas group and temperature class.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator. (5)

(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator. (5)

(b) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators. (6)

Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)
Part (a)

Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.

  • On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
  • On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.

If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.

However, some generator manufacturers include:

  • AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
  • Manual trimmer rheostat

even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:

  • Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
  • Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.

A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:

  • Reactors, and
  • Capacitors.

The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.

Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.

Part (c)
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are factors on which the speed of a motor depends? Discuss them for series and shunt motors. (6)

(b) A shunt motor supplied at 230 V runs at 900 rpm. When the armature current is 30 A, the resistance of the armature circuit is 0.4 Ω, calculate the resistance required in series with the armature circuit to reduce the speed to 500 rpm. Assume that the armature current is 25 Amps. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(b) given:

$$V=230V$$

$$N_1=900rpm$$

$$I_{a1}=30A$$

$$R_{a1}=0.4\Omega$$

$$N_2=500rpm$$

$$I_{a2}=25A$$

$$R_{a2}=?$$

$$E_{b1}=V-I_{a}R_{a1}$$

$$=230-30\times0.4$$

$$E_{b1}=218V$$

$$\frac{E_{b1}}{E_{b2}}=\frac{N_1}{N_2}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{E_{b1}\times N_2}{N_1}$$

$$E_{b2}=\frac{218\times500}{900}$$

$$E_{b2}=121.11V$$

$$E_{b2}=V-I_{a2}R_{a2}$$

$$R_{a2}=\:\frac{V-E_{b2}}{I_{a2}}$$

$$R_{a2}=\frac{230-121.11}{25}$$

$$R_{a2}=4.35\Omega$$

$$R\:to\:be\:added=4.35-0.4=3.95\Omega$$

$$R_{a2}=3.95\Omega$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Derive an expression for the emf induced in an A.C. generator. (6)

(b) A 3000 KVA, 6-pole alternator runs at 1000 r.p.m. in parallel with other machines on 3300V bus-bars. The synchronous reactance is 25%. Calculate the synchronizing power for one mechanical degree of displacement and the corresponding synchronizing torque. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Derivation of the e.m.f. induced in an a.c. generator:

  • Consider a coil of N turns rotating in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B. The flux linking the coil is phi = B A cos(wt), where A is the coil area and w the angular velocity.
  • By Faraday's law, the induced e.m.f. is e = -N d(phi)/dt = -N d(B A cos wt)/dt = N B A w sin(wt) = Em sin(wt).
  • The maximum e.m.f. Em = N B A w = N phi_m w, where phi_m = B A is the maximum flux linking the coil.
  • For a machine with Z conductors, P poles, flux per pole phi, speed N rev/min, the average e.m.f. per conductor is E_av = 2 phi N P / 60, and the generated e.m.f. is:

E = (P x phi x Z x N) / (60 x A) volts,

where A is the number of parallel paths (A = 2 for wave winding, A = P for lap winding).

  • The r.m.s. value of the generated e.m.f. per phase for a distributed winding is E = 4.44 x f x phi x T x k_w, where T is the number of turns per phase, f the frequency, and k_w the winding factor.
Part (b)

3000 kVA, 6-pole alternator at 1000 rev/min in parallel on 3300 V busbars. Synchronous reactance 25%.

  • Synchronous speed Ns = 1000 rev/min (6-pole at 50 Hz). Angular speed (mechanical) w = 2 pi x 1000/60 = 104.72 rad/s.
  • Per-unit synchronous reactance Xs = 0.25 p.u. (based on 3000 kVA).
  • Synchronizing power: for a small angular displacement, the synchronizing power per phase = (Ef V / Xs) x (electrical angle in rad). At no load Ef = V.
  • In per unit, Ef V / Xs = 1 x 1 / 0.25 = 4 p.u. of the per-phase base power. Per-phase base power = 3000/3 = 1000 kW, so Ef V/Xs = 4 x 1000 = 4000 kW per phase; total for 3 phases = 12000 kW.
  • One mechanical degree = (P/2) electrical degrees = 3 electrical degrees = 3 x pi/180 = 0.05236 rad.
  • Synchronizing power Ps = 12000 x 0.05236 = 628.3 kW.
  • Synchronizing torque Ts = Ps / w = 628300 / 104.72 = 6000 N m.

So the synchronizing power for one mechanical degree of displacement is about 628 kW and the corresponding synchronizing torque is about 6000 N m.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain the purpose of interpoles and state their magnetic polarity relative to the main poles of both generators and motors. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20kW. The various resistances are as follows: armature (including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series field 0.025 ohm, interpole field 0.028 ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115 ohm. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A 72 KVA transformer supplies

(i) a heating and lighting load of 12 KW at unity power factor

(ii) a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor.

Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit the ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) Evaluate for a frequency of 15 kHz, the amplification and the phase difference between input and output signals of a voltage amplifier using a triode having an amplification factor of 48 and a mutual conductance of 1.2 mA/V with an anode-load resistant of 160 kΩ. The output p.d. is fed by a coupling capacitor of negligible reactance to a subsequent circuit of resistance 480 kΩ and the total shunt capacitance is 90 μF. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Part (a)

Both Current Limiting Circuit Breakers (CLCBs) and High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses are protective devices designed to interrupt fault currents and limit damage in electrical systems. Their effectiveness can be compared as follows:

Feature

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker (CLCB)

High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) Fuse

Mechanism

Detects overcurrent/short circuit and trips rapidly, limiting peak current by contact separation and arc quenching.

Metallic element melts and vaporizes under fault conditions, forming a high-resistance arc to interrupt current.

Current Limiting

Limits current by rapid contact opening and arc control, preventing the prospective peak fault current.

Inherently provides excellent “cut-off” characteristics via very rapid melting and arc formation; often superior for high fault currents.

Speed of Operation

Very fast (milliseconds).

Extremely fast; often faster than CLCBs for very high prospective faults.

Reusability

Resettable; allows quick restoration of power.

One-time use; requires replacement after operation.

Cost

Higher initial cost due to complex mechanism.

Lower initial cost, but replacement costs accumulate.

Maintenance

Requires periodic testing and calibration.

No maintenance; replace when blown.

Discrimination / Coordination

Adjustable trip characteristics allow easier selective coordination.

Coordination can be difficult; upstream fuses may blow prematurely.

Arcing

Arc formed between contacts; controlled by arc chutes and design.

Arc contained within fuse body, usually filled with sand.

Protection

Excellent for overloads and short circuits; may include advanced features like ground-fault protection.

Excellent for very high short-circuit currents due to rapid cut-off and low let-through energy.

Downtime

Very low—simply reset.

Higher—requires physical replacement.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Briefly explain the principle of Operation of Induction Motors (4)

(b) What is slip for an induction motor? (4)

(c) Draw a simple ladder logic diagram of star delta starting of an induction motor. (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A three-phase induction motor works by using three-phase alternating current (AC) to produce a rotating magnetic field, which causes the rotor to spin and generate mechanical energy. The stator, the stationary part of the motor, has three sets of windings spaced 120 degrees apart. When a three-phase AC supply is applied, it creates a rotating magnetic field around the stator. This rotating field moves at a certain speed, called synchronous speed.

The rotor, typically a squirrel cage design made of copper or aluminum bars, is placed inside this rotating field. As the magnetic field rotates, it induces an electric current in the rotor bars, which generates its own magnetic field.

The interaction between the stator’s rotating magnetic field and the rotor’s magnetic field creates a torque, causing the rotor to turn. The rotor always lags slightly behind the stator's rotating field, which is why it operates at a slightly lower speed than synchronous speed. This process allows the motor to efficiently convert electrical energy into mechanical motion without needing additional starting components.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

What is Zener diode and how does it regulate the voltage? What happens to the series current, load current and Zener current when the D.C. input voltage of a Zener regulator increases? Draw a neat diagram of Zener regulator and explain. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A Zener Diode, also known as a breakdown diode, is a heavily doped semiconductor device that is designed to operate in the reverse direction.
In the reverse biased state if a voltage smaller than the breakdown voltage is applied to a zener it will not conduct more than its leakage current but if a high enough voltage is applied the zener will start to conduct. As can be seen from the normal diode characteristic, when the diode breaks down, the voltage across it is (ideally) constant regardless of the current that it is carrying. Zener diodes are manufactured with specific breakdown voltages ranging from a few volts to a few hundred volts. If they are incorporated in circuits with resistors then the voltage across the zener will be constant even in the event of a surge in supply voltage.
When the d.c. input voltage of a zener regulator increases, Zener current and Series current increases, but the load current remains unchanged.

There is a series resistor connected to the circuit in order to limit the current into the diode. It is connected to the positive terminal of the d.c. Current through the diode increases when the voltage across the diode tends to increase which results in the voltage drop across the resistor. Similarly, the current through the diode decreases when the voltage across the diode tends to decrease. Here, the voltage drop across the resistor is very less, and the output voltage results normally.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI Test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements? (16)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Methods of Testing HV Insulation

Megger Testing:

  • This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.

Polarization Index (PI) Test:

  • This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
  • The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.

3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.

Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
  • Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 2x

What are the conditions for producing sustained oscillations? Classify oscillations with respect to frequency range, principle involved, etc. It is possible to produce oscillations with RC networks in phase shift oscillators. Discuss in detail. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Conditions for Sustained Oscillations:

To produce sustained oscillations in a typical tank circuit, the following conditions must be met:

  1. Energy Compensation: The amount of energy supplied must compensate for the losses in the tank circuit and match the energy drawn by the load.
  2. Frequency Match: The applied energy should be of the same frequency as that of the natural oscillations in the tank circuit.
  3. Positive Feedback: The amplified energy must be in phase with the existing oscillations, i.e., positive feedback should exist within the amplifier loop.

Classification of Oscillators:

Oscillators can be classified based on the method of feedback and frequency range as follows:

Oscillator Type

Feedback Method

Frequency Range

Tuned Collector Oscillator

Transformer Coupling

10 kHz – 1000 kHz

Hartley Oscillator

Inductive Coupling

100 Hz – 1 MHz

Colpitt's Oscillator

Capacitive Coupling

100 Hz – 1 MHz

Phase Shift Oscillator

RC Network

100 Hz – 10 kHz

Wein Bridge Oscillator

Bridge Network

10 Hz – 30 kHz

Crystal Oscillator

Piezoelectric Crystal

100 kHz – 100 MHz

$$if\:R_1=R_2=R_3=R;\:and$$

$$C_1=C_2=C_3;\:then$$

$$frequency\:of\:oscillation;\:f_{o}=\frac{1}{2\pi RC\sqrt6}$$

Phase Shift Oscillator (Using RC Network):

  • A Phase Shift Oscillator uses a single transistor amplifier along with a RC phase shift network.
  • The transistor amplifier provides a 180° phase shift, and the RC network provides another 180° phase shift, resulting in a total 360° phase shift (or 0° net phase difference).
  • This ensures positive feedback, which is a key requirement for sustained oscillations.

Advantages:

  • No need for inductors or transformers.
  • Capable of producing very low frequencies.
  • Provides good frequency stability.

Disadvantage:

  • Suitable only for low power output applications.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and dis-advantages. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Soft Starter

Advantages

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, thereby reducing starting current, avoiding the high current shock associated with direct starting, and minimizing voltage dips on the power system.
  • It provides smooth acceleration of the motor and reduces mechanical stress on shafts, couplings, gears, belts, and other connected equipment, thereby extending the service life of the motor and machinery.
  • It increases motor life by reducing both thermal stress and mechanical stress during starting.
  • It eliminates switching transients that occur in conventional starters such as star-delta starters.
  • It offers adjustable starting characteristics, including current limit, ramp time, and initial voltage.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with a frequency converter (VFD), the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.
  • It is suitable for applications such as pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors, marine machinery, and other motor-driven equipment.

Disadvantages

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control various motor parameters during starting like a frequency converter (VFD).
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve operating efficiency during normal running conditions.
  • It has a higher cost than DOL and star-delta starters.
  • It produces harmonics in the supply due to phase-angle control.
  • It operates with a poor power factor during starting.
  • SCRs generate heat and therefore require suitable cooling arrangements.
  • It provides reduced starting torque, which may be unsuitable for heavy-load starting applications.
  • It requires more complex control circuitry than conventional motor starters.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Describe International protection rating and types of insulation. (6)

(b) A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 KW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor: Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit the ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Ingress Protection (IP) Rating

Ingress Protection (IP) Rating is an internationally recognized standard defined by IEC 60529. It classifies and rates the degree of protection provided by electrical enclosures against:

  1. Solid foreign objects (dust, tools, fingers, etc.)
  2. Water/ moisture ingress

Format

The rating is expressed as IP followed by two digits:

Example: IP 56

  • First Digit (0–6): Protection against solids

Digit

Protection Description

0

No protection

1

Protection from large objects ( >50 mm )

2

Finger protection ( >12.5 mm )

3

Tools and wires protection ( >2.5 mm )

4

Small wires protection ( >1 mm )

5

Dust protected (limited ingress allowed)

6

Dust tight (no ingress permitted)

  • Second Digit (0–9): Protection against water

Digit

Protection Description

0

No protection

1

Vertical dripping water

2

Dripping water up to 15° tilt

3

Spraying water at angles up to 60°

4

Splashing water from any direction

5

Low pressure jets (all directions)

6

Powerful water jets

7

Temporary immersion in water

8

Continuous immersion in water

9K

High-pressure, high-temperature jets

Example Meaning:

  • IP 55 → Dust protected, protected against low-pressure water jets
  • IP 68 → Fully dust tight, can withstand continuous immersion

Types of Insulation

Electrical insulation prevents undesired flow of current and protects equipment and personnel from electric shock, fire hazards, and breakdowns.

A. Based on Application

Type of Insulation

Function

Primary Insulation

First level protection around current-carrying conductors

Secondary (Supplementary) Insulation

Additional protection if primary fails

Double Insulation

Combination of primary + supplementary to ensure complete safety (used in Class II equipment)

Reinforced Insulation

Single insulation with equivalent protection of double insulation

B. Based on Location in Electrical Machines

Type

Description

Slot insulation

Insulation between stator core and windings

Turn insulation

Between individual turns of a coil

Phase insulation

Between different windings/phases

Ground insulation

Between winding and earthed frame

Conductor insulation

Enamel or varnish on conductor wire

C. Based on Thermal Class (IEC 60085)

Materials are categorized by allowable operating temperature:

Class

Max Temperature

Example Materials

Class Y

90°C

Paper, cotton

Class A

105°C

Thermoplastic varnished paper

Class E

120°C

PVC

Class B

130°C

Mica, glass fiber, impregnated polyester

Class F

155°C

Silicone resin, Nomex

Class H

180°C

Silicone elastomers

Class C

>180°C

Mica, ceramic, glass (no organics)

D. Based on Environment/Installation

Type

Examples

Moisture-resistant

Rubber, PVC

Heat-resistant

Mica tapes, fiberglass

Chemical-resistant

Special polymers

Fire-retardant

Halogen-free insulation

Part (b)
Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series Motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system. Calculate. (10)

(i) The synchronous speed:

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent:

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find

(i) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) the ‘breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 Ohm, and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an A.C. generator. (8)

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one A.C. generator suddenly fails when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are usually provided for such events? (8)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance.

(b) Cascade system.

(c) Pole-changing.

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Comparison of methods of speed regulation of three-phase induction motors used in tankers:

Part (a)

Rotor resistance (slip-ring motor):

  • Method: additional resistance is inserted in the rotor circuit of a slip-ring (wound rotor) induction motor. Increasing the rotor resistance increases the slip for a given torque, so the speed falls. The speed is varied by varying the rotor resistance.
  • Characteristics: gives speed control only below synchronous speed (from full speed down to standstill). The speed regulation is poor (speed varies with load). The efficiency is low because the slip power is dissipated as heat in the rotor resistance. The starting torque can be increased.
  • Advantages: simple, cheap, gives high starting torque and smooth acceleration.
  • Disadvantages: wasteful (heat loss), poor speed regulation, only stepwise control unless a liquid rheostat is used.
  • Example: cargo pump motors, winches, windlasses, and other deck machinery where high starting torque and some speed reduction are needed.
Part (b)

Cascade system:

  • Method: two induction motors are mechanically coupled, and the rotor of the first (main) motor is connected electrically to the stator of the second (auxiliary) motor. The slip power of the main motor is fed to the auxiliary motor, which adds to the mechanical output. By changing the number of poles of the auxiliary motor (or by using a Scherbius or Kramer arrangement), the speed of the combined set can be varied.
  • Characteristics: gives a limited number of discrete speeds (usually two or three), all below synchronous speed. The efficiency is better than rotor resistance because the slip power is usefully employed.
  • Advantages: better efficiency than rotor resistance, useful for large motors.
  • Disadvantages: complex, expensive, requires two machines, only a few fixed speeds.
  • Example: large cargo pump drives and other large constant-speed applications where a few discrete speeds are acceptable.
Part (c)

Pole-changing (consequent pole / Dahlander):

  • Method: the stator winding is reconnected to change the number of poles, giving two (or more) discrete synchronous speeds. The Dahlander connection gives a 2:1 speed ratio (e.g. 4-pole/8-pole). Speed = 120 f / P.
  • Characteristics: gives discrete speeds only (e.g. half and full speed), not continuous control. The efficiency is high at each speed because the motor runs at its rated slip. The torque can be maintained constant or the power constant depending on the connection.
  • Advantages: simple, robust, cheap, high efficiency at each speed, no extra losses.
  • Disadvantages: only a few fixed speeds, no continuous speed variation, the changeover requires a special starter.
  • Example: engine room fans, ventilation fans, ballast and bilge pumps, and other auxiliaries where two or three fixed speeds are sufficient.

Summary: rotor resistance gives smooth but inefficient low-speed control; cascade gives a few efficient speeds for large drives; pole-changing gives simple, efficient discrete speeds for fans and pumps.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests? (8)

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance? (4)

(c) What is meant by all day transformer efficiency? (4)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessment of efficiency and regulation by open-circuit and short-circuit tests:

  • Open-circuit (no-load) test: the low-voltage winding is supplied at rated voltage with the high-voltage side open. The wattmeter measures the no-load power, which is almost entirely the iron (core) loss (hysteresis and eddy current losses), since the no-load copper loss is negligible. The no-load current and power give the iron loss and the magnetising and core-loss components of the exciting current.
  • Short-circuit (impedance) test: the low-voltage winding is short-circuited and a reduced voltage is applied to the high-voltage side so that rated current flows. The wattmeter measures the full-load copper loss (I^2 R), and the voltmeter and ammeter give the equivalent impedance. From this the equivalent resistance and reactance are found.
  • Efficiency: total losses = iron loss (from OC test) + copper loss (from SC test, scaled by the square of the load current). Efficiency = output/(output + losses). At any load, copper loss = full-load copper loss x (load fraction)^2.
  • Regulation: from the SC test, the equivalent resistance Req and reactance Xeq referred to one side are found. The percentage voltage regulation = (I (Req cos phi +/- Xeq sin phi)/V) x 100, where the sign depends on lagging or leading power factor. This gives the voltage drop from no-load to full-load.
Part (b)

Equivalent resistance:

  • The equivalent resistance of a transformer is the total resistance of the primary and secondary windings referred to one side (primary or secondary). It is the resistance which, when carrying the current on that side, produces the same copper loss as the actual primary and secondary resistances.
  • Referred to the primary: Req1 = R1 + R2' where R2' = R2 (N1/N2)^2. Referred to the secondary: Req2 = R2 + R1' where R1' = R1 (N2/N1)^2.
  • It is used to calculate the copper loss and the voltage regulation of the transformer.
Part (c)

All-day (energy) transformer efficiency:

  • The all-day efficiency is the ratio of the energy output to the energy input over a full day (24 hours), taking into account the varying load during the day.
  • It is important for distribution transformers which operate at light load for much of the day. The iron loss is constant (occurs all day), while the copper loss varies with the square of the load.
  • All-day efficiency = (energy output in 24 h) / (energy output + energy losses in 24 h).
  • It is lower than the ordinary efficiency because the iron loss is incurred even when the transformer is lightly loaded. It is used to select a transformer with the lowest total energy loss over the day.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed A.C. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)

(b) Describe how speed changes and braking are achieved. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (16 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State the important parameters that may be recorded. (8)

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000 kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding are located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c. motor. (6)

(b) A 220 V, d.c. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the KVAr load on B is 150 KVAr (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the KVAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in same direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open- circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100A at a p.f of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200V. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an A.C. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is controlled. (6)

(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)

(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition. (5)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Description of circuit breaker:

The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.

Main Components:

  • Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
  • Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
  • Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
  • Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
Part (b)

If a circuit breaker opens due to a short circuit:

  • The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
  • The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
  • In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
  • This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).

Checks following the event:

  • Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
  • Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
  • Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
Part (c)

If a main circuit breaker fails to open under fault conditions:

  • Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
  • Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
  • Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
  • Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
  • After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
  • Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
  • Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) With respect to measuring instruments what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type. (6)

(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

With respect to power transformers kindly explain the following protections (16)

(a) Overload protection

(b) Overcurrent protection for phase faults

(c) Earth Fault protection

(d) Differential protection

Appeared In: Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

With respect to power transformers, the following protections:

Part (a)

Overload protection:

  • Protects the transformer against sustained overcurrent above rated capacity, which would overheat the windings and insulation and shorten life.
  • Provided by thermal overload relays or by oil/winding temperature indicators (WTI/OTI) operating on the temperature. The relay has an inverse time characteristic - the higher the overload, the faster it operates.
  • Gives an alarm first and trips the breaker if the overload persists. Allows short-term overloads (e.g. motor starting) but trips on sustained overload.
Part (b)

Overcurrent protection for phase faults:

  • Protects against short circuits between phases, which produce very high fault currents.
  • Provided by overcurrent relays (IDMT - inverse definite minimum time) connected to current transformers on the primary and/or secondary. Larger fault currents trip faster.
  • The relay operates the circuit breaker to isolate the transformer quickly, limiting damage. Instantaneous elements may be added for very high fault currents.
Part (c)

Earth fault protection:

  • Protects against faults between a winding and earth, which may not be detected by phase overcurrent relays if the fault current is small.
  • Provided by earth fault relays connected in the residual circuit of the current transformers (the vector sum of the three phase currents, zero under balanced conditions, non-zero on an earth fault).
  • Alternatively a core-balance (zero-sequence) current transformer surrounds all three conductors and detects the imbalance due to earth leakage. The relay trips the breaker on an earth fault.
Part (d)

Differential protection:

  • Compares the current entering the primary with the current leaving the secondary, using current transformers on both sides.
  • Under normal and through-fault conditions the currents are balanced (allowing for turns ratio and vector group) and the relay does not operate. On an internal fault (winding-to-winding or winding-to-earth inside the transformer) the currents are unbalanced and the relay operates to trip the breaker.
  • Gives fast, sensitive protection for internal faults and is the main protection for large power transformers. It is biased to prevent operation on through-faults and magnetising inrush current.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) In A.C. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.

(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip. (4)

(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched on. (4)

(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:

(i) Error operated. (4)

(ii) Functional. (4)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Voltage time graph showing voltage dip:

The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.

(ii) Effect on small power installation:

When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.

The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.

Part (b)

(i) Error-Operated Voltage Control:

In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.

Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.

(ii) Functional Voltage Control:

This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.

Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.

Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In some circumstances electrical current may be induced into the shafting of rotating machinery.

(a) State the problem that may be caused by this current. (6)

(b) Explain with aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances:

(i) D.C machines

(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Problem caused by shaft currents:

  • Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
  • This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
  • In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
  • The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
Part (b)

How currents may be avoided or reduced:

(i) d.c. machines:

  • The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
  • The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
  • A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
  • Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.

(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:

  • The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
  • The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
  • An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
  • The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform: Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate

(i) peak load current,

(ii) DC load current,

(iii) AC load current. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$

Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$

Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$

The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:

$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$

$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$

(i) Peak Load Current

The peak value of the supply voltage is:

$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$

$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$

Therefore, the peak load current is:

$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$

$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$

Peak load current:

$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$

(ii) DC Load Current

For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:

$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$

$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$

DC load current:

$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$

(iii) AC Load Current

For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$

$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$

The AC component of the load current is:

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$

$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$

$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vra Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A D.C. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate:

(i) The speed.

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier:

  • A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
  • During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
Part (b)

D.C. motor: armature current 110 A at 480 V, armature circuit resistance 0.2 ohm, 6 poles, lap-connected armature with 864 conductors, flux per pole 0.05 Wb.

  • Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
  • For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
  • E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
  • (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
  • (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
  • (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)

So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) A three phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system. Calculate.

(i) The synchronous speed.

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent.

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r.p.m. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The applied voltage (starting torque is proportional to the square of the applied voltage, T proportional to V^2).
  • The rotor resistance (increasing rotor resistance increases the starting torque up to a maximum, and shifts the maximum-torque point towards standstill).
  • The rotor and stator reactances (leakage reactance) - higher leakage reactance reduces the starting torque.
  • The number of poles and the synchronous speed (torque depends on the air-gap power and synchronous speed).
  • The rotor and stator winding resistances and the turns ratio.
  • The supply frequency.
  • The air-gap flux.
  • Comparison with rated torque: the starting torque of a standard squirrel-cage motor is typically about 1.5 to 2 times the full-load (rated) torque. It is generally greater than the rated torque so that the motor can start the load, but not excessively high. For a slip-ring motor the starting torque can be increased up to the maximum torque by adding rotor resistance.
Part (b)

Three-phase induction motor, 4 poles, 50 Hz supply:

  • (i) Synchronous speed Ns = 120 f / P = 120 x 50 / 4 = 1500 rev/min.
  • (ii) Speed at 4% slip: N = Ns (1 - s) = 1500 x (1 - 0.04) = 1500 x 0.96 = 1440 rev/min.
  • (iii) Rotor frequency when rotor speed is 600 rev/min:
  • Slip s = (Ns - N)/Ns = (1500 - 600)/1500 = 900/1500 = 0.6.
  • Rotor frequency fr = s x f = 0.6 x 50 = 30 Hz.

So synchronous speed = 1500 rev/min, rotor speed at 4% slip = 1440 rev/min, rotor frequency at 600 rev/min = 30 Hz.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What is leakage flux as it applies to the iron-core transformer? How is it considered in the analysis of the transformer? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find

(i) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) the ‘breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In an iron-core transformer, when the primary winding is connected to a supply voltage, a current flows through the winding depending on the load and the winding resistance. This current generates a magnetic field, forming a magnetic north and south pole, thereby creating magnetic flux between them.

The magnetic flux consists of lines that ideally pass through the iron core and link both the primary and secondary windings. This mutual flux is responsible for the energy transfer from the primary to the secondary winding and is essential for transformer operation.

However, not all magnetic flux produced by the primary winding links to the secondary winding. Some of the magnetic lines spread into the surrounding air space and do not pass through the secondary coil. This portion of the magnetic flux is known as leakage flux.

Leakage Flux:

  • Leakage flux is the portion of the magnetic flux generated by the primary winding that does not couple with the secondary winding.
  • It occurs due to the physical separation between the windings and non-ideal magnetic coupling.
  • The leakage flux induces an electromotive force (emf) in the primary winding itself, which opposes the current flow in the primary. This results in an additional voltage drop.

How It Is Accounted for in Analysis:

  • The opposition caused by the leakage flux is modeled as an inductive reactance (i.e., a leakage inductance) in series with the primary winding resistance.
  • This series inductance creates a voltage drop equal to the emf generated by the leakage flux.
  • In transformer equivalent circuits, the leakage inductances of both primary and secondary windings are included to reflect this non-ideal behavior.

Minimising Leakage Flux:

Interleaving Technique:

  • Leakage flux can be minimized by arranging the primary and secondary windings closely together on the same leg of the transformer core, a method known as interleaving.
  • This improves magnetic coupling and enhances energy transfer efficiency.
Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) A twelve-pole, three-phase, delta-connected alternator runs at 600 rev/min and supplies a balanced star-connected load. Each phase of the load is a coil of resistance 35 ohm and inductive reactance 25 ohm. The line terminal voltage of the alternator is 440V. Determine (10)

(i) frequency of supply

(ii) current in each coil

(iii) current in each phase of the alternator

(iv) total power supplied to the load.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

(b) Given:

  • Number of poles, P = 12
  • Speed, N = 600 rev/min
  • Line voltage, VL = 440 V
  • Resistance per phase, R = 35 Ω
  • Inductive reactance per phase, XL = 25 Ω
  • The alternator is delta connected and supplies a balanced star-connected load.

(i) Frequency of Supply

The frequency of an alternator is given by:

$$f = \frac{P \times N}{120}$$

Substituting the given values:

$$f = \frac{12 \times 600}{120} = 60\ Hz$$

Answer: Frequency = 60 Hz

(ii) Current in Each Coil

Since the load is star connected, the phase voltage is:

$$V_{ph} = \frac{V_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$V_{ph} = \frac{440}{1.732} \approx 254.03\ V$$

The impedance of each coil is:

$$Z = \sqrt{R^2 + X_L^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{35^2 + 25^2}$$

$$Z = \sqrt{1850} \approx 43.01\ \Omega$$

The current through each coil is:

$$I_{coil} = \frac{V_{ph}}{Z}$$

$$I_{coil} = \frac{254.03}{43.01} \approx 5.91\ A$$

Answer: Current in each coil = 5.91 A

(iii) Current in Each Phase of the Alternator

For a star-connected load:

$$I_L = I_{coil} = 5.91\ A$$

Since the alternator is delta connected, the phase current is:

$$I_{phase} = \frac{I_L}{\sqrt{3}}$$

$$I_{phase} = \frac{5.91}{1.732} \approx 3.41\ A$$

Answer: Current in each phase of the alternator = 3.41 A

(iv) Total Power Supplied to the Load

First, calculate the power factor:

$$cos\phi = \frac{R}{Z}$$

$$cos\phi = \frac{35}{43.01} \approx 0.814$$

Total three-phase power is given by:

$$P = \sqrt{3} \times V_L \times I_L \times cos\phi$$

$$P = 1.732 \times 440 \times 5.91 \times 0.814$$

$$P \approx 3662.4\ W$$

$$P \approx 3.66\ kW$$

Answer: Total power supplied = 3662.4 W (approximately 3.66 kW)

Q1 (16 Marks) Control & Instrumentation

(a) What is feedback control? Explain open loop and close loop systems with reference to shipboard applications? (8)

(b) What is P, PI and PID control. Make a neat comparison among all these methods of controlling with examples. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Open loop control system:

An open loop control system is the one in which the output signal is NOT fed back to the input of the system. Therefore, an open loop control system is also referred to as a non-feedback control system.

In the case of an open loop control system, the output has NO control over the control action of the system. Thus, the open loop control system follows its input signals regardless of the final results. The input is supplied to the controller, which produces an actuating signal (or control signal). This actuating single is supplied to the plant or processing system, which is to be controlled.

The major disadvantage of an open loop control system is that it is poorly equipped to handle the disturbances, which may reduce its ability to complete the desired task.

E.g. The clothes dryer is one of the examples of the open-loop control system. In this, the control action can be done physically through the operator. Based on the clothing’s wetness, the operator will fix the timer to 30 minutes. So after that, the timer will discontinue even after the machine clothes are wet. The dryer in the machine will stop functioning even if the preferred output is not attained. This displays that the control system doesn’t give feedback. In this system, the controller of the system is the timer.

Closed loop:

A closed-loop control system is the one in which the output signal is fed back to the input of the system. Therefore, in a closed-loop control system, the control action is a function of the desired output signal.

The main components of a closed loop control system are − the controller, plant, error detector or comparator and feedback element, which are connected together. The error detector accepts the input signal and feedback signal to produce an error signal, which is the difference between input and feedback signals. The feedback signal is the sample of the output of the overall system.

Now, the error signal is supplied to the controller to produce an actuating signal that controls the plant or processing system to produce desired results. Therefore, in the closed-loop control system, the input of the system is automatically adjusted to produce the desired response from the system.

The best example of a closed-loop control system is AC or air conditioner. The AC controls the temperature by evaluating it with the nearby temperature. The evaluation of temperature can be done through the thermostat. Once the air conditioner gives the error signal, it is the main difference between the room and the surrounding temperature. So, the thermostat will control the compressor. These systems are accurate, expensive, reliable, and require high maintenance.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

Briefly describe following with respect to protective relaying:

(a) Principle, working and characteristics of induction type relays. (6)

(b) Static and digital relays. (5)

(c) Protection of alternators, motors, transformer and busbar. (5)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Jan 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Principle, working and characteristics of induction type relays:

  • An induction relay works on the induction motor principle. A laminated electromagnet (with a shading ring or split phase) produces a rotating/travelling magnetic field, and a moving disc or cup has eddy currents induced in it.
  • The interaction between the flux and the eddy currents produces a torque on the disc proportional to the product of the fluxes and the sine of the phase angle between them, i.e. proportional to the current (or power) being measured.
  • The disc is restrained by a spring, and a permanent magnet provides damping torque proportional to speed.
  • When the current exceeds the setting, the operating torque exceeds the restraining torque and the disc rotates, closing the contacts after a time determined by the disc travel.
  • Characteristics: inverse time-current characteristic - operating time decreases as current increases. Can be inverse, very inverse, or definite minimum time (IDMT). Time and current (plug) settings are adjustable. The damping magnet gives a smooth, accurate time delay.
Part (b)

Static and digital relays:

  • Static relays: use solid-state electronic circuits (transistors, op-amps, comparators) instead of moving parts. No moving disc; the time-current characteristic is produced by electronic timing circuits. Faster, more accurate, no mechanical wear, can provide complex characteristics. Require a d.c. auxiliary supply.
  • Digital (numerical) relays: use a microprocessor/DSP. Analogue signals are converted to digital by an A/D converter and processed by software. Provide multiple protection functions in one unit, with programmable settings, self-monitoring, fault recording, and communication. Highly accurate, flexible, and can be set and tested remotely.
Part (c)

Protection of alternators, motors, transformer and busbar:

  • Alternators: overcurrent, earth fault, differential (large machines), reverse power, over/under voltage, over/under frequency, field failure, stator earth fault.
  • Motors: overload (thermal), short-circuit, earth fault, single-phasing, under-voltage, locked-rotor; differential for large motors.
  • Transformer: overcurrent, earth fault, differential (main protection for internal faults), thermal overload, Buchholz relay (gas/oil surge), over-fluxing.
  • Busbar: biased differential protection comparing currents entering and leaving the busbar; on an internal fault the currents are unbalanced and the relay trips all breakers connected to the busbar, isolating the fault quickly.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests? (10)

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance? (6)

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital

With respect to High Voltage Electric system

(a) What are the reasons for using high voltage on board ships? Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of using HV systems onboard ships? (6)

(b) Briefly explain the four types of high voltage testing methods applied on high voltage equipment and these are

(i) Sustained low frequency tests

(ii) Constant DC/AC test,

(iii) High frequency test and

(iv) Surge or impulse test.

Briefly explain how these tests are conducted. (10)

Appeared In: Jan 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Reasons for using high voltage on board ships, and advantages/disadvantages:

  • Reasons: as ship size and installed power increase (large container ships, cruise ships, electric propulsion), the current at low voltage becomes very large, requiring very heavy cables and switchgear. Using high voltage (e.g. 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, 11 kV) reduces the current for the same power, allowing smaller cables, smaller switchgear, and lower losses.
  • Advantages of HV:
  • Lower current for the same power, so smaller and lighter cables and switchgear.
  • Lower I^2 R losses in the cables, giving higher efficiency.
  • Smaller generators and motors for the same power (better power-to-weight ratio).
  • Easier to transmit power over long distances (e.g. to bow thrusters or propulsion motors).
  • Reduced voltage drop over long cable runs.
  • Disadvantages of HV:
  • Higher cost of HV switchgear, transformers, and protection equipment.
  • Requires specially trained personnel and strict safety procedures (HV is more dangerous).
  • Higher insulation requirements and more complex maintenance.
  • Requires step-down transformers for low-voltage consumers.
  • Greater risk of electric shock and arc flash; more severe consequences of faults.
Part (b)

Four types of high voltage testing methods:

(i) Sustained low frequency tests (power frequency withstand test):

  • A high voltage at power frequency (50/60 Hz) is applied between the conductor and earth (or between windings) for a specified time (e.g. 1 minute). It tests the insulation's ability to withstand the normal operating voltage plus a margin. The test voltage is gradually raised to the specified value, held for the time, then reduced. Any breakdown or excessive leakage current indicates insulation failure.

(ii) Constant DC/AC test:

  • A d.c. or a.c. high voltage is applied and held constant for a period. The d.c. test (e.g. using a d.c. pressure test set) measures the leakage current and its decay; a steady, low leakage current indicates good insulation, while a rising leakage current indicates deterioration. The a.c. test applies a constant a.c. voltage and checks for breakdown. These tests detect moisture, contamination and insulation weakness.

(iii) High frequency test:

  • A high-frequency a.c. voltage is applied to the insulation. High-frequency testing stresses the insulation more severely and can detect incipient faults, voids and partial discharge that may not show at power frequency. It is used to detect weaknesses in the insulation of cables and windings.

(iv) Surge or impulse test:

  • A high-voltage impulse (lightning impulse or switching surge) of a specified waveform (e.g. 1.2/50 microsecond) is applied to the insulation. This simulates the effect of lightning or switching surges. The test checks the insulation's ability to withstand transient overvoltages without breakdown. The impulse is applied several times and the insulation must not flash over or break down.
  • All HV tests must be carried out with the equipment isolated, earthed and discharged, and with strict safety precautions and trained personnel.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Describe International protection rating and types of insulation. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Jan 2025
Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three phase winding and the armature winding is located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c. motor. (6)

(b) A 220 V d.c. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm, and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternator A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAR load on B is 150 kVAR (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kWAR load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring main 900m long is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e. m. f. of 500V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.4 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three-phase shipboard electrical distribution system: (16)

(a) Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system.

(b) Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system.

(c) Describe how the Earthed neutral system is Earthed.

(d) Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an Earthed neutral system with regard to the risk of electric shock from either system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) (i) Describe the characteristics of a d.c. motor. (8)

(ii) Explain the advantages of such a motor for deck machinery.

(b) Describe with the aid of a sketch a control system for the motor in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Characteristics of a d.c. motor (for deck machinery):

  • A d.c. motor has a high starting torque, which is important for deck machinery such as winches, windlasses and capstans that must start under load.
  • The speed can be controlled smoothly over a wide range by varying the armature voltage or the field flux.
  • The torque-speed characteristic can be shaped by the type of winding: a series motor gives very high starting torque and a falling speed characteristic (constant power), while a shunt motor gives a nearly constant speed.
  • For deck machinery, a compound (cumulative) motor is often used, combining high starting torque with a reasonably stable speed.
  • The motor can be reversed easily by reversing the armature or field connections.
  • It provides smooth, stepless speed control and can hold a load (e.g. a suspended anchor) without running away.
  • (ii) Advantages of such a motor for deck machinery:
  • High starting torque to lift heavy loads from rest.
  • Smooth, precise speed control for delicate handling of loads.
  • Easy and smooth reversal.
  • Good speed regulation and ability to hold a load.
  • Can be controlled remotely and provides regenerative braking.
  • Robust and reliable for marine service.
Part (b)

Control system for the motor (with sketch):

  • A typical control system is a Ward Leonard system or a thyristor (SCR) d.c. drive.
  • Ward Leonard: a three-phase induction motor drives a d.c. generator; the generator supplies the d.c. motor armature. The motor field is separately excited and kept constant. By varying the generator field current (via a field rheostat or reversing switch), the voltage applied to the motor armature is varied, giving smooth speed control from zero to full speed in either direction. Reversal is by reversing the generator field.
  • Thyristor drive: the a.c. supply is converted to variable d.c. by a controlled rectifier (thyristor bridge). The armature voltage is varied by controlling the firing angle, giving smooth speed control. Reversal is by reversing the armature current or using a reversing contactor.
  • The control circuit includes: start/stop push buttons, speed control (rheostat or firing-angle control), overload protection, field failure protection, and limit switches for the deck machinery.
  • The sketch shows the supply, the controller, the motor with its armature and field, and the control/protection devices.
Q3 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

List at least two factors that cause a deterioration of the frequency response of a transistor amplifier. Explain how each factor affects the performance of the amplifier and the portion of the frequency range where it is effective. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The frequency response of a transistor amplifier refers to how its voltage gain changes with signal frequency. Ideally, the gain should remain constant over the desired frequency range. However, in practice, the gain deteriorates at both low and high frequencies due to various circuit components and effects.

The two main factors that cause deterioration are:

1. Coupling and Bypass Capacitors (Affecting Low-Frequency Response):

At low frequencies (below f₁, the lower cut-off frequency), the following capacitive components contribute to the drop in gain:

  • Input Coupling Capacitor (Cin) and Output Coupling Capacitor (Cout):
  • These capacitors have high reactance at low frequencies, which restricts the AC signal from passing through effectively. As a result, only a small part of the signal reaches the amplifier, reducing the voltage gain.
  • Emitter Bypass Capacitor (Cb):
  • At low frequencies, the reactance of this capacitor is also high, and it cannot effectively bypass the emitter resistor (Re). This causes more of the input signal to drop across Re, reducing the output.

Effect on Performance:

  • Causes reduced signal transfer through the amplifier.
  • Leads to drop in amplifier gain at frequencies below the lower cut-off frequency (f₁).

2. Diffusion and Stray Capacitances (Affecting High-Frequency Response):

At high frequencies (above f₂, the upper cut-off frequency), internal capacitances cause deterioration:

  • Base-Emitter Diffusion Capacitance:
  • At high frequencies, this capacitance presents low reactance, increasing base current. This results in reduced current amplification (β) and thus lowers the voltage gain.
  • Collector-to-Earth Stray Capacitance:
  • Also decreases in reactance with frequency, introducing a loading effect and further lowering the amplifier’s output gain.
  • Cout at High Frequencies:
  • Acts as an additional load to the next stage, further reducing the voltage gain.

Effect on Performance:

  • Results in loss of gain due to internal capacitance effects.
  • Leads to drop in amplifier gain at frequencies above the upper cut-off frequency (f₂).

Conclusion:

  • At low frequencies (< f₁): Gain drops due to high reactance of coupling and bypass capacitors (Cin, Cout, Cb).
  • At high frequencies (> f₂): Gain drops due to low reactance of base-emitter diffusion capacitance and stray capacitances.

The maximum, stable gain is maintained in the mid-frequency range, and the cut-off frequencies f₁ and f₂ are defined where the gain falls to 70.7% of its maximum value. For optimal performance, the amplifier should be designed to operate within this mid-frequency range.

Q4 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between two of the following types of electronic circuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit (6)

(b) Amplifier circuit (5)

(c) Oscillator circuit (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing controlled. (6)

(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)

(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition. (5)

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Description of circuit breaker:

The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.

Main Components:

  • Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
  • Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
  • Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
  • Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
Part (b)

If a circuit breaker opens due to a short circuit:

  • The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
  • The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
  • In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
  • This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).

Checks following the event:

  • Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
  • Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
  • Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
Part (c)

If a main circuit breaker fails to open under fault conditions:

  • Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
  • Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
  • Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
  • Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
  • After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
  • Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
  • Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) The readings on the ammeters

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is leakage flux as it applies to the iron-core transformer? How is it taken into account in the analysis of the transformer? (6)

(b) The following results were obtained on a 50 kVA transformer: open circuit test - primary voltage, 3300 V; secondary voltage, 415 V; primary power, 430 W. Short circuit test - primary voltage, 124V; primary current, 15.3 A; primary power, 525 W; secondary current, full load value. Calculate: (10)

(i) The efficiencies at full load and at half load for 0.7 power factor.

(ii) The voltage regulations for power factor 0.7 (i) lagging, (ii) leading

(iii) The secondary terminal voltages corresponding to (i) and (ii).

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In an iron-core transformer, when the primary winding is connected to a supply voltage, a current flows through the winding depending on the load and the winding resistance. This current generates a magnetic field, forming a magnetic north and south pole, thereby creating magnetic flux between them.

The magnetic flux consists of lines that ideally pass through the iron core and link both the primary and secondary windings. This mutual flux is responsible for the energy transfer from the primary to the secondary winding and is essential for transformer operation.

However, not all magnetic flux produced by the primary winding links to the secondary winding. Some of the magnetic lines spread into the surrounding air space and do not pass through the secondary coil. This portion of the magnetic flux is known as leakage flux.

Leakage Flux:

  • Leakage flux is the portion of the magnetic flux generated by the primary winding that does not couple with the secondary winding.
  • It occurs due to the physical separation between the windings and non-ideal magnetic coupling.
  • The leakage flux induces an electromotive force (emf) in the primary winding itself, which opposes the current flow in the primary. This results in an additional voltage drop.

How It Is Accounted for in Analysis:

  • The opposition caused by the leakage flux is modeled as an inductive reactance (i.e., a leakage inductance) in series with the primary winding resistance.
  • This series inductance creates a voltage drop equal to the emf generated by the leakage flux.
  • In transformer equivalent circuits, the leakage inductances of both primary and secondary windings are included to reflect this non-ideal behavior.

Minimising Leakage Flux:

Interleaving Technique:

  • Leakage flux can be minimized by arranging the primary and secondary windings closely together on the same leg of the transformer core, a method known as interleaving.
  • This improves magnetic coupling and enhances energy transfer efficiency.
Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is a silicon controlled rectifier (SCR)? How is the breakover voltage of the SCR defined? (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)

(i) The speed;

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)

A Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) is a four-layer, three-terminal semiconductor switching device belonging to the thyristor family. Its four semiconductor layers are arranged in the PNPN configuration. The three terminals are Anode (A), Cathode (K), and Gate (G).

An SCR is a unidirectional device and is mainly used for switching, rectification, and controlling electrical power. It is normally triggered by applying a small current to the gate terminal.

symbol:

Modes of Operation

An SCR has three main modes of operation:

  1. Forward Blocking Mode (OFF state): The SCR is forward biased but remains in the non-conducting state.
  2. Forward Conducting Mode (ON state): When a suitable gate current is applied, the SCR is triggered and conducts current from anode to cathode. Once turned ON, it remains conducting until the current falls below the holding current.
  3. Reverse Blocking Mode (OFF state): When reverse biased, the SCR blocks the flow of current, apart from a small leakage current.

Breakover Voltage of SCR

The breakover voltage (VBOV_{BO}) is defined as the minimum anode-to-cathode voltage at which an SCR changes from the OFF state (high impedance) to the ON state (low impedance) without any gate current being applied.

When the anode-to-cathode voltage exceeds the breakover voltage, the SCR turns ON automatically due to avalanche breakdown, even though the gate has not been triggered.

  • Applications: SCRs are widely used in motor speed control, light dimming, and controlled rectifier circuits.
Part (b)

DC Motor – Speed and Gross Torque Calculation

Given:

Armature voltage, $$V = 480\ V$$

Armature current, $$I_a = 110\ A$$

Armature circuit resistance, $$R_a = 0.2\ \Omega$$

Number of poles, $$P = 6$$

Flux per pole, $$\Phi = 0.05\ Wb$$

Number of armature conductors, $$Z = 864$$

Lap-connected armature winding, therefore number of parallel paths, $$A = P = 6$$

(i) Speed of the Motor

For a DC motor:

$$V = E_b + I_aR_a$$

Therefore, the back EMF is:

$$E_b = V-I_aR_a$$

$$E_b=480-(110\times0.2)$$

$$E_b=480-22=458\ V$$

The EMF equation of a DC machine is:

$$E_b=\frac{P\Phi ZN}{60A}$$

For a lap winding, $$A=P$$. Therefore:

$$458=\frac{6\times0.05\times864\times N}{60\times6}$$

Since 6 cancels:

$$458=\frac{0.05\times864\times N}{60}$$

Therefore:

$$N=\frac{458\times60}{0.05\times864}$$

$$N=636.02\ rpm$$

Therefore:

$$N\approx636\ rpm$$

(ii) Gross Torque Developed by the Armature

The gross mechanical power developed by the armature is:

$$P_g=E_bI_a$$

The torque is given by:

$$T_g=\frac{60P_g}{2\pi N}$$

Therefore:

$$T_g=\frac{60E_bI_a}{2\pi N}$$

Substituting the values:

$$T_g=\frac{60\times458\times110}{2\pi\times636.02}$$

$$T_g\approx754.3\ N\cdot m$$

The same result can be obtained directly from the torque equation:

$$T_g=\frac{PZ\Phi I_a}{2\pi A}$$

Substituting:

$$T_g=\frac{6\times864\times0.05\times110}{2\pi\times6}$$

$$T_g\approx754.3\ N\cdot m$$

Therefore:

$$T_g\approx754\ N\cdot m$$

Final Answers

Speed of the motor = $$636\ rpm$$

Gross torque developed by the armature = $$754\ N\cdot m$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) List the factors that determine the maximum developed torque of the induction motor. (6)

(b) The primary and secondary windings of a 500 kVA transformer have resistances of 0.42 Ω and 0.0019 Ω respectively. The primary and secondary voltages are 11 000 V and 415 V respectively and the core loss is 2.9 kW, assuming the power factor of the load to be 0.8. Calculate the efficiency on: (10)

(i) Full load

(ii) Half load;

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The maximum developed torque of an induction motor is determined by several factors, primarily derived from its equivalent circuit parameters and supply conditions. These factors include:

  1. Stator Supply Voltage (V1): The maximum torque is directly proportional to the square of the stator supply voltage. A higher supply voltage leads to a significantly higher maximum torque.
  2. Stator Resistance (R1): Higher stator resistance tends to reduce the maximum torque. It contributes to the overall impedance that limits current flow.
  3. Stator Leakage Reactance (X1): Higher stator leakage reactance reduces the maximum torque. Leakage reactance represents the magnetic flux that does not link both stator and rotor windings.
  4. Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2'): Higher rotor leakage reactance (referred to the stator) reduces the maximum torque. Similar to stator leakage reactance, it impedes the flow of rotor current and thus the torque production.
  5. Supply Frequency (f): The maximum torque is inversely proportional to the supply frequency. This is because reactances (X = 2πfL) are directly proportional to frequency, and synchronous speed (ωs = 2πf/P) is also directly proportional to frequency.
  6. Number of Poles (P): The maximum torque is directly proportional to the number of poles of the motor. This is due to its inverse relationship with the synchronous speed (ωs = 2πf/P).
Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

A 100 kW, 460 V shunt generator was run as a motor on no load at its rated voltage and speed. The total current taken was 9.8 A, including a shunt current of 2.7 A. The resistance of the armature circuit at normal working temperature was 0.11 Ω. Calculate the efficiencies at: (16)

(i) Full load

(ii) Half load.

Appeared In: Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 100 kW, 460 V shunt generator was run as a motor on no load at rated voltage and speed. Total current 9.8 A, shunt current 2.7 A, armature resistance 0.11 ohm.

  • Field current If = 2.7 A. Field copper loss = V x If = 460 x 2.7 = 1242 W.
  • No-load armature current = 9.8 - 2.7 = 7.1 A.
  • No-load armature copper loss = 7.1^2 x 0.11 = 50.4 x 0.11 = 5.5 W.
  • No-load input = 460 x 9.8 = 4508 W.
  • Constant losses (iron + friction + windage + field copper) = no-load input - no-load armature copper loss = 4508 - 5.5 = 4502.5 W.
  • (This includes the field copper loss of 1242 W and the rotational losses of 3260 W.)

(i) Full load:

  • Output = 100 kW. Load current = 100000/460 = 217.4 A.
  • Armature current Ia = load current + field current = 217.4 + 2.7 = 220.1 A.
  • Armature copper loss = 220.1^2 x 0.11 = 48,444 x 0.11 = 5329 W.
  • Total losses = 4502.5 + 5329 = 9831.5 W.
  • Input = 100000 + 9831.5 = 109,831.5 W.
  • Efficiency = 100000/109831.5 = 0.9105 = 91.05%.

(ii) Half load:

  • Output = 50 kW. Load current = 50000/460 = 108.7 A.
  • Armature current Ia = 108.7 + 2.7 = 111.4 A.
  • Armature copper loss = 111.4^2 x 0.11 = 12,410 x 0.11 = 1365 W.
  • Total losses = 4502.5 + 1365 = 5867.5 W.
  • Input = 50000 + 5867.5 = 55,867.5 W.
  • Efficiency = 50000/55867.5 = 0.895 = 89.5%.

So the efficiency is 91.05% at full load and 89.5% at half load.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation. (4)

(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip. (6)

(ii) Briefly explain the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated. (6)

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessity of Reverse Power Protection for Alternators in Parallel Operation:

Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.

Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.

To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.

Part (b)

(i) Sketch of reverse power trip:

(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation

The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.

During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.

A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe a brushless alternator with a.c. exciter and static A.V.R. (8)

(b) State the output voltage characteristics for this type of machine. (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Nov 2024 Oct 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the exiter rotor windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly and fed to the main rotor. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q3 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With the aid of sketch describe the main features and principle of operation of a D.C. moving coil meter. If such a meter is designed to give full scale deflection with 150 m, State how it may be adapted: (16)

(a) As an ammeter to read up to 150 A.

(b) As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V.

No calculations are required.

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

D.C. moving coil meter - main features and principle of operation:

  • Construction: a permanent magnet with soft-iron pole pieces and a cylindrical soft-iron core creates a uniform radial magnetic field in the air gap. A rectangular coil of fine wire is wound on a light aluminium former and pivoted so it can rotate in the air gap. The coil is mounted on jewel bearings. A hairspring provides the controlling (restoring) torque and also carries the current to the coil. A pointer attached to the coil moves over a calibrated scale. A counterweight balances the pointer.
  • Principle: when current flows through the coil, the coil sides in the magnetic field experience a force (F = B I l) producing a deflecting torque proportional to the current (T = B A N I, where A is the coil area, N the number of turns). This torque is opposed by the spring torque (proportional to the angle of deflection). At equilibrium the deflection is proportional to the current, giving a linear (uniform) scale. The damping is provided by eddy currents induced in the aluminium former.
  • The meter measures d.c. only (the direction of deflection depends on current direction). It is accurate and sensitive.

Adaptation of a meter giving full-scale deflection with 150 mA (the question states 150 m, i.e. 150 mA):

Part (a)

As an ammeter to read up to 150 A:

  • A low-resistance shunt is connected in parallel with the meter coil. The shunt carries the bulk of the current (150 A - 150 mA), while only 150 mA passes through the meter. The shunt resistance is chosen so that 150 mA flows through the meter when 150 A flows in the circuit. The shunt is made of a material with a low temperature coefficient (e.g. manganin) and is connected with short, heavy leads. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 A.
Part (b)

As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V:

  • A high resistance (multiplier) is connected in series with the meter coil. The series resistance is chosen so that the full-scale current of 150 mA flows when 150 V is applied across the combination. The meter then reads the voltage. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 V.

(No calculations required.)

Q4 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces. (8)

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage. (8)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:

(a) State why this facility is required. (6)

(b) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Why Preferential tripping is required:

  • In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
  • The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
  • For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
  • By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
Part (b)

Preferential trips

operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6).

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 Α. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit.

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque. (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Specifications of the three batteries are given below:

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In a three-phase AC system, a star connection means that one end of each of the three phase windings is joined together to form a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to the three line terminals.

For a star-connected system:

$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$

$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$

In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:

$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe a brushless alternator with a.c. exciter and static A.V.R. (8)

(b) State the output voltage characteristics for this type of machine. (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Nov 2024 Oct 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the exiter rotor windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly and fed to the main rotor. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators. (4)

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly Synchronized. (4)

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided / reduced. (4)

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel provide the consequences of: (4)

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the effect of reduced voltage on standard squirrel cage motors with respect to EACH of the following: (16)

(a) Burn outs

(b) Starting current

(c) Starting torque

(d) Speed.

Appeared In: Oct 2024 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Burnouts:

Reducing the voltage supplied to a squirrel cage motor forces it to draw more current to maintain the same load. This is because power (P) is the product of voltage (V) and current (I): P = V x I. If V decreases, I must increase to keep P constant. The heat generated in the motor windings is proportional to the square of the current (I²R, where R is the resistance of the windings). Therefore, a significant increase in current due to reduced voltage leads to excessive heat generation. This overheating can damage the winding insulation, potentially causing a motor burnout.

Part (b)

Starting Current:

The starting current of a squirrel cage induction motor is directly proportional to the supply voltage. Reducing the voltage proportionately reduces the starting current. This reduced starting current is beneficial because it minimizes stress on the motor windings and reduces voltage dips on the electrical distribution system. A lower power surge also prevents excessive power factor reduction. This gentler "cushion start" stabilizes line voltage. For example, a 50% voltage reduction results in approximately a 50% reduction in starting current.

Part (c)

Starting Torque:

The starting torque (Ta) of a squirrel cage induction motor is proportional to the square of the voltage (Ta ∝ V²). Therefore, a 50% voltage reduction results in only 25% of the normal starting torque. This can make it difficult or impossible to start motors driving high inertia loads. If the starting torque is insufficient to overcome the load torque, the motor will stall, leading to excessive current flow and potential damage to the windings.

Part (d)

Speed:

When the voltage is reduced, the motor draws more current to try to maintain its speed under load. However, with a significant voltage reduction, the motor's speed will decrease. If the speed drops below a critical point (typically near the maximum torque point on the motor's torque-speed curve), the motor will lose synchronization and stall, resulting in a very low speed or complete stop.

Q5 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers

With the aid of a block diagram, briefly describe the effect which negative voltage feedback has on an amplifier and state the advantages resulting from the use of negative feedback. (16)

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Effects of Negative Voltage Feedback on an Amplifier

  • Reduction in Gain: The overall closed-loop gain is lower than the open-loop gain (A).
  • Gain Stability: Closed-loop gain becomes less sensitive to variations in A (caused by temperature changes, transistor aging, etc.).
  • Improved Linearity: Distortion is reduced since feedback forces the amplifier to correct its own errors.
  • Reduced Noise: Noise generated within the amplifier is partly cancelled.
  • Increased Bandwidth: The reduction in gain results in a wider frequency response, thereby increasing bandwidth.
  • Improved Input and Output Impedance:
    • Input impedance increases, which is desirable for voltage amplifiers.
    • Output impedance decreases, allowing better load-driving capability.

    Advantages of Using Negative Feedback

    • Stabilized Gain: Gain becomes less dependent on transistor parameters.
    • Reduced Nonlinear Distortion: Provides better signal fidelity.
    • Reduced Noise: Results in a cleaner output signal.
    • Increased Bandwidth: Enhances high-frequency performance.
    • Improved Impedance Matching: Facilitates cascading of amplifier stages.
    • Overall Improved Performance: Enhances predictability, reliability, and efficiency of the amplifier.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) What is the effect on the field flux of an alternator current in the synchronous motor that leads the terminal voltage? (6)

(b) A 1,000-KVA, 11,000-V, 3-ϕ, star-connected synchronous motor has an armature resistance and reactance per phase of 3.5 Ω and 40 Ω respectively. Determine the inducted e.m.f. and angular retardation of the rotor when fully loaded at (10)

(a) Unity p.f.

(b) 0.8 p.f. lagging

(c) 0.8 p.f. leading

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Effect on the field flux of an armature current in the synchronous motor that leads the terminal voltage:

  • In a synchronous motor, the armature current produces a magnetomotive force (armature reaction) which reacts with the field flux.
  • When the armature current leads the terminal voltage (i.e. the motor is over-excited, operating at a leading power factor), the armature reaction is magnetising - it assists (strengthens) the main field flux. The motor is said to be over-excited and draws a leading current, which helps to improve the power factor of the system.
  • When the current lags (under-excited), the armature reaction is demagnetising and weakens the field flux.
  • So a leading armature current increases (strengthens) the field flux, and the motor behaves as a capacitor, supplying leading reactive power to the system.
Part (b)

1000 kVA, 11,000 V, 3-phase, star-connected synchronous motor, armature resistance 3.5 ohm and reactance 40 ohm per phase.

  • Phase voltage Vph = 11000/root 3 = 6350.9 V.
  • Full-load current I = S/(root 3 x V) = 1,000,000/(1.732 x 11000) = 1,000,000/19052 = 52.49 A.
  • The induced e.m.f. E = V + I(Ra + j Xs), and the angular retardation (load angle) delta is the angle between E and V.
Part (a)

Unity p.f.:

  • I = 52.49 A at phi = 0. E = sqrt[(V + I Ra)^2 + (I Xs)^2] = sqrt[(6350.9 + 52.49 x 3.5)^2 + (52.49 x 40)^2] = sqrt[(6350.9 + 183.7)^2 + 2099.6^2] = sqrt[6534.6^2 + 2099.6^2] = sqrt[42,700,000 + 4,408,000] = sqrt[47,108,000] = 6864 V per phase.
  • Line value = 6864 x 1.732 = 11,889 V.
  • delta = atan(I Xs/(V + I Ra)) = atan(2099.6/6534.6) = atan(0.3214) = 17.8 degrees.
Part (b)

0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • I = 52.49(0.8 - j0.6) = 41.99 - j31.49.
  • I Ra = (41.99 - j31.49) x 3.5 = 146.97 - j110.2.
  • j I Xs = (41.99 - j31.49) x j40 = j1679.6 + 1259.6.
  • E = 6350.9 + 146.97 - j110.2 + j1679.6 + 1259.6 = 7757.5 + j1569.4.
  • |E| = sqrt(7757.5^2 + 1569.4^2) = sqrt(60,178,000 + 2,463,000) = sqrt(62,641,000) = 7914 V per phase.
  • Line value = 7914 x 1.732 = 13,708 V.
  • delta = atan(1569.4/7757.5) = atan(0.2023) = 11.4 degrees.
Part (c)

0.8 p.f. leading:

  • I = 52.49(0.8 + j0.6) = 41.99 + j31.49.
  • I Ra = 146.97 + j110.2.
  • j I Xs = (41.99 + j31.49) x j40 = j1679.6 - 1259.6.
  • E = 6350.9 + 146.97 + j110.2 + j1679.6 - 1259.6 = 5238.3 + j1789.8.
  • |E| = sqrt(5238.3^2 + 1789.8^2) = sqrt(27,440,000 + 3,203,000) = sqrt(30,643,000) = 5535 V per phase.
  • Line value = 5535 x 1.732 = 9587 V.
  • delta = atan(1789.8/5238.3) = atan(0.3417) = 18.9 degrees.

So: unity p.f. E = 11.89 kV line, delta = 17.8 deg; 0.8 lag E = 13.71 kV line, delta = 11.4 deg; 0.8 lead E = 9.59 kV line, delta = 18.9 deg.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the process of voltage buildup in a self-excited shunt generator. (6)

(b) A shunt-wound generator has a magnetisation-curve given by the figures below. The total resistance in the field circuit is 20 Ohm and the armature resistance is 0.02 Ohm.

With the machine on load, estimate the e.m.f. generated and the armature current when the terminal voltage of the machine is 140V.

(10)

Field current (i) amperes 1.2 2.8 5.0 7.0 7.7 9.0 11.0

Generated e.m.f. (e)_ Volts 46 88 126 149 154 162 168

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The basic principles of a self-excited generator:

When the generator is first started, there is a small amount of residual magnetism in the rotor winding. This residual magnetism is due to the fact that the rotor winding is made of ferromagnetic material, which retains a small amount of magnetism even when there is no current flowing through it. The prime mover (usually a diesel engine or a turbine) rotates the rotor of the generator. As the rotor rotates, the residual magnetism in the rotor winding induces an electromotive force (EMF) in the stator winding. The EMF induced in the stator winding is proportional to the speed of rotation of the rotor and the strength of the residual magnetism.

The EMF induced in the stator winding is fed to the automatic voltage regulator (AVR). The AVR rectifies the AC voltage from the stator winding and uses it to excite the rotor winding. The DC current from the AVR flows through the rotor winding, creating a magnetic field. This magnetic field interacts with the residual magnetism in the rotor winding, creating a stronger magnetic field. The stronger magnetic field induces a higher EMF in the stator winding.

The process of self-excitation continues until the generator reaches its rated voltage. At this point, the AVR reduces the excitation current to maintain the generator voltage at the desired level.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain how excitation of the rotor is produced and supplied. (6)

(b) A 75-kW, 400-V, 4-pole, 3-phase star connected synchronous motor has a resistance and synchronous reactance per phase of 0.04 ohm and 0.4 ohm respectively. Compute for full-load 0.8 p.f. lead the open circuit e.m.f. per phase and mechanical power developed. Assume an efficiency of 92.5%. (10)

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In an AC generator, excitation of the rotor is a process that involves creating a magnetic field in the rotor, leading to the generation of alternating current in the stator windings. Excitation is necessary to induce the flow of electric current within the generator.

There are typically two main types of excitation systems in AC generators: brushless excitation systems and brush excitation systems.

Brushless Excitation System: In brushless excitation systems, the rotor is equipped with a rotating field winding. The excitation process involves the following steps:

  • AC Voltage Generation: The stator windings of the generator produce an initial AC voltage. This voltage is often derived from an auxiliary AC power source or from the generator itself during initial startup.
  • Rectification: The AC voltage is then rectified into DC voltage by a rectifier system. This system usually includes diodes or thyristors (SCRs) that convert the AC voltage into a unidirectional flow of current.
  • Rotor Excitation: The DC voltage is supplied to the rotor winding, creating a magnetic field. This field induces an electromotive force (EMF) in the stator windings, leading to the generation of AC power.
  • Voltage Regulation: The excitation system may include a control mechanism to regulate the DC voltage supplied to the rotor. This control ensures that the generator output voltage remains stable and within the desired range.

Brush Excitation System: In brush excitation systems, the rotor is equipped with a direct current (DC) field winding. The excitation process involves the following steps:

  • External DC Source: A separate DC source, often a DC generator or a rectified DC power supply, provides the initial excitation to the rotor.
  • Rotor Winding Excitation: The external DC source supplies a constant DC voltage to the rotor's field winding, creating a strong and steady magnetic field.
  • AC Voltage Generation: As the rotor rotates within the stator windings, the magnetic field induces an AC voltage in the stator windings, generating electrical power.
  • Voltage Regulation: Similar to the brushless excitation system, a control mechanism is employed to regulate the DC voltage supplied to the rotor, ensuring stable generator output.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Explain the principles of A.C. Motors starting, and speed control, including the effect on efficiency. (6)

(b) A 3-phase induction motor has a 4-pole, Y-connected stator winding. The motor runs on 50-Hz supply with 200V between lines. The motor resistance and standstill reactance per phase are 0.1Ω and 0.9Ω respectively.

Calculate: (10)

(a) The total torque at 4% slip

(b) The maximum torque

(c) The speed at maximum torque if the ratio of the rotor to stator turns is 0.67.

Neglect stator impedance.

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Principles of A.C. motor starting and speed control, including effect on efficiency:

  • Starting: an induction motor at standstill draws a high starting current (5-8 times full-load) because the back e.m.f. is zero. To limit this, reduced-voltage starting is used: star-delta, auto-transformer, or soft-start. These reduce the starting current (and starting torque, which is proportional to V^2). Slip-ring motors use rotor resistance to limit starting current and increase starting torque.
  • Speed control: the speed of an induction motor is N = 120 f (1 - s)/P. Speed can be controlled by:
  • Pole changing (discrete speeds).
  • Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors) - increases slip, reduces speed, but wastes power.
  • Variable frequency (VFD) - varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed; this is the most efficient method and gives smooth, continuous speed control.
  • Effect on efficiency: reduced-voltage starting has little effect on running efficiency. Rotor resistance speed control is inefficient because the slip power is dissipated as heat. Pole-changing is efficient at each discrete speed. VFD control is the most efficient for variable-speed operation because the motor runs at low slip at each speed, and the VFD matches the supply to the load.
Part (b)

3-phase induction motor, 4-pole, Y-connected stator, 50 Hz, 200 V between lines. Motor resistance 0.1 ohm and standstill reactance 0.9 ohm per phase. Ratio of rotor to stator turns 0.67. Neglect stator impedance.

  • Synchronous speed Ns = 120 x 50/4 = 1500 rev/min. Angular synchronous speed w_s = 2 pi x 1500/60 = 157.08 rad/s.
  • Phase voltage Vph = 200/root 3 = 115.5 V.
  • Refer the rotor values to the stator: turns ratio (rotor/stator) = 0.67, so referred values are divided by 0.67^2 = 0.4489.
  • R2' = 0.1/0.4489 = 0.2228 ohm. X2' = 0.9/0.4489 = 2.004 ohm.
Part (a)

Total torque at 4% slip:

  • s = 0.04. R2'/s = 0.2228/0.04 = 5.57.
  • T = (3/w_s) x [Vph^2 (R2'/s)] / [(R2'/s)^2 + X2'^2]
  • = (3/157.08) x [115.5^2 x 5.57] / [5.57^2 + 2.004^2]
  • = 0.01910 x [13340 x 5.57] / [31.02 + 4.016]
  • = 0.01910 x 74304 / 35.04 = 0.01910 x 2120.5 = 40.5 N m.
Part (b)

Maximum torque:

  • Slip at maximum torque s_max = R2'/X2' = 0.2228/2.004 = 0.1112.
  • T_max = (3/(2 w_s)) x (Vph^2 / X2') = (3/314.16) x (13340/2.004) = 0.009550 x 6656 = 63.6 N m.
Part (c)

Speed at maximum torque:

  • N = Ns (1 - s_max) = 1500 x (1 - 0.1112) = 1500 x 0.8888 = 1333 rev/min.

So total torque at 4% slip = 40.5 N m, maximum torque = 63.6 N m, speed at maximum torque = 1333 rev/min.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Draw the complete phasor diagram of the transformer under no-load conditions. (6)

(b) The following results were obtained on a 50 kVA transformer: open-circuit test - primary voltage, 3300 V; secondary voltage, 415 V; primary power, 430 W. Short circuit test - primary voltage, 124 V; primary current, 15.3; primary power, 525 W; secondary current, full-load value.

Calculate: (10)

(a) the efficiencies at full load and at half load for 0.7 power factor.

(b) the voltage regulations for power factor 0.7, (i) lagging,

(ii) leading;

(c) the secondary terminal voltages corresponding to (i) and (ii)

Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Phasor diagram of a transformer under no-load conditions:

  • The applied primary voltage V1 is taken as the reference phasor.
  • The no-load current I0 has two components: the magnetising component Im (in quadrature with V1, lagging by 90 degrees) and the core-loss (active) component Iw (in phase with V1).
  • I0 = Iw + Im, and I0 lags V1 by an angle phi0 (the no-load power factor angle), where cos phi0 = Iw/I0.
  • The flux phi is in phase with the magnetising current Im (neglecting hysteresis), and the induced e.m.f. E1 (and E2) lag the flux by 90 degrees. E1 is approximately equal and opposite to V1.
  • The diagram shows V1, I0, Im, Iw, phi, E1 and E2 with their phase relationships.
Part (b)

50 kVA transformer. OC test: V1 = 3300 V, V2 = 415 V, P = 430 W. SC test: V1 = 124 V, I1 = 15.3 A, P = 525 W, secondary current = full-load value.

  • Iron loss (from OC test) = 430 W.
  • Full-load copper loss (from SC test) = 525 W.
  • Full-load primary current = 50000/3300 = 15.15 A.
Part (a)

Efficiencies at 0.7 p.f.:

  • Full load: output = 50 x 0.7 = 35 kW. Losses = 430 + 525 = 955 W. Input = 35,955 W. Efficiency = 35000/35955 = 0.9734 = 97.34%.
  • Half load: copper loss = 525 x (0.5)^2 = 131.25 W. Total losses = 430 + 131.25 = 561.25 W. Output = 17.5 kW. Input = 18,061.25 W. Efficiency = 17500/18061.25 = 0.9689 = 96.89%.
Part (b)

Voltage regulation at 0.7 p.f.:

  • From SC test: equivalent impedance Z = 124/15.3 = 8.105 ohm. Equivalent resistance Req = P/I^2 = 525/15.3^2 = 525/234.1 = 2.243 ohm. Equivalent reactance Xeq = sqrt(8.105^2 - 2.243^2) = sqrt(65.7 - 5.03) = sqrt(60.67) = 7.79 ohm.
  • cos phi = 0.7, sin phi = 0.714.
  • (i) Lagging: %VR = I (Req cos phi + Xeq sin phi)/V1 x 100 = 15.15 (2.243 x 0.7 + 7.79 x 0.714)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 (1.570 + 5.562)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 x 7.132/3300 x 100 = 108.1/3300 x 100 = 3.28%.
  • (ii) Leading: %VR = 15.15 (1.570 - 5.562)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 x (-3.992)/3300 x 100 = -60.5/3300 x 100 = -1.83%.
Part (c)

Secondary terminal voltages:

  • Nominal secondary voltage = 415 V.
  • (i) Lagging: V2 = 415 (1 - 0.0328) = 415 x 0.9672 = 401.4 V.
  • (ii) Leading: V2 = 415 (1 + 0.0183) = 415 x 1.0183 = 422.6 V.

So efficiency = 97.34% (full load) and 96.89% (half load); regulation = 3.28% lagging and -1.83% leading; secondary voltages = 401.4 V (lagging) and 422.6 V (leading).

Q1 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the construction and the periodic maintenance required of a Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB). (8)

(b) Compare the construction, operation, and usage of Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB) with Air Circuit Breakers (ACB). (8)

Appeared In: Sep 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Construction and Periodic Maintenance of a Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)

Construction of a Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

  • A VCB utilizes vacuum as the arc quenching medium, providing excellent dielectric strength and rapid arc extinction.
  • It consists of fixed and moving contacts housed within a hermetically sealed vacuum interrupter (VI). The VI is typically made of a ceramic or glass envelope with metal end plates.
  • The moving contact is connected to the operating mechanism via a metallic bellows, which allows for contact movement without compromising the vacuum integrity.
  • When contacts separate in a vacuum, the arc is quickly extinguished due to the high dielectric strength of the vacuum and the rapid diffusion of charge carriers.
  • The operating mechanism (e.g., spring-charged or electromagnetic) provides the necessary force for opening and closing the contacts.
  • Auxiliary contacts, trip coils (for overcurrent, undervoltage protection), and indication mechanisms are integrated into the overall VCB assembly.

Periodic Maintenance for Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB):

Routine tasks (ship’s staff can carry out):

  • Inspect all internal linkages, bearings, and pivot points
  • Lubricate/grease all moving parts
  • Inspect or replace arcing contacts and arc chutes
  • Measure contact resistance (when closed)
  • Measure insulation resistance (when open)
  • Check racking mechanism for smooth and correct operation

Specialised maintenance (requires contractor/equipment):

  • Inspect, align, and test spring pressure of main contacts
  • Check opening and closing times of main contacts
Part (b)

Comparison of Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB) with Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

A comparison of the construction, operation, and usage of Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB) and Air Circuit Breakers (ACB) is provided below:

Feature

Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)

Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)

Arc Quenching Medium

Vacuum

Air (at atmospheric pressure)

Construction

Fixed and moving contacts are enclosed in a hermetically sealed vacuum interrupter (VI). Compact and lightweight design.

Contacts open in ambient air. Often larger and heavier due to the need for robust arc chutes and splitter plates.

Operation

Arc extinguishes very rapidly due to the high dielectric strength of vacuum and quick diffusion of charge carriers. Minimal arc energy and no external arc flash.

Arc is drawn in air and extinguished by cooling, lengthening, and splitting it within arc chutes. Produces more arc energy, noise, and hot gases.

Maintenance

Low maintenance due to sealed contacts within the vacuum interrupter. No need to clean or replace arc chutes. Contact wear is minimal. Periodic checks for vacuum integrity.

Higher maintenance due to contact erosion and the need to regularly clean or replace arc chutes. Requires frequent inspection and cleaning of contacts.

Life Span

Longer electrical and mechanical life due to minimal contact erosion and absence of external arc effects. Suitable for frequent switching operations.

Shorter electrical life compared to VCBs, especially under frequent fault interruptions, due to contact degradation and arc chute wear.

Environmental Impact

Environmentally friendly as it does not use harmful gases like SF6.

No specific environmental concerns related to the arc quenching medium itself, but arc byproducts and noise can be considerations.

Application

Primarily used in medium voltage (up to 36 kV) applications and increasingly in low voltage systems. Preferred for applications requiring frequent switching or high reliability.

Commonly used in low voltage (up to 1000V) main distribution boards and some medium voltage applications. Suitable for general power distribution.

Safety

Higher safety due to no external arc flash, reduced fire risk, and quiet operation during fault interruption.

Potential for external arc flash, noise, and hot gas emission during fault interruption, requiring greater safety clearances.

Cost

Generally higher initial cost for similar ratings, but often results in lower lifecycle costs due to reduced maintenance.

Generally lower initial cost, but can incur higher operational and maintenance costs over its lifespan.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Explain the construction and working principle of Star-Delta Starter with the help of circuit diagram. What are the advantages and limitations of using a Star-Delta Starter for starting an induction motor. (10)

(b) Describe the maintenance procedures for a motor starter. What are the common faults, and how would you troubleshoot them. (6)

Appeared In: Sep 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Construction and working principle of a Star-Delta starter:

  • Construction: the starter has three contactors - a main (line) contactor, a star contactor, and a delta contactor - together with a timer (time delay relay), an overload relay, fuses/MCCB, start and stop push buttons, and an indicating lamp. The motor has six terminals (U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2) brought out to the starter.
  • Working principle: on pressing start, the main and star contactors close, connecting the motor windings in star. Each winding then receives phase voltage (line voltage / root 3), so the starting current is reduced to about one third of the DOL value, and the starting torque to about one third. The motor accelerates under reduced voltage. After a preset time (set by the timer, allowing the motor to reach near rated speed), the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes, reconnecting the windings in delta so each winding receives full line voltage and the motor runs at rated condition.
  • Advantages:
  • Starting current is reduced to about one third of the DOL starting current, reducing the voltage dip on the supply.
  • Simple, robust, and relatively cheap.
  • No extra losses during running (the motor runs in delta at full voltage).
  • Reduces mechanical shock during starting.
  • Limitations:
  • Starting torque is reduced to about one third of the DOL torque, so it cannot start a load requiring high starting torque.
  • The changeover from star to delta causes a current and torque surge.
  • Only suitable for motors that can be started on reduced voltage and that run in delta (normally delta-connected motors).
  • The motor must be designed for star-delta starting (six terminals available).
Part (b)

Maintenance procedures for a motor starter, common faults and troubleshooting:

  • Maintenance: regularly inspect and clean the contactor contacts (check for pitting, burning, and correct contact pressure); check and tighten all electrical connections; check the timer setting; test the overload relay and reset it; check the fuses/MCCB; lubricate moving parts; check the coil for correct operation and voltage; check for loose wiring, moisture, and dust; verify the earth connection; periodically test the starter operation and the insulation resistance.
  • Common faults and troubleshooting:
  • Motor does not start: check the supply, fuses/MCCB, control circuit, start button, contactor coil, and overload relay (may be tripped). Check for a blown fuse or an open circuit in the control wiring.
  • Contactor chatters or fails to hold: check the coil voltage, the holding contact, and the supply; a low voltage or a faulty holding contact causes chattering.
  • Motor starts in star but fails to change to delta: check the timer, the delta contactor, and its coil and contacts.
  • Overload relay trips frequently: check for an actual overload, incorrect relay setting, single-phasing, or a faulty relay.
  • Burnt or pitted contacts: caused by frequent operation, arcing, or a faulty coil; clean or replace the contacts.
  • Single-phasing: check the fuses and connections on all three phases; a blown fuse causes the motor to run on two phases and overheat.
  • Always isolate and lock off the supply before working on the starter.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxiliary machineries on board vessels. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:

  • Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
  • Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
  • Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
  • Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
  • Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:

  • A VFD consists of three main stages:
  • Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
  • D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
  • Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
  • The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
  • Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
  • Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labelling all the important parts. explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.

In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection

(a) Explain the construction, working principle, and characteristics of a Zener Diode. Discuss its applications in electronic circuits. (8)

(b) What is a Zener Barrier? With the help of a diagram, explain how a Zener Barrier works in an intrinsic Safe Circuit and discuss its importance in hazardous environments. (8)

Appeared In: Sep 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Zener diode - construction, working principle, characteristics and applications:

  • Construction: a Zener diode is a heavily doped p-n junction diode designed to operate in the reverse breakdown region. The heavy doping gives a very narrow depletion region, so the breakdown voltage is low and well defined.
  • Working principle: in the forward direction it behaves like a normal diode. In the reverse direction, when the reverse voltage reaches the Zener (breakdown) voltage Vz, the diode breaks down and conducts heavily, but the voltage across it remains almost constant at Vz over a wide range of reverse current. This is due to Zener breakdown (for low voltages) or avalanche breakdown (for higher voltages).
  • Characteristics: the reverse characteristic shows a sharp knee at the Zener voltage; beyond this the current rises steeply while the voltage stays nearly constant. The forward characteristic is like a normal diode. The Zener voltage is specified at a particular test current, and the dynamic resistance (dV/dI) is small in the breakdown region.
  • Applications: voltage regulation (a Zener diode maintains a constant output voltage across a load despite variations in input voltage or load current); as a voltage reference; in voltage clamping and protection circuits (limiting overvoltage); in waveform shaping; and in power supplies as a shunt regulator.
Part (b)

Zener barrier in an intrinsically safe circuit:

  • A Zener barrier is a safety device used to limit the energy (voltage and current) reaching a hazardous area so that it cannot ignite a flammable atmosphere. It is fitted between the safe area (control equipment) and the hazardous area (field instruments).
  • Construction: the barrier contains Zener diodes, a series resistor (current-limiting), and a fuse, all encapsulated in a flameproof housing and earthed to a high-integrity earth.
  • Working principle: under normal operation the Zener diodes do not conduct and the signal passes through the series resistor to the hazardous area. If a fault causes the voltage to rise above the Zener voltage, the Zener diodes conduct and clamp the voltage to a safe level, and the fuse blows to protect the diodes. The series resistor limits the current to a safe value. Thus the energy (voltage and current) reaching the hazardous area is limited to intrinsically safe levels, below the minimum ignition energy of the gas.
  • Importance in hazardous environments: it prevents the ignition of flammable gases or vapours by limiting the electrical energy in the circuit. It allows standard (non-intrinsically safe) control equipment to be used with intrinsically safe field instruments, providing safety in tankers, gas carriers, and other hazardous areas. The barrier must be correctly earthed and certified for the hazardous area classification.
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)

(b) A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 KW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor: Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit the ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of a PN junction diode, specifications, and static/dynamic resistance:

  • Characteristics: a PN junction diode conducts current easily in the forward direction (when the anode is positive) once the forward voltage exceeds the threshold (about 0.7 V for silicon, 0.3 V for germanium). In the reverse direction it blocks current until the reverse breakdown voltage is reached, beyond which it conducts heavily (avalanche/Zener breakdown). The forward current rises steeply with voltage; the reverse current is very small (leakage current) until breakdown.
  • Specifications: maximum forward current (If), maximum reverse voltage / peak inverse voltage (PIV), forward voltage drop (Vf), reverse leakage current, power dissipation rating, reverse breakdown voltage, and switching speed (recovery time).
  • Static resistance: the ratio of the voltage to the current at a point on the characteristic, R = V/I. It is the resistance of the diode at a particular operating point.
  • Dynamic (a.c.) resistance: the ratio of a small change in voltage to the corresponding change in current, r = dV/dI. It is the slope of the characteristic at the operating point and is small in the forward conducting region. It is important in small-signal analysis because it determines the a.c. behaviour of the diode.
Part (b)

72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(1 - 0.5868) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = present kVAr - allowable kVAr = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series Motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system. Calculate. (10)

(i) The synchronous speed:

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent:

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find: (10)

(i) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) the ‘breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 Ohm, and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation

(a) Describe the working principle of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) used in ship automation systems. How does a PLC enhance the safety and efficiency of shipboard operations? (8)

(b) Explain the process of programming a PLC for an emergency shutdown sequence on a marine engine. What considerations should be taken into account to ensure reliable operation in critical situations? (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Working principle of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) used in ship automation:

  • A PLC is a solid-state industrial computer that monitors inputs and controls outputs according to a stored program. It consists of a central processing unit (CPU), a memory, input modules, output modules, and a power supply.
  • Inputs (from sensors, switches, push buttons, limit switches, transducers) are read by the input modules and converted to digital signals. The CPU scans the program (ladder logic or other language) cyclically, evaluates the logic based on the input states, and updates the outputs. The output modules drive the actuators (contactors, valves, solenoids, alarms, indicators).
  • The scan cycle (read inputs, execute program, update outputs) repeats continuously, giving real-time control.
  • How a PLC enhances safety and efficiency:
  • Safety: it provides reliable, repeatable control of safety functions (alarms, shutdowns, interlocks), monitors critical parameters, and can be programmed to fail-safe. It reduces human error and gives fast, consistent response.
  • Efficiency: it optimises processes (e.g. automatic start/stop of pumps, load management, temperature and level control), reduces energy consumption, provides monitoring and data logging, and allows easy modification of the control logic without rewiring.
Part (b)

Programming a PLC for an emergency shutdown (ESD) sequence on a marine engine, and considerations for reliability:

  • Programming: the ESD sequence is programmed in ladder logic. The inputs are the emergency stop push buttons, engine overspeed switch, low lubricating oil pressure switch, high cooling water temperature switch, and other trip sensors. The logic is arranged so that any trip condition (or a combination, e.g. two-out-of-three voting for critical trips) energises the shutdown output, which operates the fuel shut-off valve, stops the fuel supply, and initiates the alarm.
  • The program includes: latching of the trip condition (so the shutdown is maintained even if the sensor returns to normal), an alarm output, and a reset interlock (the engine cannot be restarted until the trip is acknowledged and reset).
  • Considerations for reliable operation in critical situations:
  • Use fail-safe logic (de-energise to trip) so that a loss of power or a broken wire causes a safe shutdown.
  • Use redundant sensors and voting (e.g. two-out-of-three) for critical trips to avoid spurious trips while ensuring genuine trips are detected.
  • Provide a reliable, uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the PLC.
  • Use a watchdog timer to detect PLC failure and initiate a safe shutdown.
  • Test the ESD system regularly and document the logic.
  • Ensure the program is simple, well-documented, and protected against unauthorised modification.
  • Provide manual emergency stop as a backup independent of the PLC.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Explain the construction and working principle of a three-phase induction motor used on ships. How is the direction of rotation of the motor reversed? (8)

(b) Discuss the maintenance procedures for an electric propulsion motor on a ship. What common faults can occur in the motor, and how would you diagnose and repair them? (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Construction and working principle of a three-phase induction motor, and reversal of direction:

  • Construction: the motor has a stator and a rotor. The stator is a laminated iron core with slots carrying a three-phase distributed winding. The rotor is either a squirrel-cage (bars short-circuited by end rings) or a wound rotor (slip-ring) with a three-phase winding. The rotor is mounted on bearings inside the stator, with a small air gap between them.
  • Working principle: when a three-phase supply is applied to the stator winding, it produces a rotating magnetic field (the three-phase currents are 120 degrees apart in time, producing a field that rotates at synchronous speed Ns = 120 f/P). This rotating field cuts the rotor conductors and induces an e.m.f. in them (by Faraday's law). Since the rotor conductors are short-circuited, currents flow in them. The interaction between the rotor currents and the rotating field produces a torque (by the motor action F = B I l), which drives the rotor in the direction of the rotating field. The rotor always runs slightly slower than the synchronous field; the difference is the slip.
  • Reversal of direction: the direction of rotation of the rotating field (and hence the motor) is reversed by interchanging any two of the three supply phases to the stator. This reverses the direction of the rotating magnetic field, so the motor runs in the opposite direction. This is done by a reversing contactor or by changing over two supply leads.
Part (b)

Maintenance procedures for an electric propulsion motor, common faults, diagnosis and repair:

  • Maintenance: regularly inspect the windings for signs of overheating, moisture, or contamination; measure the insulation resistance (megger test) of the windings; check and tighten all connections; inspect the bearings (lubrication, temperature, vibration); check the air gap; clean the motor and ventilation system; check the cooling system; inspect the slip rings/brushes (for wound rotor or synchronous motors); check for vibration and unusual noise; periodically test the protection devices.
  • Common faults and diagnosis:
  • Overheating: caused by overload, poor ventilation, blocked cooling, low voltage, or insulation deterioration. Diagnose by checking load, cooling, voltage, and insulation resistance.
  • Insulation failure / earth fault: caused by moisture, contamination, or ageing. Diagnose by megger test and visual inspection; repair by drying, cleaning, or rewinding.
  • Bearing failure: caused by wear, misalignment, or lack of lubrication. Diagnose by vibration, noise, and temperature; repair by replacing the bearing.
  • Vibration: caused by unbalance, misalignment, or a bent shaft. Diagnose by vibration analysis; repair by balancing or realignment.
  • Unbalanced currents / single-phasing: caused by a faulty supply or a broken connection. Diagnose by measuring the phase currents; repair the connection or supply.
  • Rotor faults (broken bars): cause vibration and torque pulsation. Diagnose by current signature analysis; repair by replacing the rotor.
  • Repair: isolate and lock off the supply, discharge any stored energy, and follow the manufacturer's procedures. Repairs may include drying and varnishing the windings, replacing bearings, rebalancing, or rewinding. After repair, test the insulation resistance and run the motor on no load before returning it to service.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the concept of power factor in electrical systems. Why is it important to maintain a high-power factor on board a ship? (8)

(b) Discuss the methods used to correct power factor on ships. How does power factor correction improve the efficiency of the electrical system? (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Definition of Power Factor:

Power factor is a measure of the efficiency of an electrical system, indicating how effectively electrical power is converted into useful work output. It is defined as the ratio of True Power (real power in kilowatts, kW) to Apparent Power (total power in kilovolt-amperes, kVA). Mathematically, it is expressed as:

$$Power\:factor\:\left(PF\right)=\frac{True\:power\:\left(kW\right)}{Apparent\:power\:\left(kVA\right)}$$

The power factor is a dimensionless quantity, represented as a value between 0 and 1 or as a percentage. A power factor of 1 (or 100%) signifies that all the apparent power is being effectively used as true power. For most shipboard systems, the power factor is typically 0.8 lagging, indicating that the current lags the voltage by an angle θ due to inductive loads.

Reasons to maintain high power factor onboard ship:

  • Reduces Equipment Costs: Low power factor increases apparent power (kVA), requiring larger generators, transformers, and distribution systems, thereby increasing costs.
  • Minimizes Energy Losses: Low power factor increases current flow, resulting in higher I²R losses and reduced system efficiency.
  • Improves Voltage Regulation: A high power factor ensures better voltage stability, which is critical for sensitive equipment.
  • Enhances Load Capacity: With a high power factor, existing equipment can handle additional loads, optimizing resources.
Part (b)

Methods for Power Factor Correction:

Static Capacitors

  • Capacitors are connected in parallel with inductive loads.
  • These capacitors generate a leading current that offsets the lagging current caused by inductive loads, thereby improving the power factor.
  • Advantages: Simple to install, low maintenance, and cost-effective.

Synchronous Condenser

  • Overexcited synchronous motors (used as condensers) are connected to the electrical system.
  • These machines supply leading reactive power, compensating for lagging power due to inductive loads.
  • Advantages: Effective for large systems and improves system stability.

Phase Advancers

  • Phase advancers are used to improve the power factor of large induction motors.
  • They supply the excitation current required for the motor, reducing lag and improving efficiency.
  • Advantages: Reduces load on the supply line and is efficient for high-power applications.

Impact of power factor correction on system efficiency:

  • For the same load, corrected power factor decreases current flow, reducing I²R losses in cables and transformers.
  • Reduced current and energy losses directly translate into lower operational costs.
  • With reduced apparent power requirements, smaller cables, transformers, and generators can be used, saving space and capital costs.
  • Corrected power factor ensures stable voltage levels, preventing under-voltage issues for connected equipment.
  • By improving power factor, existing systems can accommodate additional loads without overloading equipment.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) The readings on the ammeters

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V.

Calculate: (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit.

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current fails to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B,and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm (10)

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems.

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance.

(b) Cascade system.

(c) Pole-changing.

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Comparison of methods of speed regulation of three-phase induction motors used in tankers:

Part (a)

Rotor resistance (slip-ring motor):

  • Method: additional resistance is inserted in the rotor circuit of a slip-ring (wound rotor) induction motor. Increasing the rotor resistance increases the slip for a given torque, so the speed falls. The speed is varied by varying the rotor resistance.
  • Characteristics: gives speed control only below synchronous speed (from full speed down to standstill). The speed regulation is poor (speed varies with load). The efficiency is low because the slip power is dissipated as heat in the rotor resistance. The starting torque can be increased.
  • Advantages: simple, cheap, gives high starting torque and smooth acceleration.
  • Disadvantages: wasteful (heat loss), poor speed regulation, only stepwise control unless a liquid rheostat is used.
  • Example: cargo pump motors, winches, windlasses, and other deck machinery where high starting torque and some speed reduction are needed.
Part (b)

Cascade system:

  • Method: two induction motors are mechanically coupled, and the rotor of the first (main) motor is connected electrically to the stator of the second (auxiliary) motor. The slip power of the main motor is fed to the auxiliary motor, which adds to the mechanical output. By changing the number of poles of the auxiliary motor (or by using a Scherbius or Kramer arrangement), the speed of the combined set can be varied.
  • Characteristics: gives a limited number of discrete speeds (usually two or three), all below synchronous speed. The efficiency is better than rotor resistance because the slip power is usefully employed.
  • Advantages: better efficiency than rotor resistance, useful for large motors.
  • Disadvantages: complex, expensive, requires two machines, only a few fixed speeds.
  • Example: large cargo pump drives and other large constant-speed applications where a few discrete speeds are acceptable.
Part (c)

Pole-changing (consequent pole / Dahlander):

  • Method: the stator winding is reconnected to change the number of poles, giving two (or more) discrete synchronous speeds. The Dahlander connection gives a 2:1 speed ratio (e.g. 4-pole/8-pole). Speed = 120 f / P.
  • Characteristics: gives discrete speeds only (e.g. half and full speed), not continuous control. The efficiency is high at each speed because the motor runs at its rated slip. The torque can be maintained constant or the power constant depending on the connection.
  • Advantages: simple, robust, cheap, high efficiency at each speed, no extra losses.
  • Disadvantages: only a few fixed speeds, no continuous speed variation, the changeover requires a special starter.
  • Example: engine room fans, ventilation fans, ballast and bilge pumps, and other auxiliaries where two or three fixed speeds are sufficient.

Summary: rotor resistance gives smooth but inefficient low-speed control; cascade gives a few efficient speeds for large drives; pole-changing gives simple, efficient discrete speeds for fans and pumps.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed A.C. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q4 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

What is a marine high voltage system? Sketch and describe a shipboard high voltage switch board and its protective devices. (16)

Appeared In: Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Features of Marine HV System:

  • Neutral is always earthed through a Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) to limit earth fault current.
  • HV systems are more expensive than LV systems due to the need for special insulation, protective gear, and safety features.
  • They carry a higher arc-flash hazard, necessitating stringent operational and maintenance safety procedures.
  • The general layout of an HV system is similar to an LV system, but includes additional protective and safety components.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Protective Devices in Marine HV Systems:

Protective Device

Function

Overcurrent (Instantaneous)

Trips the breaker immediately on high current to protect equipment.

OCIT (Overcurrent Inverse Time)

Shortens the trip delay as overcurrent magnitude increases.

Earth Leakage

Detects small earth faults and trips the system to prevent damage or fire.

Reverse Power Protection

Prevents motorization of generators by detecting reverse current flow.

Undervoltage Protection

Trips equipment if the supply voltage drops below safe limits.

Overtemperature Protection

Used to monitor cable and equipment temperatures to prevent overheating.

Differential Fault Protection

Compares phase currents (inlet and outlet); trips if imbalance detected.

Thermal Overload (Thermal O/L)

Trips on excessive current over time to protect insulation and windings.

Locked Rotor Protection

Detects if a motor rotor is stalled by checking imbalance across phases.

Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x

Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:

Half-wave rectification:

  • Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
  • Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
  • Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
  • The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.

Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:

  • Less Average current
  • Less average RMS
  • High pulsation output
  • Lower voltage developed
  • More ripple as compared to others
  • Efficiency is less as compared to others.

Full-wave rectification:

  • Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
  • Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
  • More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
  • Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.

Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) The readings on the ammeters.

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltages regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 KVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate: (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit.

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an A.C. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohms. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, A.C. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the “full-in” position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the “full-in” position of the plunger. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Specifications of the three batteries are given below: (10)

(i) Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

(ii) Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

(iii) Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In a three-phase AC system, a star connection means that one end of each of the three phase windings is joined together to form a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to the three line terminals.

For a star-connected system:

$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$

$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$

In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:

$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 Ohm, and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motor of the three phase a.c. induction motor in respect of the following: (16)

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Torque characteristic

(c) Speed variation.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships. (16)

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships.

Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems: (16)

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting current.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies for these problems.

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an Induction motor (4)

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an Induction motor in installed condition (3)

(c) What is the purpose of 'fuse back up protection' provided to an induction motor? (3)

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque? (3)

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum running torque in an induction motor? (3)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20Ω is to supply power to 1000 load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate:

(i) Peak load current

(ii) DC load current

(iii) AC load current.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is

0.05 Wb. Calculate

(i) The speed

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail. (6)

(b) Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025Ω and shunt field resistance is 230Ω Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started? (6)

(b) A 500V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46kW and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8. If the iron and friction losses are 500 w and excitation losses are 800w, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction; (8)

(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.

The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC. Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency. Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.

The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.

Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.

The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.

A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.

The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
  • Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
  • Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
  • Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
  • Increased safety for ship and crew
  • Low noise power generation

Q2 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to Electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control; (8)

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) . Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a Silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. (8)

(b) . Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system. (8)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

It is proposed to operate a Bow thruster unit from a 3.3 KV electrical supply.

Outline suitable options for the design of installation under each of the following heading. (16)

(a) Protection of main switch board

(b) Overload of a bow thruster motor

(c) Cable protection

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Protection of Main Switchboard (MSB):

  • Design a separate HV side panel for the bow thrusters, isolated from adjacent LV panels.
  • Ensure independent earthing system for the HV side, connecting to the ship's hull.
  • Incorporate harmonic filters on both ends of the HV busbar to avoid waveform distortion.
  • MSB should be robust to withstand maritime conditions such as vibration, humidity, high temperatures, and exposure to sea water.
  • Implement a neutral earth resistor (NER) for neutral point earthing.
  • Choose circuit breakers suitable for HV, such as vacuum or SF6 types, with manual or motor-driven closing mechanisms.
  • Integrate standard interlocks and trips for under voltage, overcurrent, and short circuit protection.
  • Include monitoring instruments for incoming voltage, frequency, current, in/out power lamps, and load status lamps.
  • Additional features like anti-condensation heaters and interlocks for main-emergency power and door closure are recommended.
Part (b)

Overload Protection for Bow Thrusters Motor:

  • Utilize a combined motor protection relay offering overcurrent (inverse time relay), differential current monitoring, and earth fault monitoring.
  • Connect the relay to a 'Lock-out' relay to trip the motor power in the event of overload.
  • Implement thermistor trip/protection for single phasing and high-temperature conditions.
Part (c)

Cable Protection:

  • Ensure proper cable rating based on the electrical system specifications (1900/3300V for earthed neutral system; 3300/3300V for insulated neutral system).
  • Choose conductors rated for short circuit and maximum fault current.
  • Select high-quality insulation materials such as EPR (ethylene propylene rubber) or XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene).
  • Use sheet material with ratings for short circuit, heat, oil, chemical resistance, and flame retardancy.
  • Plan cable tray routing and ensure proper junctions with terminals.
  • Consider the complexity of insulation design for HV cables, emphasizing clearance and creepage distance.
  • Recognize that less copper area is required for HV conductors, allowing for space and weight savings during installation.
Q5 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three phase shipboard electrical distribution system:

(a) . Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(b) . Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(c) . Describe how the earthed neutral system is Earthed. (4)

(d) . Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an Earthed neutral System with regard to the risk of electric shock from either system. (4)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) A series circuit having resistance, Inductance and capacitance is to be operated on a constant voltage supply of available frequency. Indicate graphically how changes will take place in the current and voltage in resistance, inductance and capacitance, and also capacitive reactance and inductive reactance. (6)

(b) A resistance of 130 Ω and a capacitor of 30µF are connected in parallel across a 230 Volt, 50Hz supply. Find the current in each component, total current, phase angle and the power consumed. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Consider a R, L, C series circuit as shown.

$$V\:is\:the\:applied\:constant\:voltage$$

$$I\:is\:the\:current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$X_{L}=inductive\:reactance$$

$$X_{C}=Capacitive\:reactance$$

$$I=\frac{V}{Z}=\frac{V}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_{L}-X_{c}\right)^2}}$$

$$Power\:factor\:=\:\cos\phi=\frac{R}{Z}=\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2}+\left(X_{L}-X_{C}\right)^2}$$

Case (i):

$$R=0;\:X_{C}>X_{L}$$

$$then\:I\:leads\:V\:by\:90^{o}$$

Case (ii):

$$R=0;\:X_{L}>X_{C}$$

$$then\:V\:leads\:I\:by\:90^{o}$$

For Case (i) and (ii):

Case (iii):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{L}>X_{C}$$

$$then\:I\:lags\:V\:by\:0\:to\:90^{o}$$

Case (iv):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{C}=X_{L}$$

$$then\:I\:leads\:V\:by\:o\:to\:90^{o}$$

Case (v):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{L}=X_{C}$$

$$then\:Z=R$$

$$I\:is\:maximum\:and\:in\:phase\:with\:V$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) . Explain the working principal of a three-phase induction motor. What are the various types of rotors? (6)

(b) . An 18.65Kw, 6-pole, 50Hz, 3 phase slip ring induction motor runs at 960 rpm on full load with a rotor current per phase of 35A, allowing 1Kw for mechanical losses, find the resistance per phase of 3-phase rotor winding. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A three-phase induction motor operates on the principle of electromagnetic induction. A rotating magnetic field is created in the stator (stationary part) by supplying three-phase AC power to its windings. This rotating field induces currents in the rotor (rotating part), which in turn creates its own magnetic field. The interaction between the stator's rotating magnetic field and the rotor's magnetic field produces a torque that causes the rotor to rotate. The rotor speed is slightly less than the speed of the rotating magnetic field, a difference known as slip. The slip is necessary to induce the currents in the rotor that produce the torque.

Types of Rotors in Three-Phase Induction Motors:

Squirrel-Cage Rotor:

  • Consists of laminated steel sheets with parallel slots carrying heavy copper or aluminum bars. The ends of these bars are short-circuited by end rings, forming a closed loop resembling a squirrel cage.
  • The simplicity and ruggedness of the squirrel-cage rotor make it the most commonly used type in induction motors.

Wound Rotor (Slip-Ring Rotor):

  • Features a laminated iron core with three-phase windings placed in the slots. These windings are connected to external slip rings via brushes, allowing for external connections.
  • The wound rotor design allows for external resistances to be added to the rotor circuit, enabling control over the motor's starting torque and speed. This feature is particularly useful in applications requiring precise speed control and higher starting torque.
Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) . Explain why the iron losses in a transformer are substantially independent of the load current. (6)

(b) . The equivalent circuit for a 200/400-V step-up transformer has the following parameters referred to the low-voltage side. (10)

Equivalent resistance = 0.15 Ω; Equivalent reactance = 0.37 Ω

Core-loss component resistance = 600 Ω; Magnetising reactance = 300 Ω

When the transformer is supplying a load at 10 A at a power factor if 0.8 lag, Calculate,

(i) . the primary current

(ii) . secondary terminal voltage.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In a practical transformer, iron (core) losses remain nearly constant from no-load to full-load operation. This means that the power loss occurring in the transformer core does not change significantly with changes in the load current.

Iron losses consist of two main components:

  1. Hysteresis loss
  2. Eddy current loss

Both of these losses are produced by the alternating magnetic flux in the transformer core and depend mainly on the supply voltage, frequency, and core material properties, rather than on the load current.

1. Hysteresis Loss

Hysteresis loss is caused by the continuous reversal of magnetization in the iron core as the alternating current produces an alternating magnetic field.

During every AC cycle, the core undergoes repeated magnetization and demagnetization. This repeated reversal requires energy because of the inherent magnetic properties of the core material, and the energy is dissipated as heat.

The magnitude of hysteresis loss depends on:

  • The area of the hysteresis loop of the core material.
  • The frequency of the alternating supply.
  • The magnetic properties of the core, such as coercivity and magnetic permeability.

Since these factors remain practically constant for a transformer operating at constant supply voltage and frequency, hysteresis loss is essentially independent of the load current.

2. Eddy Current Loss

Eddy current loss is caused by circulating currents induced within the transformer core due to the alternating magnetic flux.

These induced currents flow through the resistance of the core material, producing heat and resulting in power loss.

The magnitude of eddy current loss depends on:

  • The electrical resistivity of the core material.
  • The frequency of the alternating supply.
  • The core geometry and thickness of the laminations.

Since these factors are determined by the transformer design and operating frequency, eddy current loss also remains practically independent of the load current.

Q9 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Sketch a graph of starting current, and torque against the speed of rotation for a single cage motor. (6)

(b) A 230V motor, which normally develops 10Kw at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85%, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 Ohm and the shunt field resistance is 220Ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A by means of the shunt regulator what output in Kw could be expected as a generator, if the armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Graph of starting current and torque against speed for a single-cage induction motor:

  • Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
  • Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
  • The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
Part (b)

230 V motor, 10 kW at 1000 rev/min, efficiency 85%, used as a generator:

  • As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
  • Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
  • Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
  • Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
  • As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
  • E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
  • Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
  • Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
  • Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
  • Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.

So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 Ohm, and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100V, 50Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits (16)

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q2 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operations:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces. (8)

(b) As second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the Machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage. (8)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/ship diagrams. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to a three-phase shipboard electrical distribution system:

(a) Enumerate the advantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(b) Enumerate the disadvantages of an insulated neutral system. (4)

(c) Describe how the Earthed neutral system is Earthed. (4)

(d) Compare the use of an insulated neutral system as opposed to the use of an earthed neutral system with regards to the risk of electric shock from either system (4)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Mar 2024 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Advantages of an insulated neutral system:

  • In the event of a single earth fault, no earth fault current flows through the ship's hull due to the insulated neutral, minimizing fire hazards.
  • The hull does not carry current, ensuring safety from electrical currents passing through the structure.
  • A single earth fault does not cause generator breaker tripping, avoiding sudden blackouts or operational disruptions.
  • Harmonic currents caused by third harmonics in the generated voltage are prevented from flowing through the neutral, protecting the generator windings from overloading.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of an insulated neutral system:

  1. Only one system voltage (line-to-line) is possible, unlike earthed neutral systems which also provide line-to-neutral voltages.
  2. While an earth fault alarm and phase indicator are triggered, locating the exact fault location requires a time-consuming trial-and-error process.
  3. In cases of inductive or capacitive faults to earth, surge voltage can rise 3.5 to 4 times the system voltage, risking insulation failure and system collapse.
Part (c)

How the earthed neutral system is earthed:

A metallic resistor is inserted between the neutral point and the ship’s hull to limit earth fault current.

The resistor’s value is determined by:

$$R=\frac{V}{\sqrt3I}\:$$

Where,

  • V = Line voltage,
  • I = Full load current.

Metallic resistors are used for their stability, low maintenance, and ability to prevent arcing grounds.

Part (d)

Comparison of Shock Risk:

The risk of electric shock is considered equally dangerous in both earthed and insulated neutral systems. In an insulated system, normal leakage currents from capacitance and surface leakage, along with the possibility of earth faults, mean that touching live parts still carries a considerable shock risk. Similarly, in an earthed system, line-to-neutral voltages (even those as low as 110 or 250 volts) can be lethal under certain shipboard conditions, making neither system inherently safer regarding electric shock than the other. Appropriate safety precautions are essential for both systems.

Q5 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Sketch a magnetic overload device incorporating a dashpot and explain how the current and time setting of the device may be varied. (8)

(b) With the aid of a sketch, outline the essential feature of a three stage "Preferential tripping" scheme for the main generators of a ship. (8)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Magnetic overload device

Part (b)

Three-stage preferential tripping:

Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the applications of PN junction diode (6)

(b) A full-wave, 1-phase rectifier employs a double diode valve, the internal resistance of each element of which may be assumed constant at 500W. The transformer r.m.s secondry voltage from teh centre-tap to each anode is 300V and the load has a resistance of 2000W. Evaluate (10)

(i) Mean load current.

(ii) r.m.s value of load current

(iii) The d.c. output power

(iv) The input power to the anode circuit

(v) The rectification efficiency

Appeared In: Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Applications of a PN junction diode:

  • Rectification: converting a.c. to d.c. in power supplies (half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifiers).
  • Demodulation/detection: extracting the signal from a modulated carrier in radio receivers.
  • Clipping and clamping: limiting voltage levels and shifting d.c. levels in waveforms.
  • Voltage regulation: Zener diodes maintain a constant voltage.
  • Protection: freewheeling diodes across inductive loads, and reverse-polarity protection.
  • Logic and switching: diodes in logic gates and as switches in electronic circuits.
  • Light emission: LEDs (light-emitting diodes) for indication and lighting.
  • Photodiodes: light detection in sensors.
Part (b)

Full-wave, 1-phase rectifier with a double diode valve, internal resistance of each element 500 ohm, transformer r.m.s. secondary voltage from centre-tap to each anode 300 V, load resistance 2000 ohm.

  • Peak voltage per half Vm = 300 x root 2 = 424.3 V.
  • Total resistance per half cycle = internal resistance + load = 500 + 2000 = 2500 ohm.
  • Peak current I_peak = Vm/2500 = 424.3/2500 = 0.1697 A.

(i) Mean load current: for a full-wave rectifier, I_dc = (2 Vm)/(pi x 2500) = (2 x 424.3)/(3.1416 x 2500) = 848.6/7854 = 0.108 A.

(ii) r.m.s. value of load current: I_rms = I_peak/root 2 = 0.1697/1.414 = 0.120 A.

(iii) D.C. output power: P_dc = I_dc^2 x R_load = 0.108^2 x 2000 = 0.01166 x 2000 = 23.3 W. (Also = I_dc x V_dc, where V_dc = I_dc x 2000 = 216 V.)

(iv) Input power to the anode circuit: P_in = I_rms^2 x (total resistance) = 0.120^2 x 2500 = 0.0144 x 2500 = 36.0 W.

(v) Rectification efficiency: eta = P_dc/P_in = 23.3/36.0 = 0.647 = 64.7%.

So mean load current = 0.108 A, r.m.s. current = 0.120 A, d.c. output power = 23.3 W, input power = 36.0 W, rectification efficiency = 64.7%.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(b) An 8kw, 230V, 1200 rpm d.c shunt motor has Ra = 0.7W. The field current is adjusted until, on no-load with a supply of 250V, the motor runs at 1250 rpm and draws armature current of 1.6 amps. A load torque is then applied to the motor shaft which causes it to raise to 40 A and the speed falls to 1150 rpm.Determine the reduction in the flux per pole due to the armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) The star-connected rotor of an induction motor has a stand-still resistance of 4.5 ohms/phase and a resistance of 0.5 ohms/phase. The motor has an induced emf of 50 V between the slip-rings at stand-still on open circuit when connected to its normal supply voltage. Find the current in each phase and the power factor at start when the slip-ring is short-circuited (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain how drooping characteristics cater for stable operation when running in parallel. (6)

(b) Two shunt generators X and Y work in parallel. Their external characteristics may be assumed to be linear over their normal working range, the terminal voltage of X falls 265V on no-load 230V when delivering 350A to the busbars, while the voltage of Y falls from 270V on no-load to 240V when delivering 400A to the busbar. Calculate the current with each machine delivers when they share a common load of 500A. What is the busbar voltage under this condition and the power delivered by each machine (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

How drooping characteristics cater for stable operation when running in parallel:

  • A drooping (falling) external characteristic means the terminal voltage falls as the load current increases. When two generators run in parallel, they share the load automatically because of the droop.
  • If one generator momentarily takes more load, its voltage falls (due to the droop), which reduces the current it supplies, while the other generator, seeing a slightly higher voltage, takes more load. This self-balancing action keeps the load shared stably.
  • Without droop (a flat characteristic), a small difference in the e.m.f.s would cause one machine to take all the load or even motor the other, making stable parallel operation impossible.
  • The droop also allows the load to be shared in proportion to the ratings of the machines, and the governor/voltage regulator settings can be adjusted to control the sharing.
Part (b)

Two shunt generators X and Y in parallel. X: 265 V no-load to 230 V at 350 A. Y: 270 V no-load to 240 V at 400 A. Common load 500 A.

  • Droop of X: voltage drop = 265 - 230 = 35 V over 350 A, so drop per ampere = 35/350 = 0.1 V/A. V_X = 265 - 0.1 I_X.
  • Droop of Y: voltage drop = 270 - 240 = 30 V over 400 A, so drop per ampere = 30/400 = 0.075 V/A. V_Y = 270 - 0.075 I_Y.
  • In parallel, the terminal voltages are equal: 265 - 0.1 I_X = 270 - 0.075 I_Y.
  • Also I_X + I_Y = 500 A.
  • From the voltage equation: 0.1 I_X - 0.075 I_Y = -5.
  • Substituting I_Y = 500 - I_X: 0.1 I_X - 0.075(500 - I_X) = -5 -> 0.1 I_X - 37.5 + 0.075 I_X = -5 -> 0.175 I_X = 32.5 -> I_X = 185.7 A.
  • I_Y = 500 - 185.7 = 314.3 A.
  • Busbar voltage V = 265 - 0.1 x 185.7 = 265 - 18.57 = 246.4 V. (Check: 270 - 0.075 x 314.3 = 270 - 23.57 = 246.4 V.)
  • Power delivered: P_X = V x I_X = 246.4 x 185.7 = 45,760 W = 45.8 kW. P_Y = 246.4 x 314.3 = 77,440 W = 77.4 kW.

So X delivers 185.7 A (45.8 kW) and Y delivers 314.3 A (77.4 kW), at a busbar voltage of 246.4 V.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Describe how protection against short circuit is provided in a 3 phase Induction motor circuit. (6)

(b) An eight-pole alternator running at a speed of 720rev/min supplies current to synchronous and induction motors with forty-eight poles. Calculate the frequency and speed of rotation of the induction motor runs with 2 percent slip. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of short-circuit protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.

(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a).

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.

The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC. Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency. Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.

The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.

Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.

The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.

A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.

The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
  • Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
  • Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
  • Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
  • Increased safety for ship and crew
  • Low noise power generation

Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x

With reference to testing High Voltage equipment:

(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential.

(d) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down

(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making reference to personnel safety

(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems:

(i) Earthed

(ii) Insulated

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (d)

(i) Earthed Neutral System:

  • In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
  • Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
  • A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
  • This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
  • The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.

(ii) Insulated Neutral System:

  • An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
  • No earth leakage condition:
    • No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
    • Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
    • The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
  • Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
    • A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
    • Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
    • The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
    • This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
    • The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain What is meant by, and the significance of, four of the following terms.

(i) Voltage Stabilization

(ii) Filter choke

(iii) Impedance

(iv) Rectification

(v) Grid bias voltage

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

Explain the meaning of 'P' and 'N' types semi-conductor materials and give a brief description of the mechanism by which current passes through them. (16)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

P-Type and N-Type Semiconductor Materials and the Mechanism of Current Conduction

A semiconductor is a material whose electrical conductivity lies between that of a conductor and an insulator. Pure semiconductor materials such as silicon (Si) and germanium (Ge) have limited conductivity. Their conductivity can be greatly increased and controlled by adding a small amount of a suitable impurity. This process is known as doping.

Depending on the type of impurity added, a semiconductor becomes either an N-type or a P-type semiconductor.

1. N-Type Semiconductor

An N-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a pentavalent impurity to a pure semiconductor such as silicon or germanium. Pentavalent impurities have five valence electrons. Examples include phosphorus, arsenic and antimony.

The pure semiconductor atom forms four covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms. When a pentavalent impurity atom replaces one of these atoms:

  • Four of its five valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • The fifth electron is weakly bound and becomes a free electron.
  • This free electron can move through the crystal structure when an electric field is applied.

Therefore, an N-type semiconductor has an excess of free electrons.

  • Majority charge carriers: Free electrons.
  • Minority charge carriers: Holes.

The letter "N" denotes that the majority charge carriers are negative electrons. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in an N-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across an N-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The free electrons gain energy from the electric field and drift through the crystal towards the positive terminal (anode). Their movement through the conduction band constitutes the main mechanism of current conduction.

Thus:

Applied voltage → Electric field → Movement of free electrons → Current flow

Although conventional current is considered to flow from positive to negative, the actual electrons move in the opposite direction, from the negative terminal towards the positive terminal.

2. P-Type Semiconductor

A P-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a trivalent impurity to a pure semiconductor. Trivalent impurities have three valence electrons. Examples include boron, gallium and indium.

When a trivalent impurity atom is introduced into the semiconductor crystal:

  • Its three valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • One bond remains incomplete because there is a shortage of one electron.
  • This missing electron position is called a hole.

A hole behaves as a positive charge carrier because it represents a deficiency of an electron.

Therefore, a P-type semiconductor has an excess of holes.

  • Majority charge carriers: Holes.
  • Minority charge carriers: Free electrons.

The letter "P" denotes that the majority charge carriers are effectively positive holes. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in a P-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across a P-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The holes act as the main charge carriers. However, the actual physical movement is still carried out by electrons. An electron from a neighbouring covalent bond moves to fill a nearby hole. This movement leaves a new hole at the electron's original position.

The process continues as follows:

Electron fills a hole → A new hole is created → Another electron fills the new hole → Progressive movement of holes

As a result of this continuous electron movement, the holes appear to move through the material towards the negative terminal (cathode). The resulting progressive movement of holes in the valence band constitutes the main current flow in a P-type semiconductor.

Summary of P-Type and N-Type Semiconductors

Feature

N-Type Semiconductor

P-Type Semiconductor

Impurity added

Pentavalent impurity

Trivalent impurity

Examples of impurities

Phosphorus, arsenic, antimony

Boron, gallium, indium

Valence electrons of impurity

Five

Three

Main charge carriers

Free electrons

Holes

Majority carriers

Electrons

Holes

Minority carriers

Holes

Electrons

Main conduction mechanism

Movement of free electrons through the conduction band

Apparent movement of holes due to successive electron movement in the valence band

Direction of majority carrier movement

Electrons move towards the positive terminal

Holes move towards the negative terminal

Q5 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram.

Appeared In: Jan 2024
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Derivation of line and phase relations in star and delta:

Star connection:

  • The three phase windings have one end of each connected to a common neutral point; the other ends form the three line terminals.
  • Line current = phase current: IL = Iph (the same current flows through the winding and the line).
  • Line voltage: the line voltage is the phasor difference of two phase voltages, which are 120 degrees apart. By phasor addition, VL = root 3 x Vph.
  • Vector diagram: three phase voltages VRN, VYN, VBN at 120 degrees; the line voltage VRY is the phasor sum of VRN and (-VYN), equal to root 3 Vph and leading the phase voltage by 30 degrees.

Delta connection:

  • The three windings are connected end to end to form a closed loop, the junctions forming the three line terminals.
  • Line voltage = phase voltage: VL = Vph (each winding is directly across two lines).
  • Line current: the line current is the phasor difference of two phase currents, giving IL = root 3 x Iph.
  • Vector diagram: three phase currents at 120 degrees; the line current is root 3 times the phase current and lags the phase current by 30 degrees.
  • Power in both cases: P = root 3 x VL x IL x cos phi.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns (6)

(b) A 230 V d.c. Shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 and shunt field resistance is 230. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) The star-connected rotor of an induction motor has a standstill resistance of 4.5 ohms/phase and a resistance of 0.5 ohms/phase. The motor has an Induced emf of 50V between the slip-rings at stand-still on open circuit when connected to its normal supply voltage. Find the current in each phase and the power factor at start when the slip-ring is short-circuited (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain the purpose of interpoles and state their magnetic polarity relative to the main poles of both generators and motors. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20kW. The various resistances are as follows; armature (Including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series field 0.025 ohm, interlope field 0.028 ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115 ohm. The iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motor of the three phases: A.C. induction. In respect of the following;

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Torque characteristic

(c) Speed variation. (16)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships: (16)

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on A.C. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems:

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting current (16)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable Insulation in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies for these problems.

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables (16)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an induction motor? (4)

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an induction motor in installed condition? (3)

(c) What is the purpose of 'fuse back up protection' provided to an induction motor? (3)

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque? (3)

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum running torque in an induction motor? (3)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 is to supply power to 1000 load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)

(i) peak load current

(ii) DC load current

(iii) AC load current

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a D.C. generator. (6)

(b) A D.C. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 . The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate (10)

(i) The speed

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail. (6)

(b) Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 and shunt field resistance is 230 Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started? (6)

(b) A 500V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46kW and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8 . If the iron and friction losses are 500W and excitation losses are 800W, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxiliary machineries on board vessels. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:

  • Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
  • Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
  • Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
  • Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
  • Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:

  • A VFD consists of three main stages:
  • Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
  • D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
  • Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
  • The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
  • Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
  • Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and de-merits. Describe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc. (16)

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts. Explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.

In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q4 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 4x

With reference to alkaline batteries used on board ship.

(a) Describe the operation of a battery cell and state the material used. (6)

(b) Describe how the cells are mounted to form a battery. (5)

(c) State the advantages and disadvantages compared with lead-acid batteries. (5)

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The common form of alkaline cell is Nickel cadmium type.

In this type of battery,

  • Cathode: The positive electrode is made up of nickel oxyhydroxide (NiOOH)
  • Anode: Negative electrode is made of cadmium (CD)
  • Electrolyte: Potassium hydroxide (KOH)
  • Separators: Made of rubber Housing made of strong plastic.

A series of alternating positive and negative plates are fully immersed in the electrolyte, separators are inserted between the interleaving plates to prevent contact/ internal short-circuiting. A non-return pressure relief valve is fitted in the housing to release the gases, which evolve especially during the period of overcharge. Relief valves are non-return type to prevent ‘poisoning’ of the electrolyte from the atmosphere.

Discharge: On discharge, nickel hydroxide losses oxygen and is reduced to a lower form, while the cadmium in the negative plates is oxidised to cadmium oxide.

Charging: On charging, the reverse of discharge occurs, the material at the positive terminal is being oxidised to nickel hydroxide and the material at the negative terminal is being reduced to cadmium.

Part (c)

The advantages of alkaline cell compared with a lead acid cell are

  • Longer life span
  • Better charge retention
  • Better operability at higher temperatures
  • Lightweight
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and dis-advantages. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Soft Starter

Advantages

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, thereby reducing starting current, avoiding the high current shock associated with direct starting, and minimizing voltage dips on the power system.
  • It provides smooth acceleration of the motor and reduces mechanical stress on shafts, couplings, gears, belts, and other connected equipment, thereby extending the service life of the motor and machinery.
  • It increases motor life by reducing both thermal stress and mechanical stress during starting.
  • It eliminates switching transients that occur in conventional starters such as star-delta starters.
  • It offers adjustable starting characteristics, including current limit, ramp time, and initial voltage.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with a frequency converter (VFD), the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.
  • It is suitable for applications such as pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors, marine machinery, and other motor-driven equipment.

Disadvantages

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control various motor parameters during starting like a frequency converter (VFD).
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve operating efficiency during normal running conditions.
  • It has a higher cost than DOL and star-delta starters.
  • It produces harmonics in the supply due to phase-angle control.
  • It operates with a poor power factor during starting.
  • SCRs generate heat and therefore require suitable cooling arrangements.
  • It provides reduced starting torque, which may be unsuitable for heavy-load starting applications.
  • It requires more complex control circuitry than conventional motor starters.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) What are factors on which the speed of a motor depends? Discuss them for series and shunt motors. (6)

(b) Three equal resistors are connected to a three-phase system, If one resistor is removed find the reduction in load if they are connected in (a) Star, (b) Delta. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors on which the speed of a motor depends, for series and shunt motors:

  • The speed of a d.c. motor is given by N = (V - Ia Ra)/(k phi), so it depends on the applied voltage V, the armature current Ia, the armature resistance Ra, and the field flux phi.
  • Shunt motor: the field flux is nearly constant (the field is connected across the supply). The speed falls only slightly as the load (armature current) increases, because the armature resistance drop (Ia Ra) increases. The shunt motor has a nearly constant speed characteristic.
  • Series motor: the field winding is in series with the armature, so the flux is proportional to the armature current (until saturation). As the load increases, the flux increases, so the speed falls sharply. The series motor has a falling speed characteristic and must never be run without load (it would overspeed). Its speed depends strongly on the load.
  • The speed can also be varied by changing the applied voltage (armature voltage control) or the field flux (field weakening).
Part (b)

Three equal resistors on a three-phase system, one removed:

Let each resistor be R and the line voltage be V.

(i) Star:

  • Three resistors in star: each phase voltage = V/root 3. Power per resistor = (V/root3)^2/R = V^2/(3R). Total P3 = 3 x V^2/(3R) = V^2/R.
  • Two resistors remaining: P2 = 2 x V^2/(3R).
  • Reduction = V^2/R - 2V^2/(3R) = V^2/(3R). Fractional reduction = 1/3 = 33.3%.

(ii) Delta:

  • Three resistors in delta: each phase voltage = V. Power per resistor = V^2/R. Total P3 = 3V^2/R.
  • Two resistors remaining: P2 = 2V^2/R.
  • Reduction = 3V^2/R - 2V^2/R = V^2/R. Fractional reduction = 1/3 = 33.3%.

So in both cases the load is reduced by one third (33.3%).

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Derive an expression for the e.m.f induced in an a.c. generator. (6)

(b) A 220 V, d.c. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 percent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Derivation of the e.m.f. induced in an a.c. generator:

  • Consider a coil of N turns rotating in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B. The flux linking the coil is phi = B A cos(wt), where A is the coil area and w the angular velocity.
  • By Faraday's law, the induced e.m.f. is e = -N d(phi)/dt = -N d(B A cos wt)/dt = N B A w sin(wt) = Em sin(wt).
  • The maximum e.m.f. Em = N B A w = N phi_m w, where phi_m = B A is the maximum flux linking the coil.
  • For a machine with Z conductors, P poles, flux per pole phi, speed N rev/min, the generated e.m.f. is:

E = (P x phi x Z x N)/(60 x A) volts, where A is the number of parallel paths (A = 2 for wave winding, A = P for lap winding).

  • The r.m.s. value per phase for a distributed winding is E = 4.44 f phi T k_w, where T is the turns per phase, f the frequency, and k_w the winding factor.
Part (b)

220 V d.c. shunt motor, armature resistance 0.5 ohm, armature current 40 A on full load. Reduction in flux for 50% reduction in speed, torque constant.

  • Back e.m.f. E1 = V - Ia Ra = 220 - 40 x 0.5 = 220 - 20 = 200 V.
  • Speed proportional to E/phi. For 50% speed reduction, N2 = 0.5 N1, so E2/phi2 = 0.5 E1/phi1, i.e. E2 = 100 (phi2/phi1).
  • Torque constant: phi1 Ia1 = phi2 Ia2, so Ia2 = 40 (phi1/phi2).
  • E2 = V - Ia2 Ra = 220 - 0.5 x 40 (phi1/phi2) = 220 - 20 (phi1/phi2).
  • Equating: 100 (phi2/phi1) = 220 - 20 (phi1/phi2). Let r = phi2/phi1.

100 r = 220 - 20/r -> 5 r^2 - 11 r + 1 = 0.

  • r = [11 +/- sqrt(101)]/10 = [11 +/- 10.05]/10. Valid root r = 0.095.
  • So phi2 = 0.095 phi1, i.e. flux reduced to about 9.5% of original. Percentage reduction = 90.5%.
  • New armature current Ia2 = 40/0.095 = 421 A.

So the flux must be reduced by about 90.5% for a 50% speed reduction at constant torque.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) How do the leakage fluxes effect the operation of a transformer? How are they minimized? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kw at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The KW load on A is 150 KW and the KVAr load on B is 150 kVA (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the KWAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine. (10)

Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Effect of leakage fluxes on the operation of a transformer, and how they are minimised:

  • Leakage flux is the flux that links only one winding (primary or secondary) and not the other. It does not contribute to the transfer of energy but produces a leakage reactance in each winding.
  • Effects: the leakage reactance causes a voltage drop in the transformer, so the secondary voltage falls with load (voltage regulation). It also limits the short-circuit current (which is beneficial for protection) and causes a phase shift between the primary and secondary voltages. Excessive leakage flux increases the reactance and worsens the voltage regulation.
  • Minimisation: leakage flux is reduced by interleaving the primary and secondary windings (placing them close together, e.g. concentric or sandwich windings), by using a low-reluctance magnetic path, and by proper winding arrangement. The leakage reactance is designed to give the required short-circuit current limiting while keeping the voltage regulation acceptable.
Part (b)

440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging supplied by two alternators A and B. kW on A = 150 kW, kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).

  • Total kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current: I = S/(root 3 x 440). I_A = 212100/762.1 = 278.3 A. I_B = 291500/762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging (278 A); B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging (382 A).

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) What is the operational impedance of an R.C. Circuit? Describe its usefulness. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main, if the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest?

Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Operational impedance of an R.C. circuit and its usefulness:

  • The operational impedance of an R.C. circuit is the total opposition to current, combining the resistance R and the capacitive reactance XC = 1/(2 pi f C). For a series R-C circuit, Z = R - j XC, with magnitude |Z| = sqrt(R^2 + XC^2) and phase angle phi = atan(XC/R) (current leading voltage).
  • Usefulness: it determines the current and phase angle in the circuit for a given voltage and frequency, and hence the power (P = V I cos phi). It is used to design filters, timing circuits, coupling circuits, and to analyse the behaviour of circuits containing capacitors. The impedance shows how the circuit responds to frequency (a capacitor blocks d.c. and passes high frequencies).
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 0.06 ohm; B-C = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing) = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current from A towards B, y = current from A the other way to C. x + y = 123 A.
  • Current in A-B = x; in B-C = x - 45; in short path A-C = y.
  • Loop equation: 0.06 x + 0.085(x - 45) = 0.08 y.

0.145 x - 3.825 = 0.08(123 - x) -> 0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • Voltage at B: 220 - 0.06 x 60.73 = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: 220 - 0.08 x 62.27 = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • The lowest voltage is at C: 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V.

Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators (4)

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly synchronized (4)

(c) Explain how the damage referred in (b) can be avoided / reduced (4)

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel the consequence of: (4)

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

In the event of a failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, an emergency source of power must be available. State the circuits which must be fed from such a source and discuss the reasons governing the selection of such circuits. (16)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

In the event of a failure of the main electrical power supply on a ship, certain circuits must be fed from the emergency source of power to ensure the safety and operational capability of critical systems. These circuits are essential for maintaining the functionality of key equipment and systems that are essential for the safety of the vessel and its crew. The selection of these circuits is based on several factors aimed at prioritising important functions and ensuring the vessel's ability to respond to emergencies effectively.

  1. Steering Gear Motor: The steering gear motor is essential for controlling the direction of the vessel, ensuring manoeuvrability and avoiding collisions, especially in emergency situations.
  2. Emergency Fire Pump: The emergency fire pump is vital for supplying water to firefighting systems in case of fire onboard, helping to contain and extinguish fires to prevent them from spreading.
  3. Emergency Air Compressor: The emergency air compressor provides compressed air for starting from a dead ship or if all the air from the main air bottle is lost.
  4. Breathing air compressor: for filling SCBA bottles that can be used during fire fighting and entry into enclosed spaces.
  5. Sprinkler/Hi-fog Pump: These pumps are responsible for spraying water for fire suppression to control and extinguish fires in different areas of the vessel.
  6. Fire Detectors: Fire detection systems continuously monitor various areas of the ship for signs of fire or smoke, providing early warning to enable prompt response and evacuation if necessary.
  7. Navigation Equipment: Navigation equipment, including radar, GPS, and gyrocompass systems, is essential for maintaining situational awareness, determining the vessel's position, and navigating safely, especially in adverse weather conditions or restricted visibility.
  8. Communication Equipment: Communication systems, such as radios, satellite communication terminals, and distress alert systems, enable the crew to communicate with shore authorities, other vessels, and emergency responders in case of distress or emergencies.
  9. Watertight Doors: Watertight doors are important in maintaining the vessel's watertight integrity and preventing the ingress of water in case of flooding or damage to the hull.
  10. Lifeboat Davits: Lifeboat davits are used for launching lifeboats and rescue boat, providing a means of evacuation for the crew and passengers in emergencies such as abandon ship.
  11. CO2 Room Exhaust Fan: The CO2 room exhaust fan is essential for ventilating the spaces where carbon dioxide (CO2) fire suppression systems are installed, ensuring that the room is safe to enter.
  12. Engine Room Vent Fan: One of the Engine room blower power is supplied from the Emergency generator, which helps in air supply to E/R and provides safe entry to the Engine room.
  13. E/R Pumps and Systems for First Start from 'Dead Ship': These pumps and systems are necessary for restarting the required pumps and systems in the engine room, enabling the vessel to restore power and propulsion from a state of complete power loss ('Dead Ship').
  14. Emergency Lights: Emergency lights are provided in the Engine room, accommodation, upper deck, escape routes, stairwells, and muster stations, ensuring visibility during power outages or emergencies.
  15. Battery Chargers: Battery chargers maintain the charge of essential batteries, including those for emergency lighting, communication equipment, and control systems, ensuring their readiness for use in emergencies.
  16. E/R Alarm System: The engine room alarm system monitors various parameters and conditions in the engine room, providing early warning of abnormalities, malfunctions, or hazards that could jeopardise the safety and operation of the vessel.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

With reference to squirrel cage, induction, electric motors.

(a) Describe the construction of such a motor. (6)

(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor (6)

(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load perormance of an induction motor. (4)

Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor

A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.

Main Components

1. Stator (Stationary Part)

  • Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
  • The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
  • When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).

2. Rotor (Rotating Part)

  • Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
  • These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
  • There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.

3. Air Gap

  • A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
  • Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.

4. Shaft and Bearings

  • The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
  • The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.

5. End Shields and Cooling System

  • End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
  • An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.

Characteristics

  • Simple and rugged construction.
  • Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
  • Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)

(b) Describe how speed changes and brakine are achieved. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded (8)

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed. (8)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) A series circuit having resistance, inductance and capacitance is to be operated on a constant voltage supply of available frequency. Indicate graphically how change takes place in the current and voltage in resistance, inductance and capacitance, and also capacitive reactance and inductive reactance (6)

(b) A resistance of 130Ω and a capacitor of 30µF are connected in parallel across a 230Volt, 50Hz supply. Find the current in each component, total current, phase angle and the power consumed (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Consider a R, L, C series circuit as shown.

$$V\:is\:the\:applied\:constant\:voltage$$

$$I\:is\:the\:current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$X_{L}=inductive\:reactance$$

$$X_{C}=Capacitive\:reactance$$

$$I=\frac{V}{Z}=\frac{V}{\sqrt{R^2+\left(X_{L}-X_{c}\right)^2}}$$

$$Power\:factor\:=\:\cos\phi=\frac{R}{Z}=\frac{R}{\sqrt{R^2}+\left(X_{L}-X_{C}\right)^2}$$

Case (i):

$$R=0;\:X_{C}>X_{L}$$

$$then\:I\:leads\:V\:by\:90^{o}$$

Case (ii):

$$R=0;\:X_{L}>X_{C}$$

$$then\:V\:leads\:I\:by\:90^{o}$$

For Case (i) and (ii):

Case (iii):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{L}>X_{C}$$

$$then\:I\:lags\:V\:by\:0\:to\:90^{o}$$

Case (iv):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{C}=X_{L}$$

$$then\:I\:leads\:V\:by\:o\:to\:90^{o}$$

Case (v):

$$R\:not\:equal\:to\:zero;\:X_{L}=X_{C}$$

$$then\:Z=R$$

$$I\:is\:maximum\:and\:in\:phase\:with\:V$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Explain the working principle of a three-phase induction motor. What are the various types of rotors?

(6)

(b) An 18.65 KW, 6-pole, 50 Hz, 3-ϕ slip-ring induction motor runs at 960 rpm on full load with a rotor current per phase of 35 A. Allowing 1 KW for mechanical losses, find the resistance/phase of 3-phase rotor winding. (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A three-phase induction motor operates on the principle of electromagnetic induction. A rotating magnetic field is created in the stator (stationary part) by supplying three-phase AC power to its windings. This rotating field induces currents in the rotor (rotating part), which in turn creates its own magnetic field. The interaction between the stator's rotating magnetic field and the rotor's magnetic field produces a torque that causes the rotor to rotate. The rotor speed is slightly less than the speed of the rotating magnetic field, a difference known as slip. The slip is necessary to induce the currents in the rotor that produce the torque.

Types of Rotors in Three-Phase Induction Motors:

Squirrel-Cage Rotor:

  • Consists of laminated steel sheets with parallel slots carrying heavy copper or aluminum bars. The ends of these bars are short-circuited by end rings, forming a closed loop resembling a squirrel cage.
  • The simplicity and ruggedness of the squirrel-cage rotor make it the most commonly used type in induction motors.

Wound Rotor (Slip-Ring Rotor):

  • Features a laminated iron core with three-phase windings placed in the slots. These windings are connected to external slip rings via brushes, allowing for external connections.
  • The wound rotor design allows for external resistances to be added to the rotor circuit, enabling control over the motor's starting torque and speed. This feature is particularly useful in applications requiring precise speed control and higher starting torque.
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) (i) What is direct connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator?. (3)

(b) A twelve pole three-phase, delta-connected alternator runs at 500 rev/min and supplies a balanced star connected load. Each phase of the load is a coil of resistance 35 ohm and inductive reactance 25 ohm. The line terminal voltage of the alternator is 440V. Determine (10)

(i) Frequency of supply.

(ii) Current in each coil,

(iii) Current in each phase of the alternator, whota power supplied to me load.

Appeared In: Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Sketch a graph of starting current and torque against speed of rotation for a single cage motor (6)

(b) A 230V motor, which normally develops 10kW at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85 percent, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 ohm and the shunt feild resistance is 220 ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A, by means of the shunt regulator, what output in kW could be expected as a generator, if The armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Graph of starting current and torque against speed for a single-cage induction motor:

  • Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
  • Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
  • The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
Part (b)

230 V motor, 10 kW at 1000 rev/min, efficiency 85%, used as a generator:

  • As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
  • Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
  • Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
  • Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
  • As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
  • E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
  • Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
  • Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
  • Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
  • Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.

So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse (6)

(b) A coil having resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection to alternators intended for operation.

(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip.

(ii) Briefly explain the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessity of Reverse Power Protection for Alternators in Parallel Operation:

Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.

Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.

To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.

Part (b)

(i) Sketch of reverse power trip:

(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation

The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.

During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.

A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe a brushless alternator with a.c. exciter and static A.V.R.

(b) State the output voltage characteristics for this type of machine.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Nov 2024 Oct 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the exiter rotor windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly and fed to the main rotor. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q3 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With the aid of sketch describe the main features and principle of operation of a D.C. moving coil meter. If such a meter is designed to give full scale deflection with 150 m, State how it may be adapted:

(i) As an ammeter to read up to 150

(ii) As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V

No calculations are required

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

D.C. moving coil meter - main features and principle of operation:

  • Construction: a permanent magnet with soft-iron pole pieces and a cylindrical soft-iron core creates a uniform radial magnetic field in the air gap. A rectangular coil of fine wire is wound on a light aluminium former and pivoted so it can rotate in the air gap. The coil is mounted on jewel bearings. A hairspring provides the controlling (restoring) torque and also carries the current to the coil. A pointer attached to the coil moves over a calibrated scale. A counterweight balances the pointer.
  • Principle: when current flows through the coil, the coil sides in the magnetic field experience a force (F = B I l) producing a deflecting torque proportional to the current (T = B A N I, where A is the coil area, N the number of turns). This torque is opposed by the spring torque (proportional to the angle of deflection). At equilibrium the deflection is proportional to the current, giving a linear (uniform) scale. The damping is provided by eddy currents induced in the aluminium former.
  • The meter measures d.c. only (the direction of deflection depends on current direction). It is accurate and sensitive.

Adaptation of a meter giving full-scale deflection with 150 mA (the question states 150 m, i.e. 150 mA):

Part (a)

As an ammeter to read up to 150 A:

  • A low-resistance shunt is connected in parallel with the meter coil. The shunt carries the bulk of the current (150 A - 150 mA), while only 150 mA passes through the meter. The shunt resistance is chosen so that 150 mA flows through the meter when 150 A flows in the circuit. The shunt is made of a material with a low temperature coefficient (e.g. manganin) and is connected with short, heavy leads. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 A.
Part (b)

As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V:

  • A high resistance (multiplier) is connected in series with the meter coil. The series resistance is chosen so that the full-scale current of 150 mA flows when 150 V is applied across the combination. The meter then reads the voltage. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 V.

(No calculations required.)

Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

with reference to U.M.S, operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces.

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q5 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:

(a) State why this facility is required.

(b) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an Instantaneous protection against short circuit

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Why Preferential tripping is required:

  • In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
  • The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
  • For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
  • By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
Part (b)

Preferential trips

operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significanes of the root-mean-square value of an alternating curent or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.18 power factor is suppled by two alternators in parallel. One-alternator supplies 6000KW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternate and the power factor.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively and the curresponding leakage reactances are 1.1Ω and 0.035Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200V. Calculate (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of 0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm,

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an AC generator.

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one AC generator suddenly fail when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are usually provided for such events

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q2 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance

(b) Cascade system

(c) Pole-changing

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Three main methods of speed regulation for three-phase induction motors used on tankers are rotor resistance, cascade system, and pole-changing.

Each method operates on a different principle and is suited to particular shipboard applications depending on the load, torque, and speed control requirements.

(a) Rotor Resistance Method

Principle:

  • This method is applicable only to slip-ring (wound-rotor) induction motors.
  • Additional resistance is inserted into the rotor circuit through the slip rings.
  • By increasing the rotor resistance, the slip increases, resulting in a reduction in motor speed.

Speed can be controlled smoothly while maintaining high starting torque.

Application & Advantage:

  • Suitable for applications requiring high starting torque and variable speed under load.
  • Provides fine speed control and is simple and cost-effective, though it suffers from power loss in the external resistors and reduced efficiency.

Examples:

  • Cargo winches
  • Crane motors
  • Grain elevators
  • Cargo and ballast pumps (where gradual speed control is required)

(b) Cascade System (Concatenation)

Principle:

  • Two slip-ring induction motors are mechanically coupled.
  • The rotor circuit of the first motor is electrically connected to the stator circuit of the second motor.
  • Depending on the polarity and connection, this system provides up to four discrete speeds.
  • The combined system allows the supply frequency to be divided between the two motors, producing multiple synchronous speeds.

Application & Advantage:

  • Useful where two or more fixed speeds are required without complex circuitry.
  • Offers higher torque at lower speeds and smooth transition between speed stages.
  • Though more complex mechanically, it allows efficient control in heavy-duty machinery requiring multiple fixed speeds.

Examples:

  • Multi-stage centrifugal pumps
  • Compressors
  • Large ventilation fans and machinery requiring distinct speed stages on tankers

(c) Pole-Changing Method

Principle:

  • In this method, the number of poles in the stator winding is altered by reconfiguring the connections.
  • As synchronous speed depends on the number of poles, changing the pole number changes the speed.

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

  • This method is used mainly with squirrel-cage induction motors.

Application & Advantage:

  • Provides two or more discrete fixed speeds (commonly a two-speed arrangement).
  • Mechanically simple, reliable, and requires no external resistors or complex controls.
  • Efficient and well-suited where two-speed operation (high/low) is sufficient for operational flexibility.

Examples:

  • Ballast pumps (high speed for filling, low speed for stripping)
  • Cargo oil pumps
  • Engine room and cargo ventilation fans

Summary:

Method

Motor Type

Speed Control Type

Efficiency

Typical Applications

Rotor Resistance

Slip-ring

Continuous

Low (due to power loss in resistors)

Winches, cranes, cargo pumps

Cascade System

Slip-ring (two motors)

Step-wise (2–4 speeds)

Moderate

Multi-stage pumps, compressors

Pole-Changing

Squirrel-cage

Fixed steps (2 speeds)

High

Ballast pumps, fans, ventilation systems

Q3 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests.

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Part (b)

Equivalent Resistance:

  • Equivalent resistance (Req) is the total resistance of the transformer windings referred to either the primary or secondary side.
  • It represents the combined resistance of the primary and secondary windings, taking into account the turns ratio of the transformer.
  • Equivalent resistance is used in calculations related to voltage drop, power loss, and efficiency of the transformer.
  • It is determined from the short circuit test.

In simpler terms: Imagine the transformer windings as a single resistor. The equivalent resistance is the value of that single resistor that would have the same effect on the circuit as the actual windings.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3-phase AC cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what safety defects may be revealed

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Describe the effect of the following loads on power factor. (6)

(i) Induction motors

(ii) Transformers

(iii) Partly loaded motors

(iv) Cage type motors

(b) In a 50-kVA, star-connected, 440V, 3-phase, 50Hz alternator, the effective armature resistance is 0.25 ohm per phase. The synchronous reactance is 3.2 ohm per phase and leakage reactance is 0.5 ohm per phase. Determine at rated load and utility power factor (10)

(i) Internal EMF

(ii) No-load EMF E0

(iii) Percentage regulation on full-load

(iv) Value on synchronous reactance which replaces armature reaction

Appeared In: Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Effect of power factor on:

(i) Induction motors: Induction motors typically have a lagging power factor, meaning the current lags behind the voltage. This is because of the inductive nature of their windings. The power factor is generally between 0.7 and 0.9, and it varies depending on the motor's load and design. A fully loaded motor will usually have a higher power factor than a lightly loaded one.

(ii) Transformers: Ideally, transformers should have a unity power factor (1.0), meaning the current and voltage are in phase. However, in reality, they exhibit a slightly lagging power factor due to the core losses (hysteresis and eddy currents) and magnetizing current. These losses are relatively small, resulting in a power factor close to unity.

(iii) Partly loaded motors: Partly loaded induction motors operate at a lower power factor than fully loaded ones. This is because the magnetizing current (which is reactive and doesn't contribute to real power) forms a larger proportion of the total current when the motor is lightly loaded. The power factor decreases as the load decreases.

(iv) Cage type motors: Cage type induction motors (squirrel-cage motors) are a common type of induction motor. Their power factor characteristics are similar to those of induction motors in general—a lagging power factor that varies with the load, typically lower at lighter loads. They are known for their simplicity, robustness, and relatively low cost. However, their starting torque is typically lower compared to other types of motors, which may limit their use in certain applications.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram, illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor (6)

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0A.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively and the curresponding leakage reactances are 1.1Ω and 0.035Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200V. Calculate (10)

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of 0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain what is meant by and the significance of any four of the following terms (16)

(a) Voltage stabilization

(b) Filter choke

(c) Impedance

(d) Rectification

(e) Grid bias voltage

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation:

(i) Shunt motor

(ii) Series motor

(iii) Cumulative compound motor

Explain (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes a armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7 ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final steady-state conditons (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.

(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a).

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.

The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC. Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency. Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.

The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.

Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.

The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.

A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.

The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
  • Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
  • Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
  • Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
  • Increased safety for ship and crew
  • Low noise power generation

Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x

with reference to testing High Voltage equipment:

(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential

(b) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down

(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making

reference to personnel safety

(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems:

(i) Earthed

(ii) Insulated

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (d)

(i) Earthed Neutral System:

  • In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
  • Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
  • A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
  • This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
  • The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.

(ii) Insulated Neutral System:

  • An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
  • No earth leakage condition:
    • No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
    • Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
    • The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
  • Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
    • A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
    • Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
    • The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
    • This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
    • The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain what is meant by, and the significance of, four of the following terms.

(a) Voltage stabilization

(b) Filter choke

(c) Impedance

(d) Rectification

(e) Grid bias voltage.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

Explain the meaning of "p" and "n" type semi-conductor materials and give a brief description of the mechanism by which current passes through them.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

P-Type and N-Type Semiconductor Materials and the Mechanism of Current Conduction

A semiconductor is a material whose electrical conductivity lies between that of a conductor and an insulator. Pure semiconductor materials such as silicon (Si) and germanium (Ge) have limited conductivity. Their conductivity can be greatly increased and controlled by adding a small amount of a suitable impurity. This process is known as doping.

Depending on the type of impurity added, a semiconductor becomes either an N-type or a P-type semiconductor.

1. N-Type Semiconductor

An N-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a pentavalent impurity to a pure semiconductor such as silicon or germanium. Pentavalent impurities have five valence electrons. Examples include phosphorus, arsenic and antimony.

The pure semiconductor atom forms four covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms. When a pentavalent impurity atom replaces one of these atoms:

  • Four of its five valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • The fifth electron is weakly bound and becomes a free electron.
  • This free electron can move through the crystal structure when an electric field is applied.

Therefore, an N-type semiconductor has an excess of free electrons.

  • Majority charge carriers: Free electrons.
  • Minority charge carriers: Holes.

The letter "N" denotes that the majority charge carriers are negative electrons. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in an N-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across an N-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The free electrons gain energy from the electric field and drift through the crystal towards the positive terminal (anode). Their movement through the conduction band constitutes the main mechanism of current conduction.

Thus:

Applied voltage → Electric field → Movement of free electrons → Current flow

Although conventional current is considered to flow from positive to negative, the actual electrons move in the opposite direction, from the negative terminal towards the positive terminal.

2. P-Type Semiconductor

A P-type semiconductor is formed by adding a small quantity of a trivalent impurity to a pure semiconductor. Trivalent impurities have three valence electrons. Examples include boron, gallium and indium.

When a trivalent impurity atom is introduced into the semiconductor crystal:

  • Its three valence electrons form covalent bonds with neighbouring atoms.
  • One bond remains incomplete because there is a shortage of one electron.
  • This missing electron position is called a hole.

A hole behaves as a positive charge carrier because it represents a deficiency of an electron.

Therefore, a P-type semiconductor has an excess of holes.

  • Majority charge carriers: Holes.
  • Minority charge carriers: Free electrons.

The letter "P" denotes that the majority charge carriers are effectively positive holes. However, the semiconductor material as a whole remains electrically neutral.

Current Conduction in a P-Type Semiconductor

When a voltage is applied across a P-type semiconductor, an electric field is established.

The holes act as the main charge carriers. However, the actual physical movement is still carried out by electrons. An electron from a neighbouring covalent bond moves to fill a nearby hole. This movement leaves a new hole at the electron's original position.

The process continues as follows:

Electron fills a hole → A new hole is created → Another electron fills the new hole → Progressive movement of holes

As a result of this continuous electron movement, the holes appear to move through the material towards the negative terminal (cathode). The resulting progressive movement of holes in the valence band constitutes the main current flow in a P-type semiconductor.

Summary of P-Type and N-Type Semiconductors

Feature

N-Type Semiconductor

P-Type Semiconductor

Impurity added

Pentavalent impurity

Trivalent impurity

Examples of impurities

Phosphorus, arsenic, antimony

Boron, gallium, indium

Valence electrons of impurity

Five

Three

Main charge carriers

Free electrons

Holes

Majority carriers

Electrons

Holes

Minority carriers

Holes

Electrons

Main conduction mechanism

Movement of free electrons through the conduction band

Apparent movement of holes due to successive electron movement in the valence band

Direction of majority carrier movement

Electrons move towards the positive terminal

Holes move towards the negative terminal

Q5 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems:

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram. (6)

(b) Three impedances Z = 5 + j4 are connected in the form of a delta to the three loads of a balanced 3-phase circuit. The line voltage is 120 volts. Find (10)

(i) The phase current

(ii) Power factor

(iii) The volt-ampere in the circuit.

Appeared In: Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(b) Given:

$$\operatorname{Impedance}\:\left(Z\right)=5+j4\:=\:\sqrt{5^2+4^2}$$

$$Voltage\left(V\right)=120V$$

Circuit is connected in Delta, so voltage is same.

$$V_{L}=V_{phase}$$

(i) The phase current:

$$I_{L}=\sqrt3\times I_{ph}$$

$$V=IR$$

$$I_{ph}=\frac{V_{L}}{Z}$$

$$I_{ph}=\frac{120}{\sqrt{5^2}+4^2}$$

$$I_{ph}=\frac{120}{6.4}$$

$$I_{ph}=18.75A$$

(ii) Power factor:

$$\cos\phi=\frac{R}{Z}$$

$$\cos\phi=\frac{5}{6.4}$$

$$\cos\phi=0.78$$

(iii) The volt-ampere in the circuit:

$$=V_{ph}\times I_{ph}$$

$$=120\times18.75$$

$$=2250V$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) The star-connected rotor of an induction motor has a stand-still resistance of 4.5 ohms/phase and a resistance of 0.5 Ω/phase. The motor has an induced emf of 50 V between the slip-rings at stand-still on open circuit when connected to its normal supply voltage. Find the current in each phase and the power factor at start when the slip-rings are short-circulted. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain the purpose of interpoles and state their magnetic polarity relative to the main poles of both generators and motors. (6)

(b) A 200V, long-shunt compound-wound generator has a full-load output of 20KW. The various resistances are as follows: armature (including brush contact) 0.15 ohm, series fleld 0.025 ohm, interpole field 0.028 ohm, shunt field (including the field-regulator resistance) 115ohm. The Iron losses at full load are 780W, and the friction and windage losses 590W. Calculate the efficiency at full load. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (b)

Given:

$$Output=20000W$$

$$Iron\:loss=780W$$

$$Friction\:loss\:\left(mech\operatorname{loss}\right)=590W$$

$$R_{a}=0.15\Omega$$

$$R_{se}=0.025\Omega$$

$$R_{int}=0.028\Omega$$

$$R_{sh}=115\Omega$$

$$I_{sh}=\frac{V}{R_{sh}}=\frac{200}{115}$$

$$I_{sh}=1.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R$$

$$C_{S}=1.74^2\times115$$

$$C_{S}=348W$$

$$Gen\:output\:=\:V\times I_{L}=20000W\:\left(given\right)$$

$$200\times I_{L}=20000$$

$$I_{L}=100A$$

$$I_{a}=I_{sh}+I_{L}$$

$$=1.74+100$$

$$I_{a}=101.74A$$

$$Copper\:loss\:in\:stator=I^2R=I_{a}^2\left(R_{se}+R_{a}+R_{int}\right)$$

$$C_{R}=101.74^2\times\left(0.025+0.15+0.028\right)$$

$$C_{R}=2101W$$

$$Total\:Copper\:loss=C_{S}+C_{R}$$

$$=348+2101$$

$$=2449W$$

$$\eta=\frac{Output}{Input}=\frac{Output}{Output+losses}$$

$$=\frac{20000}{20000+780+590+2449}$$

$$\eta=83.96\%$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transion from intal to final, Steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Deseribe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxilary machineries on board vessels.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:

  • Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
  • Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
  • Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
  • Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
  • Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:

  • A VFD consists of three main stages:
  • Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
  • D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
  • Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
  • The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
  • Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
  • Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x

Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.

(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.

(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Electric propulsion system:

Part (b)

Advantages of Electric propulsion system:

Economic Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
  • They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
  • The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
  • The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
  • The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.

Environmental Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.

Operational Convenience

  • These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
  • Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
  • They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
  • Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.

Flexibility

  • The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
  • The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
  • Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:

(a) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit.

(b) State why this protection is required.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.

Part (b)

Why Preferential tripping is required:

  • In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
  • The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
  • For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
  • By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)

(i) Peak load current,

(ii) DC load current.

(iii) AC load current.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.28. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate (10)

(i) The speed

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature.

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail. (6)

(b) Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 14 amperes. Neglect armature reaction. (10)

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started? (6)

(b) A 500 V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46 kw and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8 Ω. If the iron and friction losses are 500 w and excitation losses are 800 w, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to the provision of a shore electrical supply to a ship:

(a) Sketch an arrangement for taking A.C. shore supply and checks to be carried out prior taking shore connection (10)

(b) Describe the method of safely connecting the arrangement sketched in (a) to the shore supply. (6)

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Checks to be carried out prior to taking shore connection:

  • A visual inspection should be done to identify any visible damage to the shore power cable, such as cuts, fraying, or signs of overheating.
  • Measure the insulation resistance of the shore cable and the ship’s shore connection box to ensure proper insulation.
  • Verify the working condition of fuses by performing a continuity test.
  • Confirm the functionality of indication lamps for clear status monitoring.
  • Ensure that the shore supply circuit breaker is switched off before any connections are made.
  • Confirm that the emergency generator is set to manual mode to avoid unintentional operation during shore supply connection.
  • Inspect the connecting terminals on both the shore connection box and the cable lugs to ensure they are clean, secure, and free from corrosion.
Part (b)

Connecting the Shore Supply:

  • Turn off all non-essential equipment to minimize load requirements.
  • Keep standby diesel generators in manual mode to prevent automatic starting.
  • Announce a potential blackout to notify the crew and prepare them for any temporary power loss.
  • Keep a hand safety torch readily available to handle temporary darkness during the transition.
  • Shut off the ship's power and alternator.
  • Connections of shore cables are to be made only after shutting off the ship's power & alternator.
  • Connect the ship’s hull to the shore earth point to provide proper grounding and ensure safety from electrical faults.
  • Connect the shore supply cables to the circuit breaker and measure the voltage and frequency of the shore supply to confirm compatibility with the ship's electrical system.
  • Verify the phase sequence using the Phase Sequence indicator to avoid incorrect motor rotation or electrical malfunction.
  • Ensure that all lids and circuit breakers are switched off before finalizing connections.
  • Once all conditions are satisfied, switch on the shore supply circuit breaker.
  • Start one motor and confirm the correct direction of rotation to validate the phase sequence.
  • Begin connecting essential systems and equipment to the shore supply one at a time. Monitor the load to ensure it does not exceed the shore supply capacity.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc. (16)

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)

(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.

In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages. (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Soft Starter

Advantages

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, thereby reducing starting current, avoiding the high current shock associated with direct starting, and minimizing voltage dips on the power system.
  • It provides smooth acceleration of the motor and reduces mechanical stress on shafts, couplings, gears, belts, and other connected equipment, thereby extending the service life of the motor and machinery.
  • It increases motor life by reducing both thermal stress and mechanical stress during starting.
  • It eliminates switching transients that occur in conventional starters such as star-delta starters.
  • It offers adjustable starting characteristics, including current limit, ramp time, and initial voltage.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with a frequency converter (VFD), the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.
  • It is suitable for applications such as pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors, marine machinery, and other motor-driven equipment.

Disadvantages

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control various motor parameters during starting like a frequency converter (VFD).
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve operating efficiency during normal running conditions.
  • It has a higher cost than DOL and star-delta starters.
  • It produces harmonics in the supply due to phase-angle control.
  • It operates with a poor power factor during starting.
  • SCRs generate heat and therefore require suitable cooling arrangements.
  • It provides reduced starting torque, which may be unsuitable for heavy-load starting applications.
  • It requires more complex control circuitry than conventional motor starters.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain the potential hazards if liquid-cooled transformers are used. (6)

(b) What are the losses in transformers? Mention the various factors which affect these losses. In a 25 KVA, 3300/233 V, single phase transformer, the iron and full-load Cu. losses are respectively 350 and 400 w. Calculate the efficiency at half-full load 0.8 power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Potential hazards of using liquid-cooled transformers:

  • The heating of oil during transformer operation can lead to the generation of oil vapors, which are flammable and pose a significant fire risk if exposed to ignition sources.
  • The cooling oil can degrade due to continuous agitation. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil can degrade in marine environments due to continuous agitation and exposure to seawater. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil requires periodic replacement, necessitating transformer isolation. This may not always be feasible, causing operational disruptions.

(b) Losses in a Transformer

1. Core Loss or Iron Loss: Core loss occurs in the transformer's magnetic core and consists of eddy current loss and hysteresis loss.

  • Eddy Current Loss: When AC is supplied to the primary winding, it produces an alternating magnetizing flux in the transformer. While most of this flux links with the secondary winding to induce emf, some flux links with other conducting parts such as the steel core or transformer body. This induces small circulating currents in those parts, called eddy currents, which dissipate energy as heat.
  • Hysteresis Loss: This loss arises due to the repeated reversal of magnetization in the transformer core. It depends on:
    • Volume and grade of the iron used
    • Frequency of magnetic reversals
    • Magnitude of flux density

2. Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Copper loss occurs due to the ohmic resistance of the transformer windings. It can be expressed as:

  • Primary winding: ( I_1^2 R_1 )
  • Secondary winding: ( I_2^2 R_2 )

Where:

  • ( I_1 ) and ( I_2 ) are currents in the primary and secondary windings
  • ( R_1 ) and ( R_2 ) are resistances of the primary and secondary windings

Key points:

  • Copper loss is proportional to the square of the current.
  • Since current depends on the load, copper loss varies with load.

3. Stray Losses: Stray losses occur due to the leakage flux linking with metallic parts of the transformer.

Note: Stray losses are small compared to copper and iron losses and are often negligible in calculations.

4. Dielectric Loss: Dielectric loss is caused by the transformer oil, which serves as an insulating material. If the insulating oil deteriorates, it leads to energy loss and affects the efficiency of the transformer.

Part (b)

Given:

$$KVA \space = \space 25$$

$$\cos \phi \space = \space 0.8$$

$$W_{iron \space FL} \space = \space 350W \space = \space 0.35kW$$

$$W_{cu \space FL} \space = \space 400W \space = \space 0.4kW$$

$$3300/233 \space = \space step \space down \space transformer$$

To find half load efficiency η

$$Loading \space factor \space (x) \space = \space {{1} \over 2}$$

∴ Half load copper loss = $$x^2 \space W_{cu \space FL}$$

Iron losses remain same

$$= \space \left(1 \over 2 \right)^2 \times 0.4 \space = \space {{0.41} \over 4} \space = \space 0.1 kW$$

$$%η \space = \space {{x \space KVA \space \cos \phi} \over x \space KVA \cos \phi + W_{iron} + x^2 \space W_{cu}} \times 100$$

$$= \space {{(1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8} \over (1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8 + 0.35 + 0.1} \times 100$$

$$%η \space = \space 95.69%$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Describe how protection against short circuit is provided in a 3 phase induction motor circuit

(b) Explain how rotating magnetic field is produced in three phase winding with Three phase supply. A 4-pole, 3-phase induction motor operates from a supply whose frequency is 50 Hz. Calculate (10)

(i) Speed at which the magnetic field of the stator is rotating,

(ii) Speed of the rotor when the slip is 0.04

(iii) The frequency of the rotor current when the slip is 0.03.

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of short-circuit protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain the effect of making incorrect phase and starter connections. (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0. 7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Incorrect phase and starter connections in electric motors can cause:

Incorrect Phase Connections:

  • Reversing any two phases in a three-phase motor will reverse its rotation direction.
  • Incorrect phase connections can result in an unbalanced power supply, leading to uneven current distribution across the motor windings.
  • Motors may run noisily, vibrate excessively, or operate at reduced performance levels.

Incorrect Starter Connections:

  • Star-delta starters are commonly used to reduce starting current. Incorrect wiring can prevent the motor from transitioning from star to delta connection, or prevent motor from starting.
  • Incorrect starter connections can cause the motor to draw excessive current, leading to overheating.
  • Continuous operation under incorrect starter conditions can stress the motor components, leading to premature failure.
Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q2 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded;

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q3 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance

(b) Cascade system

(c) Pole-changing,

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Comparison of methods of speed regulation of three-phase induction motors used in tankers:

Part (a)

Rotor resistance (slip-ring motor):

  • Method: additional resistance is inserted in the rotor circuit of a slip-ring (wound rotor) induction motor. Increasing the rotor resistance increases the slip for a given torque, so the speed falls. The speed is varied by varying the rotor resistance.
  • Characteristics: gives speed control only below synchronous speed (from full speed down to standstill). The speed regulation is poor (speed varies with load). The efficiency is low because the slip power is dissipated as heat in the rotor resistance. The starting torque can be increased.
  • Advantages: simple, cheap, gives high starting torque and smooth acceleration.
  • Disadvantages: wasteful (heat loss), poor speed regulation, only stepwise control unless a liquid rheostat is used.
  • Example: cargo pump motors, winches, windlasses, and other deck machinery where high starting torque and some speed reduction are needed.
Part (b)

Cascade system:

  • Method: two induction motors are mechanically coupled, and the rotor of the first (main) motor is connected electrically to the stator of the second (auxiliary) motor. The slip power of the main motor is fed to the auxiliary motor, which adds to the mechanical output. By changing the number of poles of the auxiliary motor (or by using a Scherbius or Kramer arrangement), the speed of the combined set can be varied.
  • Characteristics: gives a limited number of discrete speeds (usually two or three), all below synchronous speed. The efficiency is better than rotor resistance because the slip power is usefully employed.
  • Advantages: better efficiency than rotor resistance, useful for large motors.
  • Disadvantages: complex, expensive, requires two machines, only a few fixed speeds.
  • Example: large cargo pump drives and other large constant-speed applications where a few discrete speeds are acceptable.
Part (c)

Pole-changing (consequent pole / Dahlander):

  • Method: the stator winding is reconnected to change the number of poles, giving two (or more) discrete synchronous speeds. The Dahlander connection gives a 2:1 speed ratio (e.g. 4-pole/8-pole). Speed = 120 f / P.
  • Characteristics: gives discrete speeds only (e.g. half and full speed), not continuous control. The efficiency is high at each speed because the motor runs at its rated slip. The torque can be maintained constant or the power constant depending on the connection.
  • Advantages: simple, robust, cheap, high efficiency at each speed, no extra losses.
  • Disadvantages: only a few fixed speeds, no continuous speed variation, the changeover requires a special starter.
  • Example: engine room fans, ventilation fans, ballast and bilge pumps, and other auxiliaries where two or three fixed speeds are sufficient.

Summary: rotor resistance gives smooth but inefficient low-speed control; cascade gives a few efficient speeds for large drives; pole-changing gives simple, efficient discrete speeds for fans and pumps.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation.

(a) Sketch a reverse power trip.

(b) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated.

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessity of Reverse Power Protection for Alternators in Parallel Operation:

Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.

Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.

To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.

Part (b)

(i) Sketch of reverse power trip:

(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation

The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.

During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.

A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.

Q5 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 4x

With reference to alkaline batteries used on board ship:

(a) Describe the operation of a battery cell and state the materials used;

(b) Describe how the cells are mounted to form a battery;

(e) State the advantages and disadvantages compared with lead-acid batteries.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The common form of alkaline cell is Nickel cadmium type.

In this type of battery,

  • Cathode: The positive electrode is made up of nickel oxyhydroxide (NiOOH)
  • Anode: Negative electrode is made of cadmium (CD)
  • Electrolyte: Potassium hydroxide (KOH)
  • Separators: Made of rubber Housing made of strong plastic.

A series of alternating positive and negative plates are fully immersed in the electrolyte, separators are inserted between the interleaving plates to prevent contact/ internal short-circuiting. A non-return pressure relief valve is fitted in the housing to release the gases, which evolve especially during the period of overcharge. Relief valves are non-return type to prevent ‘poisoning’ of the electrolyte from the atmosphere.

Discharge: On discharge, nickel hydroxide losses oxygen and is reduced to a lower form, while the cadmium in the negative plates is oxidised to cadmium oxide.

Charging: On charging, the reverse of discharge occurs, the material at the positive terminal is being oxidised to nickel hydroxide and the material at the negative terminal is being reduced to cadmium.

Part (c)

The advantages of alkaline cell compared with a lead acid cell are

  • Longer life span
  • Better charge retention
  • Better operability at higher temperatures
  • Lightweight
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an altenating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the KVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (6)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find: (10)

(i) The r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) The 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Briefly describe the maintenance routines carried out for emergency batteries onboard. (5)

(b) A power of 36 W is to be dissipated in a resister connected across the terminals of a battery, having emf of 20V and an internal resistance of 1Ω. Find (10)

(i) What values of resistance will satisfy this condition.

(ii) The terminal voltage of the battery for each of the resistances and

(iii) The total power expenditure in each case.

Appeared In: Dec 2020 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Maintenance routines for emergency batteries onboard:

  • Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion. Clean the battery and keep it dry. Grease terminals with petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
  • Check the electrolyte level. Add distilled water if it's low.
  • Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte using a hydrometer (this is only applicable to certain types of batteries, typically lead-acid).
  • Check the battery voltage to ensure it's within the acceptable range.
  • Newer maintenance-free batteries often have indicators to show battery condition (e.g., green for good, red for discharged).

In addition to these routine checks, maintaining a clean, dry, and well-ventilated battery room. Safety precautions such as wearing appropriate protective gear (gloves, eye protection) are required when handling batteries. Emergency response measures for acid spills should be in place.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectivenes of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase, what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors, of the three phase a.c. induction type, in respect of the following:

(a) Rotor construction (6)

(b) Torque characteristics (5)

(c) Speed variation. (5)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

What is meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.

In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation. (6)

(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip. (5)

(ii) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated. (5)

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Q4 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power

(a) Sketch a standby battery charging/discharging circuit. (8)

(b) Describe the circuit sketched, making special reference to how battery charge is maintained and how it operates upon loss of main power. (8)

Appeared In: Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
  • The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
  • When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
  • A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
  • ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
  • When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
  • Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
  • A test switch provides means for testing the battery.

Method of maintaining charge:

  • Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
  • Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.

To check operation at loss of main power: test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made

Duration: for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship

Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source. (6)

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied Simultaneously (5)

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested. (5)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q6 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm,

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain the potential hazards if liquid-cooled transformers are used onboard ships. (6)

(b) What are the losses in transformers? Mention the various factors which affect these losses. In a 25 KVA, 3300/233 V, single phase transformer, the iron and full-load Cu. losses are respectively 350 and 400 w. Calculate the efficiency at half-full load 0.8 power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Potential hazards of using liquid-cooled transformers:

  • The heating of oil during transformer operation can lead to the generation of oil vapors, which are flammable and pose a significant fire risk if exposed to ignition sources.
  • The cooling oil can degrade due to continuous agitation. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil can degrade in marine environments due to continuous agitation and exposure to seawater. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil requires periodic replacement, necessitating transformer isolation. This may not always be feasible, causing operational disruptions.

(b) Losses in a Transformer

1. Core Loss or Iron Loss: Core loss occurs in the transformer's magnetic core and consists of eddy current loss and hysteresis loss.

  • Eddy Current Loss: When AC is supplied to the primary winding, it produces an alternating magnetizing flux in the transformer. While most of this flux links with the secondary winding to induce emf, some flux links with other conducting parts such as the steel core or transformer body. This induces small circulating currents in those parts, called eddy currents, which dissipate energy as heat.
  • Hysteresis Loss: This loss arises due to the repeated reversal of magnetization in the transformer core. It depends on:
    • Volume and grade of the iron used
    • Frequency of magnetic reversals
    • Magnitude of flux density

2. Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Copper loss occurs due to the ohmic resistance of the transformer windings. It can be expressed as:

  • Primary winding: ( I_1^2 R_1 )
  • Secondary winding: ( I_2^2 R_2 )

Where:

  • ( I_1 ) and ( I_2 ) are currents in the primary and secondary windings
  • ( R_1 ) and ( R_2 ) are resistances of the primary and secondary windings

Key points:

  • Copper loss is proportional to the square of the current.
  • Since current depends on the load, copper loss varies with load.

3. Stray Losses: Stray losses occur due to the leakage flux linking with metallic parts of the transformer.

Note: Stray losses are small compared to copper and iron losses and are often negligible in calculations.

4. Dielectric Loss: Dielectric loss is caused by the transformer oil, which serves as an insulating material. If the insulating oil deteriorates, it leads to energy loss and affects the efficiency of the transformer.

Part (b)

Given:

$$KVA \space = \space 25$$

$$\cos \phi \space = \space 0.8$$

$$W_{iron \space FL} \space = \space 350W \space = \space 0.35kW$$

$$W_{cu \space FL} \space = \space 400W \space = \space 0.4kW$$

$$3300/233 \space = \space step \space down \space transformer$$

To find half load efficiency η

$$Loading \space factor \space (x) \space = \space {{1} \over 2}$$

∴ Half load copper loss = $$x^2 \space W_{cu \space FL}$$

Iron losses remain same

$$= \space \left(1 \over 2 \right)^2 \times 0.4 \space = \space {{0.41} \over 4} \space = \space 0.1 kW$$

$$%η \space = \space {{x \space KVA \space \cos \phi} \over x \space KVA \cos \phi + W_{iron} + x^2 \space W_{cu}} \times 100$$

$$= \space {{(1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8} \over (1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8 + 0.35 + 0.1} \times 100$$

$$%η \space = \space 95.69%$$

Q8 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Sketch an arrangement showing the principal of a proportional plus integral (P + I) control loop.

(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates.

Appeared In: Oct 2020 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)
Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(6) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000k W at 0.9 power factor.

Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

$$kW_{t}=8000kW$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$kW_1=6000KW$$

$$\cos\phi_1=0.9$$

To Find (a) kVA2 and cosϕ2

For alternator 1

$$\cos\phi_1=\frac{kW_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$0.9=\frac{6000}{kVA_1}$$

$$kVA_1=6666.667kVA$$

$$\sin\phi_1=\frac{kVAr_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$as\:\cos\phi=0.9;\:\phi=25.84\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi=0.435$$

$$0.435=\frac{kVAr_1}{6666.667}$$

$$kVAr_1=-2905.932\:kVAr$$

$$Now,\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=\frac{kW_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.8=\frac{8000}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$kVA_{t}=10000kVA$$

$$as\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.9\:\Rightarrow\:\phi_{t}=36.86\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi_{t}=0.6$$

$$\sin\phi_{t}=\:\frac{kVAr_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.6=\frac{kVAr_{t}}{10000}$$

$$kVAr_{t}=-6000kVAr$$

For alternator 2:

$$kW_2=kW_{t}-kW_1$$

$$kW_2=8000-6000=2000kW$$

$$kVAr_2=kVAr_{t}-kVAr_1$$

$$kVAr_2=-6000-\left(-2905.932\right)$$

$$kVAr_2=3094.068kVAr$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(kW_2\right)^2+\left(kVAR_2\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(2000\right)^2+\left(-3094.068\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=3684.190kVA$$

$$as,\:\cos\phi_2=\frac{kW_2}{kVA_2}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=\frac{2000}{3684.190}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=0.542$$

$$thus,\:kVA\:rating=3684.19kVA$$

$$power\:fact\lor=0.542$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

What are semiconductor devices? What are its advantages over thermionic devices? With respect to semiconductor devices describe working principle and application of the following:

(a) Zener Diode

(b) Transistor

(c) Photocell

(d) Thyristor

Appeared In: Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Semiconductor devices:

Semiconductor devices are electronic components utilizing the properties of semiconductor materials. These materials are neither good conductors nor good insulators; examples include silicon and germanium. Their conductivity can be significantly altered by adding trace amounts of other elements, a process called doping. Diodes, transistors, photocells, and thyristors are common examples used in electronic circuits.

Advantages of Semiconductor Devices Over Thermionic Devices:

  • Smaller size
  • Lower cost
  • Increased durability (resistance to physical shock and heat stress)
  • Reduced heat generation
  • Faster response times
  • Ability to handle, process, and deliver multiple inputs/data streams
Part (a)

Zener Diode:

  • A Zener diode is a p-n junction semiconductor designed to operate in its reverse breakdown region. When a reverse voltage (anode to negative, cathode to positive) is applied and reaches the Zener voltage, the diode undergoes breakdown, allowing a large current to flow while maintaining a relatively constant voltage across it.
  • Applications: Voltage regulation, voltage comparison in automatic voltage regulators (AVRs).
Part (b)

Transistor:

  • A transistor is a three-layered semiconductor device (npn or pnp) that amplifies and switches electronic signals and power. Its operation is based on the principle that applying a voltage causes negative charge carriers (electrons) to move in one direction and positive charge carriers (holes) in the other. The current flow in one part of the transistor is controlled by a smaller current in another part.
  • Applications: Signal amplification, analog and digital switching, microprocessors.
Part (c)

Photocell:

  • A photocell is a solid-state device that converts light into electrical energy. It operates on the photoelectric effect—the emission of electrons from a material's surface when light energy is applied. The incident light causes the release of electrons, generating a voltage or altering current flow.
  • Applications: Alarm circuits, sound reproduction in movies, robotics.
Part (d)

Thyristor:

  • A thyristor is a solid-state switch turned on by a low-level signal voltage applied to a trigger connection called the gate. It's a four-layered, three-junction device that functions unidirectionally, similar to a diode. Conduction occurs only when triggered by the gate.
  • Applications: Silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) are used in AVRs and for controlling power to loads. They are used in high-power applications such as motor control.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x

Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of

(a) Capacitive type level sensor

(b) Ultrasonic level sensor

(c) Float

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Deseribe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insualtion in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies of these problesm

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an induction motor

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an induction motor in installed condition?

(c) What is the purpose of "fuse back up protection" provided to an induction motor?

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque?

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum runring torque in an induction motor?

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an altemating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form.

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the KVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

$$kW_{t}=8000kW$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$kW_1=6000KW$$

$$\cos\phi_1=0.9$$

To Find (a) kVA2 and cosϕ2

For alternator 1

$$\cos\phi_1=\frac{kW_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$0.9=\frac{6000}{kVA_1}$$

$$kVA_1=6666.667kVA$$

$$\sin\phi_1=\frac{kVAr_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$as\:\cos\phi=0.9;\:\phi=25.84\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi=0.435$$

$$0.435=\frac{kVAr_1}{6666.667}$$

$$kVAr_1=-2905.932\:kVAr$$

$$Now,\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=\frac{kW_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.8=\frac{8000}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$kVA_{t}=10000kVA$$

$$as\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.9\:\Rightarrow\:\phi_{t}=36.86\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi_{t}=0.6$$

$$\sin\phi_{t}=\:\frac{kVAr_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.6=\frac{kVAr_{t}}{10000}$$

$$kVAr_{t}=-6000kVAr$$

For alternator 2:

$$kW_2=kW_{t}-kW_1$$

$$kW_2=8000-6000=2000kW$$

$$kVAr_2=kVAr_{t}-kVAr_1$$

$$kVAr_2=-6000-\left(-2905.932\right)$$

$$kVAr_2=3094.068kVAr$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(kW_2\right)^2+\left(kVAR_2\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(2000\right)^2+\left(-3094.068\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=3684.190kVA$$

$$as,\:\cos\phi_2=\frac{kW_2}{kVA_2}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=\frac{2000}{3684.190}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=0.542$$

$$thus,\:kVA\:rating=3684.19kVA$$

$$power\:fact\lor=0.542$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of ammature resistance. (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system.

Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor?

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(a) The r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(b) The 'breadth factor' Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduce (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an induetance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 4x

With reference to alkaline batteries used on board ship:

(a) Describe the operation of a battery cell and state the materials used

(b) Describe how the cells are mounted to form a battery

(c) State the advantages and disadvantages compared with lead-acid batteries.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The common form of alkaline cell is Nickel cadmium type.

In this type of battery,

  • Cathode: The positive electrode is made up of nickel oxyhydroxide (NiOOH)
  • Anode: Negative electrode is made of cadmium (CD)
  • Electrolyte: Potassium hydroxide (KOH)
  • Separators: Made of rubber Housing made of strong plastic.

A series of alternating positive and negative plates are fully immersed in the electrolyte, separators are inserted between the interleaving plates to prevent contact/ internal short-circuiting. A non-return pressure relief valve is fitted in the housing to release the gases, which evolve especially during the period of overcharge. Relief valves are non-return type to prevent ‘poisoning’ of the electrolyte from the atmosphere.

Discharge: On discharge, nickel hydroxide losses oxygen and is reduced to a lower form, while the cadmium in the negative plates is oxidised to cadmium oxide.

Charging: On charging, the reverse of discharge occurs, the material at the positive terminal is being oxidised to nickel hydroxide and the material at the negative terminal is being reduced to cadmium.

Part (c)

The advantages of alkaline cell compared with a lead acid cell are

  • Longer life span
  • Better charge retention
  • Better operability at higher temperatures
  • Lightweight
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) State the necessary conditions required prior to the synchronizing of electrical alternators.

(b) Describe the type of cumulative damage that may be caused when alternators are incorrectly Synchronized.

(c) Explain how the damage referred to in (b) can be avoided/reduced.

(d) For two alternators operating in parallel the consequences of:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Oct 2024 Sep 2023 Dec 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessary Conditions Required Before Synchronizing Alternators:

  • Voltage: Voltage should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar voltage. This is checked using a voltmeter.
  • Frequency: The frequency should be equal to or slightly higher than the busbar frequency. In practice, the frequency of the incoming alternator is kept slightly higher so that when load is applied, it matches the busbar frequency. The synchroscope should move clockwise at a slow speed.
  • Phase Angle: There should be no phase angle between the incoming and running generator. The synchroscope pointer should be at 12 o'clock, indicating a zero or acceptable phase angle difference between the incoming alternator and the busbar.
Part (b)

Cumulative Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Mechanical Surge Torque: A significant surge of torque is exerted on the rotor. This can cause damage to the rotor shaft (twisting, keyway damage), coupling (breakage), and stator windings (deformation). The stator core might also shift relative to its frame.
  • Electrical Surge: A surge of current and power circulates through the system. This greatly strains the entire system, potentially leading to overheating and component failure. The sudden inrush of current could lead to circuit breakers tripping to protect the system.
Part (c)

Avoiding/Reducing Damage from Incorrect Synchronization:

  • Automatic Synchronization: Systems with automatic synchronization pre-program the correct voltage, frequency, and phase angle, greatly reducing the chances of errors.
  • Manual Synchronization with Synchroscope: With manual synchronisation, a synchroscope carefully compares the incoming alternator's frequency and phase angle to the busbar's. Adjust the incoming alternator’s voltage to match the busbar. When the synchroscope pointer moves slowly clockwise and approaches the 12 o'clock position, close the alternator breaker to ensure proper synchronisation.
Part (d)

Consequences of operating two alternators in parallel:

(i) Reduced torque from the prime mover of one machine:

If one alternator's prime mover (the engine driving the alternator) experiences reduced torque, that alternator will begin to reduce its load contribution to the busbar. The other alternator will compensate for the reduced output, taking on the additional load. If the torque continues to decrease on the first alternator, it will eventually draw power from the busbar, acting as a motor rather than a generator. This will trip a reverse power relay, shutting down the affected alternator for protection.

(ii) Reduced excitation on one machine:

If the excitation of one alternator is reduced, its generated voltage decreases. This creates a circulating current between the alternators, almost 90 degrees out of phase, due to the inductive nature of alternator windings. The other alternator carries both its original load current and the circulating current, leading to an increased current and a more lagging power factor. The affected alternator will have a reduced current and a less lagging power factor. Both will continue to share the load (kW) despite operating at different currents and power factors. The reduced excitation can lead to instability and, in some cases, result in the alternator becoming overloaded and tripping offline.

Q3 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance

(b) Cascade system

(c) Pole-changing

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Comparison of methods of speed regulation of three-phase induction motors used in tankers:

Part (a)

Rotor resistance (slip-ring motor):

  • Method: additional resistance is inserted in the rotor circuit of a slip-ring (wound rotor) induction motor. Increasing the rotor resistance increases the slip for a given torque, so the speed falls. The speed is varied by varying the rotor resistance.
  • Characteristics: gives speed control only below synchronous speed (from full speed down to standstill). The speed regulation is poor (speed varies with load). The efficiency is low because the slip power is dissipated as heat in the rotor resistance. The starting torque can be increased.
  • Advantages: simple, cheap, gives high starting torque and smooth acceleration.
  • Disadvantages: wasteful (heat loss), poor speed regulation, only stepwise control unless a liquid rheostat is used.
  • Example: cargo pump motors, winches, windlasses, and other deck machinery where high starting torque and some speed reduction are needed.
Part (b)

Cascade system:

  • Method: two induction motors are mechanically coupled, and the rotor of the first (main) motor is connected electrically to the stator of the second (auxiliary) motor. The slip power of the main motor is fed to the auxiliary motor, which adds to the mechanical output. By changing the number of poles of the auxiliary motor (or by using a Scherbius or Kramer arrangement), the speed of the combined set can be varied.
  • Characteristics: gives a limited number of discrete speeds (usually two or three), all below synchronous speed. The efficiency is better than rotor resistance because the slip power is usefully employed.
  • Advantages: better efficiency than rotor resistance, useful for large motors.
  • Disadvantages: complex, expensive, requires two machines, only a few fixed speeds.
  • Example: large cargo pump drives and other large constant-speed applications where a few discrete speeds are acceptable.
Part (c)

Pole-changing (consequent pole / Dahlander):

  • Method: the stator winding is reconnected to change the number of poles, giving two (or more) discrete synchronous speeds. The Dahlander connection gives a 2:1 speed ratio (e.g. 4-pole/8-pole). Speed = 120 f / P.
  • Characteristics: gives discrete speeds only (e.g. half and full speed), not continuous control. The efficiency is high at each speed because the motor runs at its rated slip. The torque can be maintained constant or the power constant depending on the connection.
  • Advantages: simple, robust, cheap, high efficiency at each speed, no extra losses.
  • Disadvantages: only a few fixed speeds, no continuous speed variation, the changeover requires a special starter.
  • Example: engine room fans, ventilation fans, ballast and bilge pumps, and other auxiliaries where two or three fixed speeds are sufficient.

Summary: rotor resistance gives smooth but inefficient low-speed control; cascade gives a few efficient speeds for large drives; pole-changing gives simple, efficient discrete speeds for fans and pumps.

Q5 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x

Sketch and deseribe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.

Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.

This converter comprises two main sections:

  • Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
  • Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.

The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.

Advantages

  1. Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
  2. During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.

Disadvantages

  1. High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
  2. Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min . The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions, (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance.

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed;

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent;

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(i) The r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) The 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces;

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q5 (10 Marks) Lighting & Distribution

With reference to transformer answer following:

(a) Explain the construction of a lighting transformer used onboard.

(b) What is all day efficiency of a transformer?

(c) How are iron losses in the transformer made very negligible?

(d) In a short-circuit test performed on a transformer iron losses are negligible, why?

Appeared In: Oct 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Construction of a Lighting Transformer Used Onboard

A lighting transformer used onboard is generally a step-down transformer designed to reduce the ship’s main switchboard voltage (typically 440 V) to safer lighting voltages such as 220 V or 110 V. It consists of:

  • Laminated iron core made from thin insulated sheets to reduce eddy current losses.
  • Primary and secondary windings, wound cylindrically and insulated using materials such as varnished paper, cloth, or other dielectric materials.
  • Cooling arrangement:
    • For higher-capacity transformers, the windings may be immersed in transformer oil for insulation and cooling.
    • Smaller lighting transformers use air cooling with simple encapsulation.
  • Terminals or bushings provided externally for connecting to the ship's electrical system.

(b) All-Day Efficiency of a Transformer

All-day efficiency (also known as operational efficiency) is the ratio of useful energy output (kWh) to total energy input (kWh) over a 24-hour period.

It is especially important for transformers supplying variable loads continuously, such as lighting transformers on ships.

$$All\:day\:efficiency=\frac{kWh\:output\:in\:24\:houts}{kWh\:input\:in\:24\:hours}$$

This efficiency accounts for:

  • Core (iron) losses, which occur continuously.
  • Copper losses, which vary depending on the load throughout the day.

(c) How Iron Losses Are Made Negligible in a Transformer

Iron losses consist of hysteresis and eddy current losses. They are minimized by:

  • Using high-grade CRGO (Cold Rolled Grain Oriented) silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and electrical resistivity.
  • Laminating the core into thin insulated sheets to restrict eddy currents.
  • Operating the core at an optimal magnetic flux density to reduce hysteresis losses.
  • Using effective core geometry and minimizing excess core material to limit unnecessary flux paths.

(d) Why Iron Losses Are Negligible During a Short-Circuit Test

In a short-circuit test, only a very small voltage (typically 5–10% of rated voltage) is applied to circulate rated current in the windings. Because of the low applied voltage:

  • The magnetic flux in the core is extremely small.
  • Iron losses, which depend on flux density (approximately proportional to (B^2) or higher), become negligible.
  • The test mainly measures copper losses (I²R), since current is high but flux is low.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V.

Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedence referred to the primary circuit;

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) The readings on the ammeters

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

With reference to A.C Distributions systems:

(a) Define power factor and explain the effects of low power factor. (6)

(b) A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded. (10)

Appeared In: Oct 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Definition of Power Factor:

Power factor is a measure of the efficiency of an electrical system, indicating how effectively electrical power is converted into useful work output. It is defined as the ratio of True Power (real power in kilowatts, kW) to Apparent Power (total power in kilovolt-amperes, kVA). Mathematically, it is expressed as:

$$Power\:factor\:\left(PF\right)=\frac{True\:power\:\left(kW\right)}{Apparent\:power\:\left(kVA\right)}$$

The power factor is a dimensionless quantity, represented as a value between 0 and 1 or as a percentage. A power factor of 1 (or 100%) signifies that all the apparent power is being effectively used as true power. For most shipboard systems, the power factor is typically 0.8 lagging, indicating that the current lags the voltage by an angle θ due to inductive loads.

Effects of Low Power Factor:

  • Increased Cost of Generating and Distribution Equipment. At a low power factor, the apparent power (kVA) required for the same true power (kW) increases. This necessitates larger generators, transformers, and distribution equipment, leading to higher capital and maintenance costs.
  • Low power factor adversely affects voltage regulation, making it difficult to maintain voltage levels within specified limits. This can lead to instability and improper functioning of sensitive equipment.
  • For a given load, a low power factor increases the current flowing through the conductors. This results in greater I²R losses (heat loss due to resistance), reducing overall system efficiency.
  • To carry the increased current associated with low power factor, larger conductor sizes are needed, further escalating installation costs.
  • At a low power factor, more apparent power (kVA) is consumed for the same true power (kW). This reduces the capacity of existing equipment to handle additional loads.
  • Utilities may impose penalties or higher tariffs for operating with a low power factor, as it places additional strain on the power grid.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger,and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an induetance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x

Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.

(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.

(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Q2 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

What are semiconductor devices? What are its advantages over thermionic devices? With respect to semiconductor devices describe working principle and application of the following:

(a) Zener Diode

(b) Transistor

(c) Photocell

(d) Thyristor

Appeared In: Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Semiconductor devices:

Semiconductor devices are electronic components utilizing the properties of semiconductor materials. These materials are neither good conductors nor good insulators; examples include silicon and germanium. Their conductivity can be significantly altered by adding trace amounts of other elements, a process called doping. Diodes, transistors, photocells, and thyristors are common examples used in electronic circuits.

Advantages of Semiconductor Devices Over Thermionic Devices:

  • Smaller size
  • Lower cost
  • Increased durability (resistance to physical shock and heat stress)
  • Reduced heat generation
  • Faster response times
  • Ability to handle, process, and deliver multiple inputs/data streams
Part (a)

Zener Diode:

  • A Zener diode is a p-n junction semiconductor designed to operate in its reverse breakdown region. When a reverse voltage (anode to negative, cathode to positive) is applied and reaches the Zener voltage, the diode undergoes breakdown, allowing a large current to flow while maintaining a relatively constant voltage across it.
  • Applications: Voltage regulation, voltage comparison in automatic voltage regulators (AVRs).
Part (b)

Transistor:

  • A transistor is a three-layered semiconductor device (npn or pnp) that amplifies and switches electronic signals and power. Its operation is based on the principle that applying a voltage causes negative charge carriers (electrons) to move in one direction and positive charge carriers (holes) in the other. The current flow in one part of the transistor is controlled by a smaller current in another part.
  • Applications: Signal amplification, analog and digital switching, microprocessors.
Part (c)

Photocell:

  • A photocell is a solid-state device that converts light into electrical energy. It operates on the photoelectric effect—the emission of electrons from a material's surface when light energy is applied. The incident light causes the release of electrons, generating a voltage or altering current flow.
  • Applications: Alarm circuits, sound reproduction in movies, robotics.
Part (d)

Thyristor:

  • A thyristor is a solid-state switch turned on by a low-level signal voltage applied to a trigger connection called the gate. It's a four-layered, three-junction device that functions unidirectionally, similar to a diode. Conduction occurs only when triggered by the gate.
  • Applications: Silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) are used in AVRs and for controlling power to loads. They are used in high-power applications such as motor control.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x

Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of

(a) Capacitive type level sensor

(b) Ultrasonic level sensor

(c) Float

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the effect of reduced voltage on standard squirrel cage motors with respect to EACH of the following:

(a) Burn outs

(b) Starting current

(c) Starting torque

(d) Speed

Appeared In: Oct 2024 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Burnouts:

Reducing the voltage supplied to a squirrel cage motor forces it to draw more current to maintain the same load. This is because power (P) is the product of voltage (V) and current (I): P = V x I. If V decreases, I must increase to keep P constant. The heat generated in the motor windings is proportional to the square of the current (I²R, where R is the resistance of the windings). Therefore, a significant increase in current due to reduced voltage leads to excessive heat generation. This overheating can damage the winding insulation, potentially causing a motor burnout.

Part (b)

Starting Current:

The starting current of a squirrel cage induction motor is directly proportional to the supply voltage. Reducing the voltage proportionately reduces the starting current. This reduced starting current is beneficial because it minimizes stress on the motor windings and reduces voltage dips on the electrical distribution system. A lower power surge also prevents excessive power factor reduction. This gentler "cushion start" stabilizes line voltage. For example, a 50% voltage reduction results in approximately a 50% reduction in starting current.

Part (c)

Starting Torque:

The starting torque (Ta) of a squirrel cage induction motor is proportional to the square of the voltage (Ta ∝ V²). Therefore, a 50% voltage reduction results in only 25% of the normal starting torque. This can make it difficult or impossible to start motors driving high inertia loads. If the starting torque is insufficient to overcome the load torque, the motor will stall, leading to excessive current flow and potential damage to the windings.

Part (d)

Speed:

When the voltage is reduced, the motor draws more current to try to maintain its speed under load. However, with a significant voltage reduction, the motor's speed will decrease. If the speed drops below a critical point (typically near the maximum torque point on the motor's torque-speed curve), the motor will lose synchronization and stall, resulting in a very low speed or complete stop.

Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q6 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(6) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system.

Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(a) the r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(b) the 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxillary machineries on board vessels.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:

  • Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
  • Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
  • Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
  • Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
  • Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:

  • A VFD consists of three main stages:
  • Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
  • D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
  • Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
  • The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
  • Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
  • Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x

Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.

(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.

(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.

In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.

A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.

  • Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
  • Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
  • Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
  • Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
  • Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultancously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) What is meant by "Resonance" in RLC circuits? Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. (10)

(b) Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates. (6)

Appeared In: Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Resonance in RLC circuits, and comparison of series and parallel resonance:

  • Resonance is the condition in an RLC circuit when the inductive reactance equals the capacitive reactance (XL = XC). At resonance the circuit is purely resistive, the impedance is a minimum (series) or maximum (parallel), and the current is in phase with the voltage.
  • Series resonance: XL = XC, so the impedance Z = R (minimum). The current is a maximum and equals V/R. The voltage across the inductor and capacitor can be much larger than the supply voltage (voltage magnification). The resonant frequency f0 = 1/(2 pi sqrt(LC)). The power factor is unity.
  • Parallel resonance: XL = XC, so the admittance is a minimum and the impedance is a maximum. The line current is a minimum, while the circulating current in the L-C branch can be large (current magnification). The resonant frequency is approximately f0 = 1/(2 pi sqrt(LC)). The power factor is unity.
  • Comparison: in series resonance the impedance is minimum and current maximum; in parallel resonance the impedance is maximum and current minimum. Series resonance gives voltage magnification; parallel resonance gives current magnification. Series resonance is used in tuned circuits and filters; parallel resonance is used in rejector circuits and to improve power factor.
Part (b)

Frequency at which the circuit resonates:

  • The resonant frequency of an RLC circuit is f0 = 1/(2 pi sqrt(L C)), where L is the inductance in henries and C the capacitance in farads.
  • (The numerical value depends on the values of L and C given in the figure; the method is to substitute the given L and C into f0 = 1/(2 pi sqrt(LC)).)
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Describe how protection against short circuit is provided in a 3 phase induction motor circuit (6)

(b) Explain how rotating magnetic field is produced in three phase winding with three phase supply. A 4-pole, 3-phase induction motor operates from a supply whose frequency is 50 Hz. Calculate

(i) Speed at which the magnetic field of the stator is rotating

(ii) Speed of the rotor when the slip is 0.04.

(iii) The frequency of the rotor current when the slip is 0.03.

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of short-circuit protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain what is meant by, and the significance of, four of the following terms.

(a) Voltage stabilization

(b) Filter choke

(c) Impedance

(d) Rectification

(e) Grid bias voltage

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain the potential hazards if liquid-cooled transformers are used onboard ships. (6)

(b) What are the losses in transformers? Mention the various factors which affect these losses. In a 25 K VA, 3300/233 V, single phase transformer, the iron and full-load Cu. losses are respectively 350 and 400 w. Calculate the efficiency at half-full load 0.8 power factor.

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Potential hazards of using liquid-cooled transformers:

  • The heating of oil during transformer operation can lead to the generation of oil vapors, which are flammable and pose a significant fire risk if exposed to ignition sources.
  • The cooling oil can degrade due to continuous agitation. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil can degrade in marine environments due to continuous agitation and exposure to seawater. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil requires periodic replacement, necessitating transformer isolation. This may not always be feasible, causing operational disruptions.

(b) Losses in a Transformer

1. Core Loss or Iron Loss: Core loss occurs in the transformer's magnetic core and consists of eddy current loss and hysteresis loss.

  • Eddy Current Loss: When AC is supplied to the primary winding, it produces an alternating magnetizing flux in the transformer. While most of this flux links with the secondary winding to induce emf, some flux links with other conducting parts such as the steel core or transformer body. This induces small circulating currents in those parts, called eddy currents, which dissipate energy as heat.
  • Hysteresis Loss: This loss arises due to the repeated reversal of magnetization in the transformer core. It depends on:
    • Volume and grade of the iron used
    • Frequency of magnetic reversals
    • Magnitude of flux density

2. Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Copper loss occurs due to the ohmic resistance of the transformer windings. It can be expressed as:

  • Primary winding: ( I_1^2 R_1 )
  • Secondary winding: ( I_2^2 R_2 )

Where:

  • ( I_1 ) and ( I_2 ) are currents in the primary and secondary windings
  • ( R_1 ) and ( R_2 ) are resistances of the primary and secondary windings

Key points:

  • Copper loss is proportional to the square of the current.
  • Since current depends on the load, copper loss varies with load.

3. Stray Losses: Stray losses occur due to the leakage flux linking with metallic parts of the transformer.

Note: Stray losses are small compared to copper and iron losses and are often negligible in calculations.

4. Dielectric Loss: Dielectric loss is caused by the transformer oil, which serves as an insulating material. If the insulating oil deteriorates, it leads to energy loss and affects the efficiency of the transformer.

Part (b)

Given:

$$KVA \space = \space 25$$

$$\cos \phi \space = \space 0.8$$

$$W_{iron \space FL} \space = \space 350W \space = \space 0.35kW$$

$$W_{cu \space FL} \space = \space 400W \space = \space 0.4kW$$

$$3300/233 \space = \space step \space down \space transformer$$

To find half load efficiency η

$$Loading \space factor \space (x) \space = \space {{1} \over 2}$$

∴ Half load copper loss = $$x^2 \space W_{cu \space FL}$$

Iron losses remain same

$$= \space \left(1 \over 2 \right)^2 \times 0.4 \space = \space {{0.41} \over 4} \space = \space 0.1 kW$$

$$%η \space = \space {{x \space KVA \space \cos \phi} \over x \space KVA \cos \phi + W_{iron} + x^2 \space W_{cu}} \times 100$$

$$= \space {{(1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8} \over (1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8 + 0.35 + 0.1} \times 100$$

$$%η \space = \space 95.69%$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Write a short note on various types of DC Motors. (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.

Appeared In: Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Short note on the various types of D.C. motors:

  • Shunt motor: the field winding is connected in parallel with the armature. It has a nearly constant speed characteristic and moderate starting torque. Used for constant-speed drives such as fans, blowers, and machine tools.
  • Series motor: the field winding is in series with the armature. It has a very high starting torque and a falling speed characteristic (constant power). It must never be run without load (overspeed). Used for cranes, hoists, winches, and traction.
  • Compound motor: has both a shunt and a series field. Cumulative compound gives high starting torque with a stable speed (used for deck machinery, presses, and loads requiring high starting torque). Differential compound gives a nearly constant speed and is rarely used.
  • Permanent magnet motor: uses permanent magnets for the field. Compact and efficient, used for small servo and control applications.
Part (b)

440 V shunt motor, armature current 30 A at 700 rev/min, armature resistance 0.7 ohm. Flux suddenly reduced 20%.

  • Back e.m.f. E1 = V - Ia Ra = 440 - 30 x 0.7 = 440 - 21 = 419 V.
  • Flux reduced by 20%: phi2 = 0.8 phi1.
  • Momentarily, the speed cannot change instantly, so the back e.m.f. falls to E2 = 0.8 x 419 = 335.2 V.
  • The armature current momentarily rises to Ia2 = (V - E2)/Ra = (440 - 335.2)/0.7 = 104.8/0.7 = 149.7 A.
  • New steady state: torque constant (resisting torque unchanged), so phi1 Ia1 = phi2 Ia2, giving Ia2 = Ia1 (phi1/phi2) = 30/0.8 = 37.5 A.
  • New back e.m.f. E2 = V - Ia2 Ra = 440 - 37.5 x 0.7 = 440 - 26.25 = 413.75 V.
  • New speed: N proportional to E/phi. N2 = N1 x (E2/E1) x (phi1/phi2) = 700 x (413.75/419) x (1/0.8) = 700 x 0.9875 x 1.25 = 864 rev/min.
  • So the armature current momentarily rises to about 150 A, then settles at 37.5 A, and the new steady speed is about 864 rev/min.
  • Sketch: the armature current shows a sharp spike to 150 A at the instant of flux reduction, then falls to the new steady value of 37.5 A. The speed rises smoothly from 700 to 864 rev/min as the motor accelerates to the new steady state.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechanism titled to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Q3 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuitS.

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinerv

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defecis may be revealed

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a recutier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and due to the rectitier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate:

(i) The readings on the ammeters

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) why is it important to maintamn high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transtormers (6)

(b) A 100 KVA transtormer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedence referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voitage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-vollage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz. a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived.

(b) Three batteries A, B and C have their negative terminals connected together between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an induetance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 3x

What are semiconductor devices? What are its advantages over thermionic devices? With respect to semiconductor devices describe working principle and application of the following:

(a) Zener Diode

(b) Transistor

(c) Photocell

(d) Thyristor

Appeared In: Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Semiconductor devices:

Semiconductor devices are electronic components utilizing the properties of semiconductor materials. These materials are neither good conductors nor good insulators; examples include silicon and germanium. Their conductivity can be significantly altered by adding trace amounts of other elements, a process called doping. Diodes, transistors, photocells, and thyristors are common examples used in electronic circuits.

Advantages of Semiconductor Devices Over Thermionic Devices:

  • Smaller size
  • Lower cost
  • Increased durability (resistance to physical shock and heat stress)
  • Reduced heat generation
  • Faster response times
  • Ability to handle, process, and deliver multiple inputs/data streams
Part (a)

Zener Diode:

  • A Zener diode is a p-n junction semiconductor designed to operate in its reverse breakdown region. When a reverse voltage (anode to negative, cathode to positive) is applied and reaches the Zener voltage, the diode undergoes breakdown, allowing a large current to flow while maintaining a relatively constant voltage across it.
  • Applications: Voltage regulation, voltage comparison in automatic voltage regulators (AVRs).
Part (b)

Transistor:

  • A transistor is a three-layered semiconductor device (npn or pnp) that amplifies and switches electronic signals and power. Its operation is based on the principle that applying a voltage causes negative charge carriers (electrons) to move in one direction and positive charge carriers (holes) in the other. The current flow in one part of the transistor is controlled by a smaller current in another part.
  • Applications: Signal amplification, analog and digital switching, microprocessors.
Part (c)

Photocell:

  • A photocell is a solid-state device that converts light into electrical energy. It operates on the photoelectric effect—the emission of electrons from a material's surface when light energy is applied. The incident light causes the release of electrons, generating a voltage or altering current flow.
  • Applications: Alarm circuits, sound reproduction in movies, robotics.
Part (d)

Thyristor:

  • A thyristor is a solid-state switch turned on by a low-level signal voltage applied to a trigger connection called the gate. It's a four-layered, three-junction device that functions unidirectionally, similar to a diode. Conduction occurs only when triggered by the gate.
  • Applications: Silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) are used in AVRs and for controlling power to loads. They are used in high-power applications such as motor control.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x

Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of

(a) Capacitive type level sensor

(b) Ultrasonic level sensor

(c) Float

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles

Analogue Instruments

Definition:

  • An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.

Working Principle:

  • The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
    • In a typical analogue electrical meter:
      • The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
      • This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
      • A spring provides a balancing torque.
      • The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).

    Digital Instruments

    Definition:

    • A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).

    Working Principle:

    • The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
      • In a typical digital meter:
        • The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
        • An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
        • A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
        • The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.

      (b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard

      1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge

      Working Principle:

      • The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
        • When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
        • This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
      • Applications Onboard:
        • Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
        • Advantages:
          • Rugged construction and no power requirement.
          • Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.

        2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter

        Working Principle:

        • A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
          • The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
          • The signal is digitised by an ADC.
          • The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
          • The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
          • For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
        • Applications Onboard:
          • Checking 24V DC control circuits.
          • Verifying generator phase voltages.
          • Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
Q3 (16 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x

Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.

(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.

(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Electric propulsion system:

Part (b)

Advantages of Electric propulsion system:

Economic Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
  • They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
  • The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
  • The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
  • The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.

Environmental Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.

Operational Convenience

  • These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
  • Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
  • They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
  • Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.

Flexibility

  • The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
  • The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
  • Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
Q4 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the effect of reduced voltage on standard squirrel cage motors with respect to EACH of the following:

(a) Burn outs

(b) Starting current

(c) Starting torque

(d) Speed

Appeared In: Oct 2024 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Burnouts:

Reducing the voltage supplied to a squirrel cage motor forces it to draw more current to maintain the same load. This is because power (P) is the product of voltage (V) and current (I): P = V x I. If V decreases, I must increase to keep P constant. The heat generated in the motor windings is proportional to the square of the current (I²R, where R is the resistance of the windings). Therefore, a significant increase in current due to reduced voltage leads to excessive heat generation. This overheating can damage the winding insulation, potentially causing a motor burnout.

Part (b)

Starting Current:

The starting current of a squirrel cage induction motor is directly proportional to the supply voltage. Reducing the voltage proportionately reduces the starting current. This reduced starting current is beneficial because it minimizes stress on the motor windings and reduces voltage dips on the electrical distribution system. A lower power surge also prevents excessive power factor reduction. This gentler "cushion start" stabilizes line voltage. For example, a 50% voltage reduction results in approximately a 50% reduction in starting current.

Part (c)

Starting Torque:

The starting torque (Ta) of a squirrel cage induction motor is proportional to the square of the voltage (Ta ∝ V²). Therefore, a 50% voltage reduction results in only 25% of the normal starting torque. This can make it difficult or impossible to start motors driving high inertia loads. If the starting torque is insufficient to overcome the load torque, the motor will stall, leading to excessive current flow and potential damage to the windings.

Part (d)

Speed:

When the voltage is reduced, the motor draws more current to try to maintain its speed under load. However, with a significant voltage reduction, the motor's speed will decrease. If the speed drops below a critical point (typically near the maximum torque point on the motor's torque-speed curve), the motor will lose synchronization and stall, resulting in a very low speed or complete stop.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain.

(6) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50. Hz system. Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed;

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent;

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(i) The r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(ii) The 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an induetance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to

mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and disadvantages of soft starter:

Advantages:

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, avoiding the high current shock during direct starting and reducing the impact on the power grid.
  • The soft starter can reduce mechanical stress and extend the service life of the motor and related mechanical equipment.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with the frequency converter, the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.

Disadvantages:

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process, and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control the various parameters during the starting process like the frequency converter.
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve the operating efficiency.
Q3 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 8x

With reference to U.M.S. operation:

(a) State with reasons the essential requirements for unattended machinery spaces

(b) As Second Engineer, describe how you would respond to the irretrievable failure of the machinery space fire alarm system whilst the ship is on voyage.

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Nov 2024 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Essential requirements for any unattended machinery space (UMS) Ship to be able to sail at sea are enumerated in the SOLAS 1974 Chapter II-1, regulations 46 to regulation 53.

Requirements for Unattended Machinery Space (UMS) Ship:

1. Fire Precaution

  • Arrangements should be provided on the UMS ship to detect and give an alarm in case of fire.
  • In the boiler, air supply casing and uptake.
  • In scavenge space of propulsion machinery.
  • In engines of power, 2250 kW and above or cylinders having bore more than 300mm should be provided with an oil mist detector for the crankcase or bearing temperature monitor or either of two.

2. Centralized control & instruments are required in Machinery Space

  • UMS ships must have a centralised control room that is easily accessible and equipped with adequate instrumentation and equipment to monitor and operate all main and auxiliary machinery. A system must be provided to call the engineers to the machinery space in case of emergency

3. Protection against flooding:

  • UMS ships must have bilge wells that are located and designed to detect the accumulation of liquid at a normal angle of heel and trim and to accommodate the drainage of liquid during an unattended period. If the bilge pump starts automatically, an alarm must indicate that the flow of liquid pumped is more than the capacity of the pump.

4. Automatic Fire Detection

  • Alarms and detection should operate very rapidly and effectively. It should be placed at numerous well-sited places for quick response of the detectors.

5. Fire Extinguishing System

  • There should be arrangements for a fire extinguishing system other than the conventional hand extinguishers, which can be operated remotely from machinery space. The station must give control of emergency fire pumps, generators, valves, extinguishing media, etc.

6. Alarm System

  • A comprehensive alarm system must be provided for control & accommodation areas.

7. Automatic Start of Emergency Generator

  • Arrangements for the starting of an emergency generator and automatic connection to the bus bar must be provided in case of a blackout condition, apart from that, the following points are also to be noted.
  • 8. Local hand control of essential machinery like steering, emergency generator starting, emergency start for main engine, etc. 8. Adequate settling tank storage capacity. 9. Regular testing & maintenance of machinery alarms & instruments.
Part (b)

Response to irretrievable failure of machinery space fire alarm system:

  • Immediately Inform the Chief Engineer and Master about the situation.
  • Man the Engine Room, Increased vigilance is necessary, and a dedicated person should be positioned at the ECR station.
  • Conduct significantly more frequent fire rounds, examining all areas for any signs of fire or overheating. This involves visual inspection, checking temperatures using infrared thermometers, and detecting unusual smells or sounds.
  • Monitor all machinery parameters closely for any signs of abnormality, such as temperature increases, unusual vibrations, or unusual pressure changes. This includes checking oil and gas leakages.
  • Ensure all containers of lubricating oil, diesel oil, fuel oil, and chemicals are properly secured to prevent spillage or movement.
  • Check that all other machinery alarms are functioning correctly, and report any additional issues to the Chief Engineer and Master.
  • Given the failure of the main system, consider the use of alternative detection methods. This could include enhanced visual inspections and the use of portable smoke detectors.
  • If the situation remains unresolved, or other safety concerns arise, it might be necessary to consider diverting to the nearest port for repairs and improved safety.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.

Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.

For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.

Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.

The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.

Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded;

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms wave form, frequency and average value. (6)

(b) A moving coil ammeter, a thermal ammeter and a rectifier are connected in series with a resistor across a 110 V sinusoidal a.c. supply. The circuit has a resistance of 50 Ω to current in one direction and, due to the rectifier, an infinite resistance to current in the reverse direction. Calculate: (10)

(i) The readings on the ammeters

(ii) The form and peak factors of the current wave.

Appeared In: Mar 2026 Dec 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Explain the terms waveform, frequency and average value

1. Waveform

A waveform is the shape or pattern obtained when an alternating voltage or current is plotted against time.

For a sinusoidal alternating current, the waveform is a sine wave, in which the magnitude and direction of current vary continuously with time.

2. Frequency

Frequency is the number of complete cycles of an alternating quantity occurring in one second.

The unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).

$$f=\frac{1}{T}$$

where:

  • f = frequency in Hz
  • T = time period of one complete cycle in seconds

3. Average Value

The average value of an alternating quantity is the arithmetic mean of its instantaneous values over a specified period.

For a symmetrical sinusoidal AC waveform, the average value over a complete cycle is zero, because the positive and negative half-cycles cancel each other.

For a rectified waveform, the average value is obtained by considering the rectified current over the complete cycle.

Part (b)

Ammeter Readings, Form Factor and Peak Factor

Given:

  • AC supply voltage = 110 V RMS
  • Resistance = 50 Ω
  • Resistance to current in the reverse direction = infinite
  • Therefore, current flows through the circuit in only one direction.

Hence, the current is a half-wave rectified sine wave.

Step 1: Calculate the Peak Voltage

The given 110 V is the RMS value of the sinusoidal AC supply.

For a sinusoidal waveform:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times V_{rms}$$

Therefore:

$$V_m=\sqrt{2}\times110$$

$$V_m=155.56\ V$$

Step 2: Calculate the Peak Current

Using Ohm's law:

$$I_m=\frac{V_m}{R}$$

$$I_m=\frac{155.56}{50}$$

$$I_m=3.11\ A$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_m=3.11\ A}$$

This current flows only during one half-cycle because the rectifier blocks current in the opposite direction.

The current waveform is therefore a half-wave rectified sine wave.

(i) Ammeter Readings

Moving Coil Ammeter

A moving coil ammeter responds to the average value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{avg}=\frac{I_m}{\pi}$$

$$Substituting\:I_{m}=3.11\ A$$

$$I_{avg}=\frac{3.11}{\pi}$$

$$I_{avg}=0.99\ A$$

Therefore, the moving coil ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

Thermal Ammeter

A thermal ammeter operates on the heating effect of current and therefore indicates the RMS value of current.

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{I_m}{2}$$

Therefore:

$$I_{rms}=\frac{3.11}{2}$$

$$I_{rms}=1.555\ A$$

Hence, the thermal ammeter reads:

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

(ii) Form Factor and Peak Factor

Form Factor

The form factor is defined as:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{RMS\ value}{Average\ value}$$

For a half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{I_m/2}{I_m/\pi}$$

Therefore:

$$Form\ Factor=\frac{\pi}{2}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

Peak Factor

The peak factor is defined as:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{Maximum\ value}{RMS\ value}$$

For the half-wave rectified sine wave:

$$Peak\ Factor=\frac{I_m}{I_m/2}$$

Therefore:

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Final Answers

  • Supply voltage: 110 V RMS
  • Peak voltage: 155.56 V
  • Peak current: 3.11 A
  • Moving coil ammeter reading: 0.99 A
  • Thermal ammeter reading: 1.56 A
  • Current waveform: Half-wave rectified sine wave
  • Form factor: 1.57
  • Peak factor: 2.0

Therefore:

$$\boxed{I_{MC}=0.99\ A}$$

$$\boxed{I_{thermal}=1.56\ A}$$

$$\boxed{Form\ Factor=1.57}$$

$$\boxed{Peak\ Factor=2.0}$$

Note: The values 1.1 A, 1.11 and 1.414 are not applicable to the stated half-wave rectified circuit. For the given circuit, the correct values are 1.56 A, 1.57 and 2.0, respectively.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficiency of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers? (6)

(b) A 100 kVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V. Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedence referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q9 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)

(b) Three batteries A, B,and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm (10)

Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(d) A coll having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil! (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x

Sketch and Describe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.

Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.

This converter comprises two main sections:

  • Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
  • Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.

The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.

Advantages

  1. Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
  2. During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.

Disadvantages

  1. High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
  2. Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

With reference to A.C generators:

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an A.C. generator.

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one A.C. generator suddenly fails when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are usually provided for such events?

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator.

(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests?

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance?

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Part (b)

Equivalent Resistance:

  • Equivalent resistance (Req) is the total resistance of the transformer windings referred to either the primary or secondary side.
  • It represents the combined resistance of the primary and secondary windings, taking into account the turns ratio of the transformer.
  • Equivalent resistance is used in calculations related to voltage drop, power loss, and efficiency of the transformer.
  • It is determined from the short circuit test.

In simpler terms: Imagine the transformer windings as a single resistor. The equivalent resistance is the value of that single resistor that would have the same effect on the circuit as the actual windings.

Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships.

Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)

(6) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Series motor has the poorest speed regulation among the three motors.

Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:

$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$

Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.

Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.

Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system.

Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor? (6)

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Bach generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(i) The rms value of the effective voltage and

(ii) The 'breadth factor'. Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduced. (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an induetance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circuit and the voltage drop across the coil? (10)

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x

Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.

(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.

(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Electric propulsion system:

Part (b)

Advantages of Electric propulsion system:

Economic Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
  • They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
  • The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
  • The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
  • The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.

Environmental Reasons

  • Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.

Operational Convenience

  • These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
  • Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
  • They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
  • Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.

Flexibility

  • The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
  • The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
  • Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechamism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and disadvantages of soft starter:

Advantages:

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, avoiding the high current shock during direct starting and reducing the impact on the power grid.
  • The soft starter can reduce mechanical stress and extend the service life of the motor and related mechanical equipment.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with the frequency converter, the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.

Disadvantages:

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process, and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control the various parameters during the starting process like the frequency converter.
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve the operating efficiency.
Q4 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to the provision of a shore electrical supply to a ship:

(a) Sketch an arrangement for taking A.C. shore supply and checks to be carried out prior taking shore connection.

(b) Describe the method of safely connecting the arrangement sketched in (a) to the shore supply

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Checks to be carried out prior to taking shore connection:

  • A visual inspection should be done to identify any visible damage to the shore power cable, such as cuts, fraying, or signs of overheating.
  • Measure the insulation resistance of the shore cable and the ship’s shore connection box to ensure proper insulation.
  • Verify the working condition of fuses by performing a continuity test.
  • Confirm the functionality of indication lamps for clear status monitoring.
  • Ensure that the shore supply circuit breaker is switched off before any connections are made.
  • Confirm that the emergency generator is set to manual mode to avoid unintentional operation during shore supply connection.
  • Inspect the connecting terminals on both the shore connection box and the cable lugs to ensure they are clean, secure, and free from corrosion.
Part (b)

Connecting the Shore Supply:

  • Turn off all non-essential equipment to minimize load requirements.
  • Keep standby diesel generators in manual mode to prevent automatic starting.
  • Announce a potential blackout to notify the crew and prepare them for any temporary power loss.
  • Keep a hand safety torch readily available to handle temporary darkness during the transition.
  • Shut off the ship's power and alternator.
  • Connections of shore cables are to be made only after shutting off the ship's power & alternator.
  • Connect the ship’s hull to the shore earth point to provide proper grounding and ensure safety from electrical faults.
  • Connect the shore supply cables to the circuit breaker and measure the voltage and frequency of the shore supply to confirm compatibility with the ship's electrical system.
  • Verify the phase sequence using the Phase Sequence indicator to avoid incorrect motor rotation or electrical malfunction.
  • Ensure that all lids and circuit breakers are switched off before finalizing connections.
  • Once all conditions are satisfied, switch on the shore supply circuit breaker.
  • Start one motor and confirm the correct direction of rotation to validate the phase sequence.
  • Begin connecting essential systems and equipment to the shore supply one at a time. Monitor the load to ensure it does not exceed the shore supply capacity.
Q5 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Explain the potential hazards if liquid-cooled transformers are used. (6)

(b) What are the losses in transformers? Mention the various factors which affect these losses. In a 25 KVA, 3300/233 V, single phase transformer, the iron and full-load Cu. losses are respectively 350 and 400 w. Calculate the efficiency at half-full load 0.8 power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Potential hazards of using liquid-cooled transformers:

  • The heating of oil during transformer operation can lead to the generation of oil vapors, which are flammable and pose a significant fire risk if exposed to ignition sources.
  • The cooling oil can degrade due to continuous agitation. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil can degrade in marine environments due to continuous agitation and exposure to seawater. This deterioration can lead to overheating of the transformer.
  • The cooling oil requires periodic replacement, necessitating transformer isolation. This may not always be feasible, causing operational disruptions.

(b) Losses in a Transformer

1. Core Loss or Iron Loss: Core loss occurs in the transformer's magnetic core and consists of eddy current loss and hysteresis loss.

  • Eddy Current Loss: When AC is supplied to the primary winding, it produces an alternating magnetizing flux in the transformer. While most of this flux links with the secondary winding to induce emf, some flux links with other conducting parts such as the steel core or transformer body. This induces small circulating currents in those parts, called eddy currents, which dissipate energy as heat.
  • Hysteresis Loss: This loss arises due to the repeated reversal of magnetization in the transformer core. It depends on:
    • Volume and grade of the iron used
    • Frequency of magnetic reversals
    • Magnitude of flux density

2. Copper Loss (I²R Loss): Copper loss occurs due to the ohmic resistance of the transformer windings. It can be expressed as:

  • Primary winding: ( I_1^2 R_1 )
  • Secondary winding: ( I_2^2 R_2 )

Where:

  • ( I_1 ) and ( I_2 ) are currents in the primary and secondary windings
  • ( R_1 ) and ( R_2 ) are resistances of the primary and secondary windings

Key points:

  • Copper loss is proportional to the square of the current.
  • Since current depends on the load, copper loss varies with load.

3. Stray Losses: Stray losses occur due to the leakage flux linking with metallic parts of the transformer.

Note: Stray losses are small compared to copper and iron losses and are often negligible in calculations.

4. Dielectric Loss: Dielectric loss is caused by the transformer oil, which serves as an insulating material. If the insulating oil deteriorates, it leads to energy loss and affects the efficiency of the transformer.

Part (b)

Given:

$$KVA \space = \space 25$$

$$\cos \phi \space = \space 0.8$$

$$W_{iron \space FL} \space = \space 350W \space = \space 0.35kW$$

$$W_{cu \space FL} \space = \space 400W \space = \space 0.4kW$$

$$3300/233 \space = \space step \space down \space transformer$$

To find half load efficiency η

$$Loading \space factor \space (x) \space = \space {{1} \over 2}$$

∴ Half load copper loss = $$x^2 \space W_{cu \space FL}$$

Iron losses remain same

$$= \space \left(1 \over 2 \right)^2 \times 0.4 \space = \space {{0.41} \over 4} \space = \space 0.1 kW$$

$$%η \space = \space {{x \space KVA \space \cos \phi} \over x \space KVA \cos \phi + W_{iron} + x^2 \space W_{cu}} \times 100$$

$$= \space {{(1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8} \over (1/2) \times 25 \times 0.8 + 0.35 + 0.1} \times 100$$

$$%η \space = \space 95.69%$$

Q7 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Describe how protection against short circuit is provided. (6)

(6) Explain how rotating magnetic field is produced in three phase winding with three phase supply. A 4-pole, 3-phase induction motor operates from a supply whose frequency is 50 Hz. Calculate

(i) Speed at which the magnetic field of the stator is rotating,

(ii) Speed of the rotor when the slip is 0.04,

(iii) The frequency of the rotor current when the slip is 0.03. (10)

Appeared In: Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of short-circuit protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Sketch an arrangement showing the principle of a proportional plus integral (P + I) control loop. (6)

(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates. (10)

Appeared In: Oct 2020 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)
Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain the effect of making incorrect phase and starter connections. (6)

(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.

Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Incorrect phase and starter connections in electric motors can cause:

Incorrect Phase Connections:

  • Reversing any two phases in a three-phase motor will reverse its rotation direction.
  • Incorrect phase connections can result in an unbalanced power supply, leading to uneven current distribution across the motor windings.
  • Motors may run noisily, vibrate excessively, or operate at reduced performance levels.

Incorrect Starter Connections:

  • Star-delta starters are commonly used to reduce starting current. Incorrect wiring can prevent the motor from transitioning from star to delta connection, or prevent motor from starting.
  • Incorrect starter connections can cause the motor to draw excessive current, leading to overheating.
  • Continuous operation under incorrect starter conditions can stress the motor components, leading to premature failure.
Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

Explain what is meant by, and the significance of, four of the following terms.

(a) Voltage stabilization

(b) Filter choke

(c) Impedance

(d) Rectification

(e) Grid bias voltage

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Oct 2022 Sep 2022 Aug 2019 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(i) Voltage Stabilization:

This refers to the process of maintaining a constant output voltage despite variations in the input voltage or load current. A stable voltage is required for the proper operation of electronic devices, as many are sensitive to voltage fluctuations. Methods for voltage stabilization include using Zener diodes, which maintain a constant voltage across them once a certain reverse bias voltage (breakdown voltage) is exceeded. Other methods involve using integrated circuits and feedback control loops to dynamically adjust the output voltage.

(ii) Filter Choke:

A filter choke is an inductor used in power supplies to smooth out the pulsating direct current (DC) produced by rectification. Inductors resist changes in current, so the choke helps to reduce the ripple voltage, resulting in a more stable DC output. The effectiveness of the filtering depends on the inductance of the choke and the frequency of the ripple. Often, filter chokes are used in conjunction with capacitors for optimal filtering.

(iii) Impedance:

Impedance is the measure of opposition that a circuit presents to the flow of alternating current (AC). It's a complex quantity that includes both resistance (which converts electrical energy into heat) and reactance (which stores energy in electric or magnetic fields and returns it to the circuit). Reactance, in turn, has two components: capacitive reactance (opposition due to a capacitor) and inductive reactance (opposition due to an inductor). Impedance in AC circuit analysis affects the current flow and power distribution in the circuit. Matching impedance between different parts of a circuit (e.g., a transmitter and an antenna) is essential for efficient power transfer.

(iv) Rectification:

Rectification is the process of converting alternating current (AC), which periodically reverses direction, into direct current (DC), which flows in one direction only. This is essential because many electronic devices require DC power. Rectification is usually achieved using diodes, semiconductor devices that allow current to flow easily in one direction but block it in the opposite direction. Different rectifier configurations (half-wave, full-wave, bridge) exist, each with its own characteristics regarding efficiency and ripple voltage (unwanted AC component in the DC output). Following rectification, filtering is often used to smooth the DC output.

(v) Grid Bias Voltage:

Grid bias voltage is the voltage applied to the grid of a vacuum tube (triode or other multi-element tube) relative to its cathode. This voltage controls the flow of electrons between the cathode and the anode (plate), acting as a gate to regulate the output current. A negative grid bias voltage reduces the flow of current, while a less negative or positive bias increases the current. Grid bias is essential for establishing the operating point of the vacuum tube, determining its amplification characteristics and preventing distortion in the output signal. The concept is analogous to the base-emitter voltage in transistors, controlling the collector current.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to Marine Electrical circuits:

(a) Explain three methods of overcurrent protection for electrical circuit.

(b) Explain with aid of diagram, the meaning of the term inverse current time characteristic.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of overcurrent protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

A thermal overload relay works on the electro-thermal properties of a bimetallic strip. In this system, the bimetallic strip is placed in the motor circuit so that the current flowing through the motor also passes through the relay. As the current increases, the strip heats up, and if the current exceeds a preset limit, the strip bends due to thermal expansion. This action opens the circuit, providing protection against overloading. Thermal overload relays are widely used to safeguard motors from conditions that could result in overheating due to excessive current.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Part (b)

In this type of relay, the opening time is inversely changed with the current. So high currents will operate overcurrent relay faster than lower ones. The relay is designed such that it will react quickly to a large overload and allow a small overload to be present for a longer period.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic cireuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded;

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests?

(b) A 25 kVa single phase transformer 2200:200V has a primary and secondary resistance of 1 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively. Find the equivalent secondary resistance and full load efficiency at 0.8pf lagging, if the iron losses of the transformer are 80% of the full load copper losses.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form.

(b) Two 10 MVA 3 phase Alternator operate in parallel to supply at 0.8 power factor with lagging load of 15 MVA. If the output of one Alternator is 8 MVA at 0.9 lagging.

(i) Calculate the output of second Alternator.

(ii) Calculate the value of Power factor of second Alternator.

Appeared In: Jan 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Briefly describe the maintenance routines carried out for emergency batteries onboard.

(b) A power of 36 W is to be dissipated in a resister connected across the terminals of a battery, having emf of 20V and an internal resistance of 1Ω. Find

(i) What values of resistance will satisfy this condition.

(ii) The terminal voltage of the battery for each of the resistances and

(iii) the total power expenditure in each case.

Appeared In: Dec 2020 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Maintenance routines for emergency batteries onboard:

  • Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion. Clean the battery and keep it dry. Grease terminals with petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
  • Check the electrolyte level. Add distilled water if it's low.
  • Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte using a hydrometer (this is only applicable to certain types of batteries, typically lead-acid).
  • Check the battery voltage to ensure it's within the acceptable range.
  • Newer maintenance-free batteries often have indicators to show battery condition (e.g., green for good, red for discharged).

In addition to these routine checks, maintaining a clean, dry, and well-ventilated battery room. Safety precautions such as wearing appropriate protective gear (gloves, eye protection) are required when handling batteries. Emergency response measures for acid spills should be in place.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain Distribution factor and Pitch factor for Alternator windings.

(b) A 3phase, 4 pole 24 slot alternator has its armature coils short pitched by one slot. Find the distribution factor and pitch factor.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Distribution Factor (Kd):

The distribution factor is a measure of how the EMF induced in a distributed winding compares to the EMF induced if the winding were concentrated in one slot. It is given by the formula:

$$K_{d}=\frac{EMF\:induced\:in\:distributed\:windings}{EMF\:induced\:in\:concentrated\:windings}$$

  • Concentrated Winding: All the coils of a phase under one pole are grouped in a single slot.
  • Distributed Winding: The winding is spread across multiple slots under a pole to achieve a more sinusoidal waveform and reduce harmonics.

Pitch factor (Kp):

The pitch factor accounts for the difference between the resultant EMF of short-pitched coils and the resultant EMF of full-pitched coils. It is defined as:

$$K_{p}=\frac{Resultant\:EMF\:of\:short-pitched\:coil}{Resultant\:EMF\:of\:full-pitched\:coil}$$

  • Full-Pitched Coil: The coil spans 180° electrical (one pole pitch), resulting in maximum induced EMF.
  • Short-Pitched Coil: The coil span is less than 180° electrical, reducing the EMF to minimize harmonics.
Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator.

(b) A 4-pole machine running at 1500 r.p.m. has an armature with 80 slots and 6 conductors per pole. The flux per pole is 6 × 10^6 lines. Determine the terminal e.m.f. of d.c. generator if the coils are lap connected. If the current per conductor is 100 Amps, determine the electrical power.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q1 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 4x

With reference to alkaline batteries used on board ship:

(a) Describe the operation of a battery cell and state the materials used;

(b) Describe how the cells are mounted to form a battery;

(c) State the advantages and disadvantages compared with lead-acid batteries.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The common form of alkaline cell is Nickel cadmium type.

In this type of battery,

  • Cathode: The positive electrode is made up of nickel oxyhydroxide (NiOOH)
  • Anode: Negative electrode is made of cadmium (CD)
  • Electrolyte: Potassium hydroxide (KOH)
  • Separators: Made of rubber Housing made of strong plastic.

A series of alternating positive and negative plates are fully immersed in the electrolyte, separators are inserted between the interleaving plates to prevent contact/ internal short-circuiting. A non-return pressure relief valve is fitted in the housing to release the gases, which evolve especially during the period of overcharge. Relief valves are non-return type to prevent ‘poisoning’ of the electrolyte from the atmosphere.

Discharge: On discharge, nickel hydroxide losses oxygen and is reduced to a lower form, while the cadmium in the negative plates is oxidised to cadmium oxide.

Charging: On charging, the reverse of discharge occurs, the material at the positive terminal is being oxidised to nickel hydroxide and the material at the negative terminal is being reduced to cadmium.

Part (c)

The advantages of alkaline cell compared with a lead acid cell are

  • Longer life span
  • Better charge retention
  • Better operability at higher temperatures
  • Lightweight
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x

With reference to squirrel cage, induction, electric motors

(a) Describe the construction of such a motor

(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor

(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load performance of an induction motor.

Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor

A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.

Main Components

1. Stator (Stationary Part)

  • Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
  • The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
  • When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).

2. Rotor (Rotating Part)

  • Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
  • These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
  • There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.

3. Air Gap

  • A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
  • Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.

4. Shaft and Bearings

  • The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
  • The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.

5. End Shields and Cooling System

  • End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
  • An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.

Characteristics

  • Simple and rugged construction.
  • Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
  • Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed a.c. motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor,

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to electronic control systems

(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control

(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Simple block diagram for Main Engine L.O. temperature control system:

Part (b)

Description of components:

Temperature Sensor:

  • Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.

Transmitter:

  • The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).

Comparator:

  • The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.

Temperature Controller:

  • This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.

Signal Converter:

  • This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.

Actuator (or 3-way Valve):

  • The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alterator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the KVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding are located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c. motor. (6)

(b) A 220 V, d.c. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms, what portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kVAr (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kWAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potencial difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

With reference to Synchronous Motors:

(a) Draw and Explain the principle of operation of Synchronous Motors. (6)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)

Appeared In: Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Principle of operation of a synchronous motor:

  • A synchronous motor has a three-phase stator winding (like an induction motor) and a rotor with a d.c. field winding (or permanent magnets). The stator produces a rotating magnetic field at synchronous speed Ns = 120 f/P.
  • The rotor is excited with d.c., producing a fixed magnetic field. The rotor locks in step with the rotating stator field and rotates at exactly synchronous speed (no slip).
  • The motor is not self-starting: the rotor must be brought up to near synchronous speed (by a starting winding or by an external drive) before the d.c. field is applied, so that the rotor poles can lock onto the rotating field.
  • Once running, the motor maintains synchronous speed regardless of load (up to the pull-out torque). The load angle (torque angle) delta increases with load. By varying the d.c. field excitation, the motor can operate at unity, lagging, or leading power factor (over-excitation gives a leading power factor, useful for power-factor correction).
  • The sketch shows the stator winding, the rotor field winding, the d.c. excitation supply, and the rotating field.
Part (b)

Synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator:

  • Synchronous impedance Zs = open-circuit e.m.f./short-circuit current = 50/200 = 0.25 ohm.
  • Synchronous reactance Xs = sqrt(Zs^2 - Ra^2) = sqrt(0.25^2 - 0.1^2) = sqrt(0.0525) = 0.229 ohm.
  • Induced voltage to deliver 100 A at 0.8 p.f. lagging with terminal voltage 200 V:
  • Assume star-connected. Phase voltage Vph = 200/root 3 = 115.5 V. I = 100 A. cos phi = 0.8, sin phi = 0.6.
  • E = sqrt[(Vph cos phi + I Ra)^2 + (Vph sin phi + I Xs)^2]
  • = sqrt[(115.5 x 0.8 + 100 x 0.1)^2 + (115.5 x 0.6 + 100 x 0.229)^2]
  • = sqrt[(92.4 + 10)^2 + (69.3 + 22.9)^2] = sqrt[102.4^2 + 92.2^2] = sqrt[18987] = 137.8 V per phase.
  • Line value = 137.8 x root 3 = 238.6 V.

So the alternator must be excited to give about 137.8 V per phase (238.6 V line).

Q1 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:

(a) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit.

(b) State why this protection is required.

Appeared In: Jul 2022 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.

When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows

First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):

  • Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
  • Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
  • Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load

Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
  • Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high

Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):

  • Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
  • Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.

Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):

  • Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
  • This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.

Main Breaker Trip

  • If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.

Overload Protection and Alarms

  • Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.

Part (b)

Why Preferential tripping is required:

  • In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
  • The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
  • For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
  • By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an A.C. generator.

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one A.C. generator suddenly fails when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are ususally provided for such events.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x

Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation.

(a) Sketch a reverse power trip

(b) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated

Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Necessity of Reverse Power Protection for Alternators in Parallel Operation:

Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.

Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.

To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.

Part (b)

(i) Sketch of reverse power trip:

(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation

The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.

During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.

A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

With Reference to Power transformers onboard:

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests?

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance?

Appeared In: Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded

(b) Explain how the parameiers are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For sach of the following machinens, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding are located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c motor. (6)

(b) A 220V d.c. shunt motor has an artmature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load. Determine the reducion in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumend to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

$$kW_{t}=8000kW$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$kW_1=6000KW$$

$$\cos\phi_1=0.9$$

To Find (a) kVA2 and cosϕ2

For alternator 1

$$\cos\phi_1=\frac{kW_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$0.9=\frac{6000}{kVA_1}$$

$$kVA_1=6666.667kVA$$

$$\sin\phi_1=\frac{kVAr_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$as\:\cos\phi=0.9;\:\phi=25.84\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi=0.435$$

$$0.435=\frac{kVAr_1}{6666.667}$$

$$kVAr_1=-2905.932\:kVAr$$

$$Now,\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=\frac{kW_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.8=\frac{8000}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$kVA_{t}=10000kVA$$

$$as\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.9\:\Rightarrow\:\phi_{t}=36.86\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi_{t}=0.6$$

$$\sin\phi_{t}=\:\frac{kVAr_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.6=\frac{kVAr_{t}}{10000}$$

$$kVAr_{t}=-6000kVAr$$

For alternator 2:

$$kW_2=kW_{t}-kW_1$$

$$kW_2=8000-6000=2000kW$$

$$kVAr_2=kVAr_{t}-kVAr_1$$

$$kVAr_2=-6000-\left(-2905.932\right)$$

$$kVAr_2=3094.068kVAr$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(kW_2\right)^2+\left(kVAR_2\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(2000\right)^2+\left(-3094.068\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=3684.190kVA$$

$$as,\:\cos\phi_2=\frac{kW_2}{kVA_2}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=\frac{2000}{3684.190}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=0.542$$

$$thus,\:kVA\:rating=3684.19kVA$$

$$power\:fact\lor=0.542$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kVAr (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kWAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three- phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque. (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into ths "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an A.C. gencrator.

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one A.C. generator suddenly fails when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are usually provided for such events?

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x

Sketch and Describe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.

Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.

This converter comprises two main sections:

  • Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
  • Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.

The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.

Advantages

  1. Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
  2. During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.

Disadvantages

  1. High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
  2. Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests?

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance?

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Part (b)

Equivalent Resistance:

  • Equivalent resistance (Req) is the total resistance of the transformer windings referred to either the primary or secondary side.
  • It represents the combined resistance of the primary and secondary windings, taking into account the turns ratio of the transformer.
  • Equivalent resistance is used in calculations related to voltage drop, power loss, and efficiency of the transformer.
  • It is determined from the short circuit test.

In simpler terms: Imagine the transformer windings as a single resistor. The equivalent resistance is the value of that single resistor that would have the same effect on the circuit as the actual windings.

Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator.

(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The terminal voltage is sensed by a 3-ph star-delta stepdown transformer and rectifier to D.C by a 3-ph bridge rectifier bank and smoothened by an L-C filter to represent the actual terminal voltage in a reduced D.C form. This voltage is compared in a Zener reference bridge circuit with the desired voltage provided by the Zener breakdown voltage so that the output gives the error or deviation between the two ( voltage difference between actual and desired value). This error voltage is utilised for the thyristor trigger control in the diode bridge. This thyristor diode bridge is provided with an A.C supply and the output depends on the conduction period of the thyristor which is triggered by the error voltage as mentioned earlier. The output from the thyristor diode bridge goes to the A.C exciter field of the alternator which in turn includes A.C voltage in A.C exciter 3-ph armature winding. This voltage is rectified by a bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft and finally provides excitation for the main alternator field winding. This will generate a 3-ph AC voltage in the main armature winding.

Part (b)

The magnetic field crossing conductors produce relative motion between the two. The magnetic field is created by the field windings of the generator. The conductors are the armature windings of the generator. The relative motion of the magnetic field across the conductors is provided by the rotor shaft. The more magnetic field lines cross conductors the more current is induced in the conductors. The way you get more magnetic field is to put more current through the magnetic field windings so if you want more voltage induced you need to apply more current to the field windings, and If output voltage drops, the AVR applies more current to the field windings, if output voltage increases because of reduce load the AVR reduces current to the field windings

An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.

The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength

Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c generator (6)

(b) A d.c motor takes an armature current of 11A at 480V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate (10)

(a) The speed,

(b) The gross torque developed by the armature

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

A 72 KVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity power factor and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 (lagging) power factor. Calculate the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors which must be connected in the circuit to ensure that the transformer does not become overloaded.

Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

A 72 kVA transformer supplies a heating and lighting load of 12 kW at unity p.f. and a motor load of 70 kVA at 0.766 p.f. lagging. Calculate the minimum capacitor rating so the transformer is not overloaded.

  • Motor: kW = 70 x 0.766 = 53.62 kW. sin phi = sqrt(1 - 0.766^2) = sqrt(0.4132) = 0.6428. Motor kVAr = 70 x 0.6428 = 45.0 kVAr (lagging).
  • Total kW = 12 + 53.62 = 65.62 kW. Total kVAr = 45.0 kVAr.
  • Present total kVA = sqrt(65.62^2 + 45^2) = sqrt(4306 + 2025) = sqrt(6331) = 79.6 kVA. This exceeds 72 kVA, so the transformer is overloaded.
  • To avoid overloading, the total kVA must be reduced to 72 kVA. The kW (65.62 kW) is fixed, so the allowable kVAr is:

kVAr = sqrt(72^2 - 65.62^2) = sqrt(5184 - 4306) = sqrt(878) = 29.6 kVAr.

  • Capacitor kVAr required = 45.0 - 29.6 = 15.4 kVAr.

So the minimum rating of the power-factor improvement capacitors is about 15.4 kVAr (say 16 kVAr).

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) What are the factors which determine the synchronous speed of a motor?

(b) Three conductors fitted side by side in the stator of a salient-pole alternator. Each generates a maximum voltage of 200V (sinusoidal). The angle subtended at the centre of the stator between adjacent conductors is 20 electrical degrees. If the three conductors are connected in series, find:

(a) The r.m.s. value of the effective voltage and

(b) The 'breadth factor' Using the theory that is the basis of this problem, give one reason why three-phase current has been introduce (10)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Dec 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The synchronous speed of an AC motor is determined by two primary factors:

  • Supply Frequency (f)
  • Number of Poles (P)

The relationship between these factors and the synchronous speed (Ns) is given by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where Ns is the synchronous speed in revolutions per minute (RPM), f is the supply frequency in hertz, and P is the number of poles.

For example,

  • A 2-pole motor (P=2) running on a 50 Hz supply (f=50) will have a synchronous speed of 3000 RPM.
  • A 4-pole motor (P=4) on the same supply will have a synchronous speed of 1500 RPM.

In practical applications, especially for induction motors, the actual operating speed is slightly less than the synchronous speed due to a phenomenon known as slip, which is necessary for torque production.

For synchronous motors, the rotor locks in step with the stator's rotating magnetic field, and thus operates precisely at the synchronous speed.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of ammature resistance. (6)

(b) A three-phase induction motor is wound for four poles and is supplied from a 50 Hz system.

Calculate: (10)

(i) The synchronous speed

(ii) The speed of the rotor when the slip is 4 per cent

(iii) The rotor frequency when the speed of the rotor is 600 r/min.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Back electromotive force (back EMF, Eb​) is the voltage generated in the armature of a DC motor when it rotates and cuts the magnetic flux. By Fleming's Right-Hand Rule, this induced emf opposes the applied voltage V, as per Lenz's law. Back EMF acts as a self-regulating mechanism that limits the armature current when the motor is running.

Consider a shunt motor:

$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$

$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$

$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$

$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$

$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$

$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$

$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$

$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$

$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 19x

(a) Compare the effectiveness of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse. (6)

(b) A coil having a resistance of 10 ohm and an inductance of 0.15 H is connected in series with a capacitor across a 100 V, 50 Hz supply. If the current and the voltage are in phase what will be the value of the current in the circut and the voltage drop across the coil?

Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Sep 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Jul 2019 Jun 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Comparision of a current limiting circuit breaker with that of a HRC fuse:

Circuit breaker

HRC fuse

Depends on electromagnetism and switching principle.

Works on electrical and thermal properties of conducting material.

Can be used number of times.

Can't be reused

Show indication for its status.

Doesn't show any indication for its status.

They have auxiliary contact.

They don't have any auxiliary contact.

Response time is more than fuses as 0.02 to 0.05 sec.

Response time is very low as 0.002 sec.

Dependent on ambient temperature.

Doesn't depend on the ambient temperatures.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q2 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

With reference to Marine Electrical circuits:

(a) Explain three methods of overeurrent protection for electrical circuit

(b) Explain with aid of diagram, the meaning of the term inverse current time characteristic.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Three methods of overcurrent protection:

Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.

A thermal overload relay works on the electro-thermal properties of a bimetallic strip. In this system, the bimetallic strip is placed in the motor circuit so that the current flowing through the motor also passes through the relay. As the current increases, the strip heats up, and if the current exceeds a preset limit, the strip bends due to thermal expansion. This action opens the circuit, providing protection against overloading. Thermal overload relays are widely used to safeguard motors from conditions that could result in overheating due to excessive current.

An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.

Part (b)

In this type of relay, the opening time is inversely changed with the current. So high currents will operate overcurrent relay faster than lower ones. The relay is designed such that it will react quickly to a large overload and allow a small overload to be present for a longer period.

Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of arc phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what defects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an altemating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form.

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the KVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circuit and short circuit tests?

(b) A 25 kVa single phase transformer 2200:200V has a primary and secondary resistance of 1Ω and 0.01Ω respectively. Find the equivalent secondary resistance and full load efficiency at 0.8pf lagging. If the iron losses of the transformer are 80% of the full load copper losses.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) Explain Distribution factor and Pitch factor for Alternator windings.

(b) A 3phase, 4 pole 24 slot alternator has its armature coils short pitched by one slot. Find the distribution factor and pitch factor.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Distribution Factor (Kd):

The distribution factor is a measure of how the EMF induced in a distributed winding compares to the EMF induced if the winding were concentrated in one slot. It is given by the formula:

$$K_{d}=\frac{EMF\:induced\:in\:distributed\:windings}{EMF\:induced\:in\:concentrated\:windings}$$

  • Concentrated Winding: All the coils of a phase under one pole are grouped in a single slot.
  • Distributed Winding: The winding is spread across multiple slots under a pole to achieve a more sinusoidal waveform and reduce harmonics.

Pitch factor (Kp):

The pitch factor accounts for the difference between the resultant EMF of short-pitched coils and the resultant EMF of full-pitched coils. It is defined as:

$$K_{p}=\frac{Resultant\:EMF\:of\:short-pitched\:coil}{Resultant\:EMF\:of\:full-pitched\:coil}$$

  • Full-Pitched Coil: The coil spans 180° electrical (one pole pitch), resulting in maximum induced EMF.
  • Short-Pitched Coil: The coil span is less than 180° electrical, reducing the EMF to minimize harmonics.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x

(a) Briefly describe the maintenance routines carried out for emergency batteries onboard.

(b) A power of 36 W is to be dissipated in a resistor connected across the terminals of a battery, having emf of 20V and an internal resistance of 1Ω. Find

(i) What values of resistance will satisfy this condition.

(ii) The terminal voltage of the battery for each of the resistances and

(iii) The total power expenditure in each case

Appeared In: Dec 2020 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Maintenance routines for emergency batteries onboard:

  • Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion. Clean the battery and keep it dry. Grease terminals with petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
  • Check the electrolyte level. Add distilled water if it's low.
  • Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte using a hydrometer (this is only applicable to certain types of batteries, typically lead-acid).
  • Check the battery voltage to ensure it's within the acceptable range.
  • Newer maintenance-free batteries often have indicators to show battery condition (e.g., green for good, red for discharged).

In addition to these routine checks, maintaining a clean, dry, and well-ventilated battery room. Safety precautions such as wearing appropriate protective gear (gloves, eye protection) are required when handling batteries. Emergency response measures for acid spills should be in place.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator.

(6) A 4-pole machine running at 1500 r.p.m. has an armature with 80 slots and 6 conductors per pole. The flux per pole is 6 × 10^6 lines. Determine the terminal e.m.f. of d.c. generator if the coils are lap connected. If the current per conductor is 100 Amps, determine the electrical power.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

Compare methods of obtaining speed regulation of three-phase induction motors generally used in tankers by means of:

(a) Rotor resistance

(b) Cascade system

(c) Pole-changing

Give examples where each system may be employed with advantage.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Jun 2024 Dec 2020 Dec 2019 Oct 2022 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Three main methods of speed regulation for three-phase induction motors used on tankers are rotor resistance, cascade system, and pole-changing.

Each method operates on a different principle and is suited to particular shipboard applications depending on the load, torque, and speed control requirements.

(a) Rotor Resistance Method

Principle:

  • This method is applicable only to slip-ring (wound-rotor) induction motors.
  • Additional resistance is inserted into the rotor circuit through the slip rings.
  • By increasing the rotor resistance, the slip increases, resulting in a reduction in motor speed.

Speed can be controlled smoothly while maintaining high starting torque.

Application & Advantage:

  • Suitable for applications requiring high starting torque and variable speed under load.
  • Provides fine speed control and is simple and cost-effective, though it suffers from power loss in the external resistors and reduced efficiency.

Examples:

  • Cargo winches
  • Crane motors
  • Grain elevators
  • Cargo and ballast pumps (where gradual speed control is required)

(b) Cascade System (Concatenation)

Principle:

  • Two slip-ring induction motors are mechanically coupled.
  • The rotor circuit of the first motor is electrically connected to the stator circuit of the second motor.
  • Depending on the polarity and connection, this system provides up to four discrete speeds.
  • The combined system allows the supply frequency to be divided between the two motors, producing multiple synchronous speeds.

Application & Advantage:

  • Useful where two or more fixed speeds are required without complex circuitry.
  • Offers higher torque at lower speeds and smooth transition between speed stages.
  • Though more complex mechanically, it allows efficient control in heavy-duty machinery requiring multiple fixed speeds.

Examples:

  • Multi-stage centrifugal pumps
  • Compressors
  • Large ventilation fans and machinery requiring distinct speed stages on tankers

(c) Pole-Changing Method

Principle:

  • In this method, the number of poles in the stator winding is altered by reconfiguring the connections.
  • As synchronous speed depends on the number of poles, changing the pole number changes the speed.

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

  • This method is used mainly with squirrel-cage induction motors.

Application & Advantage:

  • Provides two or more discrete fixed speeds (commonly a two-speed arrangement).
  • Mechanically simple, reliable, and requires no external resistors or complex controls.
  • Efficient and well-suited where two-speed operation (high/low) is sufficient for operational flexibility.

Examples:

  • Ballast pumps (high speed for filling, low speed for stripping)
  • Cargo oil pumps
  • Engine room and cargo ventilation fans

Summary:

Method

Motor Type

Speed Control Type

Efficiency

Typical Applications

Rotor Resistance

Slip-ring

Continuous

Low (due to power loss in resistors)

Winches, cranes, cargo pumps

Cascade System

Slip-ring (two motors)

Step-wise (2–4 speeds)

Moderate

Multi-stage pumps, compressors

Pole-Changing

Squirrel-cage

Fixed steps (2 speeds)

High

Ballast pumps, fans, ventilation systems

Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Give a brief outline of the care and maintenance that should be given to the stator and rotor of an A.C. generator.

(b) Explain what is likely to occur if the driving power of one A.C. generator suddenly fails when two generators are running in parallel. What safety devices are usually provided for such

events?

Appeared In: Mar 2025 - 1 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Care and maintenance of stator and rotor in an A.C. Generator:

  • Use a dry, lint-free cloth or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the stator and rotor windings. A vacuum cleaner may be necessary for stubborn deposits. Degreasing liquids can clean windings and terminals.
  • Carefully examine the windings and terminals for signs of damage (cracks, abrasion) or overheating.
  • Ensure that the air passages are clean and unobstructed to allow for proper cooling.
  • Check the condition and oil level of the bearings.
  • Measure the air gap between the rotor and stator using a plastic feeler gauge (the specified gap is 2-3mm).
  • Measure the insulation resistance between the stator and earth, and between stator phases. Remember to disconnect any electronic components that could be damaged by the high voltage of the insulation test.
  • Inspect the rotor slip rings and carbon brushes (if fitted) for even wear and the absence of dampness.
  • Keep the generator excitation transformer, AVR components, and rotating diodes clean and free of dirt. Use special contact grease on diode connections to prevent electrolytic action.
  • Bake the windings at a temperature not exceeding 43°C to eliminate moisture.
Part (b)

What Happens if the Driving Power of One A.C. Generator Fails in Parallel Operation:

When two A.C. generators are running in parallel, they share the total load based on their power settings and capacities. Both generators operate at the same frequency, and their outputs remain synchronized. However, if the driving power of one generator (e.g., Generator A) suddenly fails, it can no longer supply active power to the load. In this case, Generator A will begin to draw power from the other generator (Generator B) to keep its rotor spinning. This condition, known as "motorizing," occurs because the failed generator essentially acts as a motor.

This situation is hazardous because the affected generator (Generator A) will consume power instead of generating it, leading to increased current flow in its windings. This excessive current can cause overheating and damage to the windings and other components. Additionally, the load previously shared by both generators will now be entirely shifted to Generator B. If Generator B is not designed to handle the full load, it may trip due to overloading, potentially leading to a complete blackout of the system.

To prevent such dangerous conditions, a reverse power relay is installed in each generator. This relay continuously monitors the direction of power flow. If it detects that power is flowing into the generator (indicating reverse power), the relay immediately trips the generator, disconnecting it from the system. The reverse power trip is an essential safety feature that protects the generator from damage. However, even with this protection, the sudden transfer of load to the remaining generator can still cause voltage and frequency fluctuations, which must be managed to maintain reliable operation.

Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x

With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram or a pole change motor

(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Circuit diagram for a pole change motor:

Part (b)

Speed Change and Braking Mechanism:

Speed Change:

The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:

$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$

Where,

Ns = Synchronous speed.

f = Frequency of power supply.

P = number of poles.

Methods to Achieve Speed Change:

Multiple Stator Windings:

  • Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.

Consequent Pole Method:

  • A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.

Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):

  • Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.

Braking Mechanism:

Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.

Plugging:

  • Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.

Rheostatic Braking:

  • In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.

Regenerative Braking:

  • For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain how the efficiency and regulation of a transformer can be assessed by open circult and short circuit tests?

(b) What is meant by equivalent resistance?

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Oct 2022 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jan 2025 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Assessing transformer efficiency:

Open Circuit Test: One winding is connected to a normal voltage supply, while the other is left open-circuited. The input power (P₀) is measured using a wattmeter, and the no-load current (I₀) is measured with an ammeter. Voltmeters measure the primary and secondary voltages. The wattmeter reading directly indicates the core losses (iron losses), which are primarily due to hysteresis and eddy currents in the transformer core. These losses are relatively constant regardless of the load.

Short Circuit Test: One winding is short-circuited through an ammeter, and a reduced voltage is applied to the other winding. The applied voltage is adjusted to circulate the full-load current through the short-circuited winding. Because the core flux is proportional to the applied voltage, and the voltage is kept low, the core losses are negligible. The wattmeter reading primarily represents the copper losses (I²R losses) in the windings. These losses are dependent on the load current.

Part (b)

Equivalent Resistance:

  • Equivalent resistance (Req) is the total resistance of the transformer windings referred to either the primary or secondary side.
  • It represents the combined resistance of the primary and secondary windings, taking into account the turns ratio of the transformer.
  • Equivalent resistance is used in calculations related to voltage drop, power loss, and efficiency of the transformer.
  • It is determined from the short circuit test.

In simpler terms: Imagine the transformer windings as a single resistor. The equivalent resistance is the value of that single resistor that would have the same effect on the circuit as the actual windings.

Q5 (10 Marks) Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 13x

With reference to the condition monitoring of electrical machinery:

(a) State TWO important parameters that may be recorded;

(b) Explain how the parameters are measured and what detects may be revealed.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Condition Monitoring of Electrical Machinery

Part (a)

Important Parameters That May Be Recorded

Two important parameters recorded for condition monitoring of electrical machinery on board a ship are:

1. Temperature

Monitoring the temperature of electrical machinery is essential because it provides valuable information about the health and operating condition of the equipment.

Electrical machines such as motors, generators, and transformers generate heat during normal operation. By recording and analysing temperature trends, abnormal heating patterns or excessive temperature rise can be detected.

Excessive temperature may indicate:

  • Inadequate cooling
  • Insulation degradation
  • Bearing problems
  • Overloading

If not corrected in time, overheating can lead to serious damage and eventual failure of the machinery.

2. Vibration

Vibration analysis is another important parameter used for monitoring the condition of rotating electrical machinery.

Vibration sensors measure:

  • Magnitude
  • Frequency
  • Vibration patterns

Excessive vibration often indicates mechanical or electrical faults such as:

  • Misalignment
  • Imbalance
  • Bearing wear
  • Mechanical looseness

By continuously monitoring vibration levels, deviations from normal operating conditions can be detected early, allowing corrective maintenance before major damage occurs.

Part (b)

Measurement of Parameters and Defects Revealed

1. Vibration Measurement and Defects Revealed

Vibration is measured using transducers such as:

  • Accelerometers
  • Velocity pick-ups
  • Seismic transducers

These sensors are mounted on:

  • Machine casing
  • Bearing housing
  • Rotor assembly

They detect vibration signals at various frequencies, which are analysed to identify specific faults.

Defects Identified Through Vibration Analysis

  • Imbalance: A vibration peak at shaft speed frequency (1X) indicates rotor imbalance.
  • Misalignment: Vibrations at 1X, 2X, and 3X shaft speed frequencies usually indicate misalignment.
  • Bearing Damage: High-frequency peaks between 2 kHz and 5 kHz (depending on shaft speed and transducer resonance) indicate bearing defects.
  • Electrical Problems: Synchronous frequency components and sidebands in the vibration signal suggest electrical faults.
  • Gear Damage: Gear mesh frequency and its harmonics (depending on shaft speed and number of gear teeth) indicate gear defects.
  • Cracked or Bent Shaft: Vibrations at 2X and 3X shaft speed frequencies may indicate a cracked or bent shaft.

2. Temperature Measurement and Defects Revealed

Temperature is measured using:

  • Thermocouples
  • Infrared cameras

Sensors are installed near:

  • Bearings
  • Windings
  • Electrical components

Temperature monitoring helps detect abnormal heating and potential failure.

Defects Revealed Through Temperature Monitoring

  • Bearing Failure: Rising bearing temperature indicates increased friction and possible bearing damage.
  • Insulation Deterioration: Temperature rise on the surface of insulating materials may indicate insulation breakdown.
  • Overload or Loose Connections: Hot spots detected on electrical panels using infrared cameras may indicate overload conditions or loose electrical connections.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding are located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c. motor. (6)

(b) A 220 V, d.c. shunt motor has an armature resistance of 0.5 ohm and an armature current of 40 A on full load Determine the reduction in flux necessary for a 50 per cent reduction in speed. The torque for both conditions can be assumed to remain constant. (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Part (b)
Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

$$kW_{t}=8000kW$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$kW_1=6000KW$$

$$\cos\phi_1=0.9$$

To Find (a) kVA2 and cosϕ2

For alternator 1

$$\cos\phi_1=\frac{kW_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$0.9=\frac{6000}{kVA_1}$$

$$kVA_1=6666.667kVA$$

$$\sin\phi_1=\frac{kVAr_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$as\:\cos\phi=0.9;\:\phi=25.84\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi=0.435$$

$$0.435=\frac{kVAr_1}{6666.667}$$

$$kVAr_1=-2905.932\:kVAr$$

$$Now,\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=\frac{kW_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.8=\frac{8000}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$kVA_{t}=10000kVA$$

$$as\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.9\:\Rightarrow\:\phi_{t}=36.86\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi_{t}=0.6$$

$$\sin\phi_{t}=\:\frac{kVAr_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.6=\frac{kVAr_{t}}{10000}$$

$$kVAr_{t}=-6000kVAr$$

For alternator 2:

$$kW_2=kW_{t}-kW_1$$

$$kW_2=8000-6000=2000kW$$

$$kVAr_2=kVAr_{t}-kVAr_1$$

$$kVAr_2=-6000-\left(-2905.932\right)$$

$$kVAr_2=3094.068kVAr$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(kW_2\right)^2+\left(kVAR_2\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(2000\right)^2+\left(-3094.068\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=3684.190kVA$$

$$as,\:\cos\phi_2=\frac{kW_2}{kVA_2}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=\frac{2000}{3684.190}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=0.542$$

$$thus,\:kVA\:rating=3684.19kVA$$

$$power\:fact\lor=0.542$$

Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x

(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)

(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potencial difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest.

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Preference for 60 Hz and dangers of running 50 Hz equipment from 60 Hz:

  • 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
  • Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
  • Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
  • The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
  • Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
  • Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
  • The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
  • In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
Part (b)

Ring main, 900 m long, supplied at A at 220 V. Load 45 A at B (240 m from A), load 78 A at C (580 m from A). Resistance 0.25 ohm/km (lead and return).

  • Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
  • Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
  • Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
  • Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
  • Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:

0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y

0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)

0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x

0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.

  • y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
  • So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
  • Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
  • Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
  • Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
  • (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
  • The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.

So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) Show how the power that is transferred across the air gap of the three-phase induction motor is represented. Explain the terms. What portion of this is useful power? (6)

(b) A 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 (lagging) power factor is jointly supplied by two alternators A and B. The kW load on A is 150 kW and the kVAr load on B is 150 kV Ar (lagging). Determine the kW load on B, the kWAr load on A, the power factor of operation on each machine and the current loading of each machine.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018 Sep 2025
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Power transferred across the air gap of a three-phase induction motor:

  • The stator input power P1 is the electrical power drawn from the supply.
  • Stator losses (stator copper loss and iron/core loss) are subtracted to give the air-gap power Pg (also called the rotor input power), which is the power transferred across the air gap to the rotor by electromagnetic induction.
  • Pg = P1 - stator losses.
  • The air-gap power is divided into two parts: the rotor copper loss (I2^2 R2) and the mechanical power developed (gross mechanical power Pm).
  • Pg = rotor copper loss + gross mechanical power.
  • Rotor copper loss = s x Pg (where s is the slip), and gross mechanical power = (1 - s) x Pg.
  • The useful (shaft) power is the gross mechanical power minus the rotational losses (friction, windage and iron losses in the rotor). So the useful power = Pg(1 - s) - rotational losses.
  • The useful power is the portion that appears as mechanical output at the shaft.
Part (b)

Two alternators A and B supplying a 440 V load of 400 kW at 0.8 p.f. lagging:

  • Total load: kW = 400 kW. Total kVA = 400/0.8 = 500 kVA. Total kVAr (lagging) = 500 x 0.6 = 300 kVAr (since sin phi = 0.6).
  • Given: kW on A = 150 kW; kVAr on B = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • kW on B = 400 - 150 = 250 kW.
  • kVAr on A = 300 - 150 = 150 kVAr (lagging).
  • Machine A: kVA = sqrt(150^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(45000) = 212.1 kVA. p.f. = 150/212.1 = 0.707 lagging.
  • Machine B: kVA = sqrt(250^2 + 150^2) = sqrt(85000) = 291.5 kVA. p.f. = 250/291.5 = 0.858 lagging.
  • Current loading: I = S / (root 3 x V).
  • I_A = 212100 / (1.732 x 440) = 212100 / 762.1 = 278.3 A.
  • I_B = 291500 / 762.1 = 382.5 A.

So A supplies 150 kW at 0.707 p.f. lagging, current 278 A; B supplies 250 kW at 0.858 p.f. lagging, current 382 A.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 5x

(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)

(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)

(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f of 50V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V (10)

Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) A direct-connected alternator

is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.

(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.

The arrangement ensures stable performance with:

  • Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
  • Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Sketch a circuit diagram of a push button direct on line contactor starter for a three phase incorporating overload and short circuit protection.

(b) Indicate on a sketch of the typical characteristic curves of current and torque against Speed, disadvantages of a direct on line start squirrel cage induction motor.

Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

In the D.O.L starter circuit:

  • The main supply is connected to the contactor, which, when energized, connects the A.C motor to the supply.
  • The START push button activates the contactor, allowing the motor to start running.
  • Overload protection (O/L Relay) and Single Phase Protection Relay are connected in series with the contactor in the control circuit.
  • If any protection device detects a fault (e.g., overload or single phasing), the contactor drops, opening the normally closed (NC) contacts and stopping the motor.
  • The STOP push button also causes the contactor to drop, stopping the motor.
  • The START and STOP push buttons can be located remotely for remote operation of the motor.
  • The contactor has a solenoid with normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts, facilitating the control system's requirements.
  • The main electrical equipment is connected to the supply through the contacts of the contactor, ensuring controlled motor operation and protection against faults.
Part (b)

Disadvantages of DOL starter:

  • Direct-on-line starting of a squirrel cage induction motor results in a high inrush current, typically 6 to 8 times the rated full-load current. This high current can cause voltage dips and disturbances in the electrical system, especially when starting large motors. It can also lead to excessive heating of the motor windings and reduced motor life.

  • The direct-on-line starting method produces high starting torque, which can be excessive for some applications. This high torque can cause mechanical stress on the motor

  • The high starting current of a direct-on-line start motor can cause voltage fluctuations in the electrical system. These voltage fluctuations can affect other sensitive equipment connected to the same electrical network, potentially causing malfunctions or disruptions.

  • Direct-on-line starting is not suitable for applications where a soft start or controlled acceleration is required. It is also not recommended for motors that are frequently started and stopped, as the high starting current and torque can cause premature motor failure.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.

(a) Rectifier circuit

(b) Amplifier circuit

(c) Oscillator circuit

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Rectifier Circuit

  • Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
  • Input: AC signal.
  • Output: DC signal.
  • Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
  • Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
  • Feedback: No feedback involved.
  • Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.

The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.

(b) Amplifier Circuit

  • Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
  • Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
  • Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
  • Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
  • Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
  • Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
  • Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.

This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.

(c) Oscillator Circuit

  • Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
  • Input: DC supply.
  • Output: AC signal.
  • Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
  • Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
  • Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
  • Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 2x

What are the conditions for producing sustained oscillations? Classify oscillations with respect to frequency range, principle involved, etc. It is possible to produce oscillations with RC networks in phase shift oscillator. Discuss in detail.

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Conditions for Sustained Oscillations:

To produce sustained oscillations in a typical tank circuit, the following conditions must be met:

  1. Energy Compensation: The amount of energy supplied must compensate for the losses in the tank circuit and match the energy drawn by the load.
  2. Frequency Match: The applied energy should be of the same frequency as that of the natural oscillations in the tank circuit.
  3. Positive Feedback: The amplified energy must be in phase with the existing oscillations, i.e., positive feedback should exist within the amplifier loop.

Classification of Oscillators:

Oscillators can be classified based on the method of feedback and frequency range as follows:

Oscillator Type

Feedback Method

Frequency Range

Tuned Collector Oscillator

Transformer Coupling

10 kHz – 1000 kHz

Hartley Oscillator

Inductive Coupling

100 Hz – 1 MHz

Colpitt's Oscillator

Capacitive Coupling

100 Hz – 1 MHz

Phase Shift Oscillator

RC Network

100 Hz – 10 kHz

Wein Bridge Oscillator

Bridge Network

10 Hz – 30 kHz

Crystal Oscillator

Piezoelectric Crystal

100 kHz – 100 MHz

$$if\:R_1=R_2=R_3=R;\:and$$

$$C_1=C_2=C_3;\:then$$

$$frequency\:of\:oscillation;\:f_{o}=\frac{1}{2\pi RC\sqrt6}$$

Phase Shift Oscillator (Using RC Network):

  • A Phase Shift Oscillator uses a single transistor amplifier along with a RC phase shift network.
  • The transistor amplifier provides a 180° phase shift, and the RC network provides another 180° phase shift, resulting in a total 360° phase shift (or 0° net phase difference).
  • This ensures positive feedback, which is a key requirement for sustained oscillations.

Advantages:

  • No need for inductors or transformers.
  • Capable of producing very low frequencies.
  • Provides good frequency stability.

Disadvantage:

  • Suitable only for low power output applications.
Q4 (16 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.

(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.

(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched on.

(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:

(i) Error operated:

(ii) Functional.

Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Voltage time graph showing voltage dip:

The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.

(ii) Effect on small power installation:

When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.

The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.

Part (b)

(i) Error-Operated Voltage Control:

In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.

Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.

(ii) Functional Voltage Control:

This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.

Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.

Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

Which of the following devices will prevent a DC generator from becoming motorized?

(a) Over current relay

(b) Motorization trip

(c) Reverse power relay

(d) Reverse current relay. Why the remaining options were not considered.

Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The correct answer is: (d) Reverse current relay

A reverse current relay is specifically designed to prevent a DC generator from becoming motorized. If the generator loses its prime mover (e.g., due to fuel loss), its voltage drops. When operating in parallel, the other generator(s) in the system will cause current to flow back into the faulty generator, leading to reverse current. The reverse current relay detects this and trips the circuit breaker, protecting the generator from damage.

Reasons for not considering other options:

Overcurrent Relay (a):

  • This relay is designed to trip the generator during high overcurrent events, such as those caused by a short circuit. Motoring of a DC generator does not result in an overcurrent condition, so an overcurrent relay cannot detect or prevent motorization.

Motoring Trip (b):

  • Motoring trips are primarily used in motors where reverse operation occurs due to reverse flow in connected machinery, such as pumps. While a motoring trip could detect motoring, it typically responds after the motoring has occurred, which may already cause damage. Therefore, it is unsuitable for preventing DC generator motorization.

Reverse Power Relay (c):

  • Reverse power relays work based on power flow direction and are designed for AC systems. In a DC generator, the current is unidirectional, so a reverse power relay cannot be used effectively in this context.
Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form.

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Describe the normal criteria used for setting thermal protection relays and its advantage compared to magnetic types. (6)

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35Ω. When connected to a 220V, 50Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Thermal protection relays

are designed for sustained overcurrent protection, typically set between 105-120% of the full load current with a time delay. They are not intended for momentary overcurrents.

The overcurrent setting depends on the following:

  • The electrical system's maximum continuous load capacity determines the relay settings to ensure the system operates without tripping under normal conditions.
  • The relay settings are influenced by the insulation class and its capacity to withstand elevated temperatures.
  • The amount of power consumption and heat generated during normal operation is evaluated to set the relay accurately.
  • The relay takes into account the cooling mechanism in place to ensure that heat dissipation during operation is factored into the thermal protection settings.

Advantages of Thermal relays over Magnetic relays:

  • Thermal relays provide a time delay, preventing tripping from momentary overcurrents that might not cause actual damage. Magnetic relays respond much faster.
  • Thermal relays operate based on the heat generated by an overcurrent, offering a more accurate reflection of the actual thermal stress on the system. Magnetic relays respond to the magnitude of the current, irrespective of heat generation.
  • Thermal relays are more economical because they use bimetals instead of more expensive magnetic solenoid coils.
  • Thermal relays are effective for sustained overcurrents, providing protection that is independent of other factors like the system voltage or magnetic field fluctuations.
Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q8 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)

(a) Electric motors contain a stationary member as well as a rotating member. For each of the following machines, identify in which part of the motor three field winding and the armature winding are located: three phase induction motor, three phase synchronous motor, d.c. motor. (6)

(b) An 18.65-kW, 4-pole, 50-Hz, 3-phase induction motor has friction and windage losses of 2.5 percent of the output. The full-load slip is 4%. Compute for full load

(a) the rotor Cu loss

(b) the rotor input

(c) the shaft torque

(d) the gross electromagnetic torque.

Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Motor

Field

Armature

3-phase induction motor

Rotor

Stator

3-phase synchronous motor

Rotor

Stator

DC motor

Stator

Rotor

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations

(a) Describe an accurate method of comparing capacities of two condensers. (6)

(b) A diode valve, having the following characteristic

Ia (milliamperes) 0 5.5 13 22 32 42 52 59 63

Va (volts) 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

Is connected in series with a resistor of 10,000 Ohms to a 240 V d.c. supply. If a resistor of 40,000 Ohms is connected between the anode and cathode, determine the current through the diode.

Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An accurate method to compare the capacitances of two capacitors involves using a Wheatstone Bridge configured for capacitance measurement, commonly known as a De Sauty Bridge.

The De Sauty Bridge is an AC bridge circuit specifically designed to compare two capacitors. It consists of four arms: two containing the capacitors under comparison and two containing known resistors. The bridge is balanced by adjusting these resistors until no current flows through the detector, indicating that the ratio of the capacitances is equal to the ratio of the resistances.

At balance, the ratio of the capacitances is inversely proportional to the ratio of the resistances:

$$\frac{C_2}{C_3}=\frac{R_2}{R_1}$$

If one capacitor's value is known, the other's capacitance can be calculated using this relationship.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = VmSin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q1 (16 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Deseribe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies for these problems.

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors, of the three phase a.c. induction type, in respect of the following:

(a) rotor construction;

(b) torque characteristics;

(c) speed variation.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q5 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 2x

Sketch and describe an arrangement for automatic connection of emergency batteries upon loss of main power. Include in your answer:

(a) Means of obtaining d.c. charging supply from a.c. mains:

(b) A method of maintaining charge on lead acid batteries;

(c) The arrangement to check that batteries operate at loss of main power

(d) The length of time for which emergency batteries of passenger and cargo ships must provide power.

Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
  • The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
  • When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
  • A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
  • ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
  • When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
  • Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
  • A test switch provides means for testing the battery.
Part (a)

Means of charging DC from AC:

from the mainline through a bridge rectifier, which converts AC to DC.

Part (b)

Method of maintaining charge:

  • Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
  • Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.
Part (c)

To check operation at loss of main power:

test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made

Part (d)

Duration:

for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI Test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements?

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Methods of Testing HV Insulation

Megger Testing:

  • This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.

Polarization Index (PI) Test:

  • This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
  • The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.

3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.

Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
  • Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is meant by negative and positive feed backs? Explain the characteristics of negative feed back. (6)

(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates.

Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Negative and positive feedback:

Negative Feedback: When a portion of the output signal is fed back to the input in such a way that it is out of phase with the input signal and opposes it.

  • Reduces system gain, improves stability, and increases accuracy.
  • Commonly used in control systems, amplifiers, and oscillators to stabilise performance.

Positive Feedback: When a portion of the output signal is fed back to the input in such a way that it is in phase with the input signal and adds to it.

  • Increases system gain, but can lead to instability and oscillations.
  • Used in circuits like regenerative amplifiers and oscillators.

Characteristics of negative feedback:

  • Negative feedback promotes stability by correcting deviations, helping the system settle to a stable state or equilibrium.
  • The output impedance of the system becomes very low, making the closed-loop amplification nearly independent of the load.
  • The system's gain remains stable and less sensitive to variations in component values or external disturbances.
  • Negative feedback extends the range of frequencies over which the system can operate effectively.
  • It ensures that only the right amount of correction is applied, preventing overcompensation.
  • The system becomes more precise and reliable, with reduced distortion and noise.
  • The response time to input changes is improved, leading to better dynamic performance.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) A 4-pole machine running at 1500 r.p.m. has an armature with 80 slots and 6 conductors per pole. The flux per pole is 6 × 10^6 lines. Determine the terminal e.m.f. of d.c. generator if the coils are lap connected. If the current per conductor is 100 Amps, determine the electrical power.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors of the three phase a.c induction type, in respect to the following:

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Troque characteristics

(c) Speed variations

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source

(b) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming rach of the following problems.

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insualtion in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies of these problesm

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an induction motor

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an induction motor in installed condition

(c) What is the purpose of "Fuse back-up protection" provided to an induction motor

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum running torque in an induction motor.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 16x

(a) Explain the signiticance of the root-mean square value of an alternating current or voltaue waveform. Define the form factor of such a wave form.

(b) A total load of 8000 kW at 0.8 power factor is supplied by two alternators in parallel. One alternator supplies 6000kW at 0.9 power factor. Find the kVA rating of the other alternator and the power factor

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Feb 2021 Dec 2020 Oct 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Sep 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The root-mean-square (RMS) value of an alternating current (AC) or voltage waveform represents the equivalent DC value that would produce the same heating effect in a resistive load. In simpler terms, it's the effective value of the varying AC signal. For a sinusoidal waveform, the RMS value is 0.707 times the maximum (peak) value (Irms = 0.707 * Imax or Irms = Imax / √2). Ammeters and voltmeters typically measure the RMS value of current and voltage, respectively. Unless otherwise stated, values of AC current and voltage are assumed to be RMS values in electrical engineering.

The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.

Part (b)

Given:

$$kW_{t}=8000kW$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$kW_1=6000KW$$

$$\cos\phi_1=0.9$$

To Find (a) kVA2 and cosϕ2

For alternator 1

$$\cos\phi_1=\frac{kW_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$0.9=\frac{6000}{kVA_1}$$

$$kVA_1=6666.667kVA$$

$$\sin\phi_1=\frac{kVAr_1}{kVA_1}$$

$$as\:\cos\phi=0.9;\:\phi=25.84\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi=0.435$$

$$0.435=\frac{kVAr_1}{6666.667}$$

$$kVAr_1=-2905.932\:kVAr$$

$$Now,\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.8$$

$$\cos\phi_{t}=\frac{kW_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.8=\frac{8000}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$kVA_{t}=10000kVA$$

$$as\:\cos\phi_{t}=0.9\:\Rightarrow\:\phi_{t}=36.86\degree$$

$$so,\:\sin\phi_{t}=0.6$$

$$\sin\phi_{t}=\:\frac{kVAr_{t}}{kVA_{t}}$$

$$0.6=\frac{kVAr_{t}}{10000}$$

$$kVAr_{t}=-6000kVAr$$

For alternator 2:

$$kW_2=kW_{t}-kW_1$$

$$kW_2=8000-6000=2000kW$$

$$kVAr_2=kVAr_{t}-kVAr_1$$

$$kVAr_2=-6000-\left(-2905.932\right)$$

$$kVAr_2=3094.068kVAr$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(kW_2\right)^2+\left(kVAR_2\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=\sqrt{\left(2000\right)^2+\left(-3094.068\right)^2}$$

$$kVA_2=3684.190kVA$$

$$as,\:\cos\phi_2=\frac{kW_2}{kVA_2}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=\frac{2000}{3684.190}$$

$$\cos\phi_2=0.542$$

$$thus,\:kVA\:rating=3684.19kVA$$

$$power\:fact\lor=0.542$$

Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?

(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Peak rectifier (peak detector):

  • A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
  • Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
  • Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
  • If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
Part (b)

Battery-charging circuit:

  • The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
  • The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
  • For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
  • The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
  • The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

(a) Why is it important to maintain high efficieney of operation and low values of voltage regulation for power transformers?

(b) A 100 KVA transformer has 400 turns on the primary and 80 turns on the secondary. The primary and secondary resistances are 0.3 Ω and 0.01 Ω respectively, and the corresponding leakage reactances are 1.1 Ω and 0.035 Ω respectively. The supply voltage is 2200 V Calculate:

(i) The equivalent impedance referred to the primary circuit

(ii) The voltage regulation and secondary terminal voltage for full load having a power factor of (i) 0.8 lagging and (ii) 0.8 leading.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Transformers with high efficiency

minimize energy losses (copper losses due to winding resistance and iron losses due to core magnetization). This translates directly to lower operating costs and reduced environmental impact due to less wasted energy. High-efficiency transformers typically achieve 95.5% efficiency for 5 kVA units and up to 97.5% for units up to 1 MVA.

Lower energy losses mean less heat is generated within the transformer. This reduces the risk of overheating, extending the lifespan of the equipment and preventing potential fire hazards. Overheating can damage the insulation and reduce the lifespan of the transformer. Lower operating temperatures contribute to enhanced reliability and a longer operational life for the transformer.

Low voltage regulation ensures that the output voltage remains relatively constant even under varying load conditions. This stability is essential for the stable operation of equipment connected to the transformer. Voltage fluctuations can lead to wear and tear on connected equipment. Maintaining a constant voltage extends the lifespan of the equipment.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x

(a) List the factors that determine the starting torgue of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque.

(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 3S ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn mto the "full-in' position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both postions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in Weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor:

  • Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
  • Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
  • Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
  • Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
  • The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
  • A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.

Comparison with Rated Torque:

Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.

While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.

Part (b)

Given:

$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$

$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$

$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$

$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$

When plunger is out (initial stage),

$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$

$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$

$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$

$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$

$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$

$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$

Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H

When "Full-in",

$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$

$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$

$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$

$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$

$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived

(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.

Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm

Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm

Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.

Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Delta-star and star-delta conversion equations:

  • The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
  • For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
  • Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:

R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:

R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)

  • And the star-to-delta conversion:

R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3

R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1

R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2

  • For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
Part (b)

Three batteries A, B, C with negative terminals common. Resistor 0.5 ohm between A and B, 0.3 ohm between B and C.

  • Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
  • Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
  • Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.

105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)

  • Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)

  • At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.

2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)

2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)

  • From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
  • Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500

140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500

2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.

  • Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
  • Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
  • Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
  • Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
  • Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
  • Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.

So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).

Q1 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x

What is a marine High Voltage System? Sketch and describe a Ship board high voltage switch board and its protective devices (16)

Appeared In: Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Features of Marine HV System:

  • Neutral is always earthed through a Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) to limit earth fault current.
  • HV systems are more expensive than LV systems due to the need for special insulation, protective gear, and safety features.
  • They carry a higher arc-flash hazard, necessitating stringent operational and maintenance safety procedures.
  • The general layout of an HV system is similar to an LV system, but includes additional protective and safety components.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Protective Devices in Marine HV Systems:

Protective Device

Function

Overcurrent (Instantaneous)

Trips the breaker immediately on high current to protect equipment.

OCIT (Overcurrent Inverse Time)

Shortens the trip delay as overcurrent magnitude increases.

Earth Leakage

Detects small earth faults and trips the system to prevent damage or fire.

Reverse Power Protection

Prevents motorization of generators by detecting reverse current flow.

Undervoltage Protection

Trips equipment if the supply voltage drops below safe limits.

Overtemperature Protection

Used to monitor cable and equipment temperatures to prevent overheating.

Differential Fault Protection

Compares phase currents (inlet and outlet); trips if imbalance detected.

Thermal Overload (Thermal O/L)

Trips on excessive current over time to protect insulation and windings.

Locked Rotor Protection

Detects if a motor rotor is stalled by checking imbalance across phases.

Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

What is soft starting of an Induction Motor? Describe with a circuit using thyristors used for soft starting. Discuss its advantages and disadvantages (16)

Appeared In: Mar 2025 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Mar 2018 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The soft starter is a type of motor starter that uses the voltage reduction technique to reduce the voltage during the starting of the motor. The soft starter offers a gradual increase in the voltage during the motor startup. This will allow the motor to slowly accelerate and gain speed in a smooth fashion. It prevents any mechanical wear and tear due to the sudden supply of full voltage.

The torque of an induction motor is directly proportional to the square of the current, and the current depends on the supply voltage. So, the supply voltage can be used to control the starting torque. In a normal motor starter, applying full voltage to the motor generates maximum starting torque, which poses a mechanical hazard to the motor.

The main component used for controlling the voltage in a soft starter is a thyristor. It is a controlled rectifier that starts the conduction of the current flow in only one direction when a gate pulse is applied, called the firing pulse. In a three-phase induction motor, two SCRs are connected in an anti-parallel configuration along each phase of the motor, making it a total of 6 SCRs. These are controlled using a separate circuitry that can be a PID controller or a microcontroller. The logic circuitry is powered from the mains using a rectifier, as shown in the figure.

The angle of firing pulse determined how much of the input voltage cycle should be allowed through it. Since AC swings between maximum and minimum peak, forming a complete 360-degree cycle, we can use the angle of the firing pulse to switch the thyristor for a specific duration and control the supplied voltage.

The firing pulses can vary between 0deg to 180deg. The decrease in the angle of the firing pulse increases the conduction period of the thyristor, thus allowing high voltage through it.

Once the motor attains its full rated speed (at o deg firing angle), the thyristors are completely bypassed using a bypass contractor under normal operation. It increases the efficiency of the soft starter since the SCR stops firing. During motor stops, the SCR takes control and starts firing in an orderly fashion to reduce supply voltage.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Soft Starter

Advantages

  • The soft starter starts the motor by gradually increasing the voltage, thereby reducing starting current, avoiding the high current shock associated with direct starting, and minimizing voltage dips on the power system.
  • It provides smooth acceleration of the motor and reduces mechanical stress on shafts, couplings, gears, belts, and other connected equipment, thereby extending the service life of the motor and machinery.
  • It increases motor life by reducing both thermal stress and mechanical stress during starting.
  • It eliminates switching transients that occur in conventional starters such as star-delta starters.
  • It offers adjustable starting characteristics, including current limit, ramp time, and initial voltage.
  • The soft starter has a simple structure, high reliability, and is easy to install and maintain.
  • Compared with a frequency converter (VFD), the soft starter has a lower cost and is particularly suitable for projects with limited budgets.
  • It is suitable for applications such as pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors, marine machinery, and other motor-driven equipment.

Disadvantages

  • The soft starter can only control the start and stop process and cannot adjust the speed of the motor during operation.
  • Although the starting current can be reduced, it cannot accurately control various motor parameters during starting like a frequency converter (VFD).
  • After the motor starts, the soft starter basically no longer works and cannot improve operating efficiency during normal running conditions.
  • It has a higher cost than DOL and star-delta starters.
  • It produces harmonics in the supply due to phase-angle control.
  • It operates with a poor power factor during starting.
  • SCRs generate heat and therefore require suitable cooling arrangements.
  • It provides reduced starting torque, which may be unsuitable for heavy-load starting applications.
  • It requires more complex control circuitry than conventional motor starters.
Q3 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x

Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained (16)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:

Half-wave rectification:

  • Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
  • Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
  • Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
  • The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.

Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:

  • Less Average current
  • Less average RMS
  • High pulsation output
  • Lower voltage developed
  • More ripple as compared to others
  • Efficiency is less as compared to others.

Full-wave rectification:

  • Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
  • Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
  • More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
  • Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.

Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:

Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (8)

(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (4)

(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (4)

Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

An alternator's three-phase winding consists of three sets of coils located in slots in the stator, surrounding the rotor's magnetic poles. Each phase winding is spaced 120° apart electrically, resulting in three alternating EMFs that are 120° out of phase with each other.

To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.

Part (b)

Why neutral point is insulation on most ships:

On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.

By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.

Part (c)

Why neutral point is earthed in some installations:

In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.

Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.

Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

Explain the effect of reduced voltage on standard squirrel cage motors with respect to EACH of the following:

(a) Burn outs (4)

(b) Starting current (4)

(c) Stating torque (4)

(d) Speed. (4)

Appeared In: Oct 2024 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Burnouts:

Reducing the voltage supplied to a squirrel cage motor forces it to draw more current to maintain the same load. This is because power (P) is the product of voltage (V) and current (I): P = V x I. If V decreases, I must increase to keep P constant. The heat generated in the motor windings is proportional to the square of the current (I²R, where R is the resistance of the windings). Therefore, a significant increase in current due to reduced voltage leads to excessive heat generation. This overheating can damage the winding insulation, potentially causing a motor burnout.

Part (b)

Starting Current:

The starting current of a squirrel cage induction motor is directly proportional to the supply voltage. Reducing the voltage proportionately reduces the starting current. This reduced starting current is beneficial because it minimizes stress on the motor windings and reduces voltage dips on the electrical distribution system. A lower power surge also prevents excessive power factor reduction. This gentler "cushion start" stabilizes line voltage. For example, a 50% voltage reduction results in approximately a 50% reduction in starting current.

Part (c)

Starting Torque:

The starting torque (Ta) of a squirrel cage induction motor is proportional to the square of the voltage (Ta ∝ V²). Therefore, a 50% voltage reduction results in only 25% of the normal starting torque. This can make it difficult or impossible to start motors driving high inertia loads. If the starting torque is insufficient to overcome the load torque, the motor will stall, leading to excessive current flow and potential damage to the windings.

Part (d)

Speed:

When the voltage is reduced, the motor draws more current to try to maintain its speed under load. However, with a significant voltage reduction, the motor's speed will decrease. If the speed drops below a critical point (typically near the maximum torque point on the motor's torque-speed curve), the motor will lose synchronization and stall, resulting in a very low speed or complete stop.

Q6 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (8)

(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Caleulate (8)

(i) Peak load current

(ii) DC load current

(iii) AC load current

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (8)

(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate;

(i) The speed (4)

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature. (4)

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail. (8)

(b) Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb. (8)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns. (8)

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started? (8)

(b) A 500 V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46 kw and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8 Ω. If the iron and friction losses are 500 w and excitation losses are 800 w, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency. (10)

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Differentiate between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors, of the three phase a.c induction type, in respect of the following:

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Torque characteristics

(c) Speed variation.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q2 (10 Marks) Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships:

(a) Describe a typical power source.

(6) Give a typical list of essential services, which must be supplied simultaneously.

(c) Explain how the emergency installation can be periodically tested.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q3 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:

(a) High starting current:

(b) Low starting torque.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies for these problems.

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q5 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the causes of overheating of an induction motor

(b) What preventive measures are provided against damage to an induction motor in installed condition?

(c) What is the purpose of "fuse back up protection" provided to an induction motor?

(d) How does an induction motor develop torque?

(e) What is the condition to be satisfied for achieving maximum runring torque in an induction motor?

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Apr 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Causes of overheating in an Induction motor:

Electrical Causes:

  • Overcurrent due to overvoltage, defective insulation, or overloading.
  • Unbalanced supply voltage.
  • Single phasing (loss of one phase in a three-phase system).

Mechanical Causes:

  • Overloading (mechanical or electrical).
  • Misalignment of the motor.
  • Bearing troubles.
  • Vibrations.

Environmental Causes:

  • High ambient temperature.
  • Improper ventilation.

Other Causes:

  • Damaged insulation of windings.
Part (b)

Preventive measures against damage to an Induction motor:

Overload protection:

  • Thermal Overload Relays: These devices monitor the motor's current and disconnect the power supply if the current exceeds a preset limit for a specified duration, preventing overheating.
  • Magnetic Overload Relays: They respond to excessive currents by utilizing magnetic fields to trip the circuit, offering rapid protection against short circuits.

Overcurrent protection:

  • Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Installed in the motor's power supply line, they interrupt the circuit during overcurrent situations, safeguarding the motor and associated wiring.

Environmental Protection:

  • Proper Enclosures: Selecting appropriate motor enclosures shields the motor from dust, moisture, and other environmental factors that could cause damage.
  • Regular Maintenance: Routine inspections and maintenance, such as checking for condensation and ensuring proper ventilation, help maintain motor health.

Temperature Monitoring:

  • Thermistors and Temperature Sensors: Embedded in the motor windings, these devices monitor temperature and can trigger alarms or shutdowns if overheating is detected.

Proper Installation and Alignment:

  • Alignment Checks: Ensuring the motor is correctly aligned with the driven equipment reduces mechanical stress and prevents premature wear.
  • Vibration Monitoring: vibration analysis can detect misalignment or imbalance issues early, allowing for corrective action before significant damage occurs.
Part (c)

Purpose of Fuse Backup Protection:

Fuse backup protection serves as a secondary line of defence against severe faults. If a short circuit occurs in the motor starter or supply cable, it can generate a massive fault current. This current poses a significant risk of damaging the motor windings and cables. The fuses, placed upstream of the contactor, act as a fast-acting protective device. They instantly trip, disconnecting the power supply and thus preventing extensive damage. These fuses are specifically designed with a time/current characteristic that allows them to tolerate the brief high current surge during direct-on-line (DOL) motor starting without blowing, while rapidly responding to sustained short circuit currents. The coordination between the overcurrent relays (OCR) and the fuses is crucial. The contactor should trip based on thermal overload detected by the OCR, while the fuses handle short circuit fault currents.

Part (d)

Torque Development in an Induction Motor:

A three-phase AC supply energises the three stator windings, creating a rotating magnetic field. This field rotates at a synchronous speed determined by the supply frequency and the number of motor poles. As this rotating magnetic field sweeps across the rotor conductors (in a squirrel cage rotor), it induces an alternating electromotive force (EMF). Because the rotor conductors are shorted, these induced EMFs create rotor currents. These rotor currents, in turn, generate a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating stator field, producing a torque. This torque forces the rotor to rotate in the same direction as the rotating magnetic field. The direction of rotation can be determined using Fleming's left-hand rule.

Part (e)

Condition for Maximum Running Torque:

The condition for maximum running torque in an induction motor is achieved when the rotor's resistance equals the rotor's reactance (R_r = X_r). This situation creates the maximum interaction between the rotor and stator fields, leading to the highest possible torque output.

However, it's important to note that maximum torque occurs at a specific slip (difference between synchronous speed and actual rotor speed) and not necessarily at the motor's rated speed.

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances.

(b) Draw the circuit of Half wave rectitarene its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 52 is to supply power to 1000 S load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (6)

(i) Peak load current

(ii) DC load current

(iii) AC load current

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Characteristics of PN junction diode:

Forward bias characteristics:

  • The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
  • A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
  • After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.

Reverse bias characteristics:

  • When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
  • For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.

Breakdown characteristics:

  • In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).

Dynamic Resistance (Rd):

  • This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.

Static Resistance (Rs):

  • This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator.

(b) A. d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate;

(i) The speed;

(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature.

Appeared In: Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Oct 2018 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q8 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x

What is a commutator? Discuss its rectifying action in detail.

Calculate the e.m.f. generated by a 4-pole, wave wound armature having 40 slots with 18 conductors per slot when driven at 1000 r.p.m. The flux per pole is 0.015 wb.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A commutator is a rotating electrical switch in DC machines that converts alternating current (AC) generated in the armature windings into direct current (DC) at the output terminals. It achieves this through a process called commutation.

Rectifying Action of a Commutator:

The armature windings of a DC generator produce an AC voltage. To obtain a unidirectional (DC) voltage at the output terminals, a commutator is used. The commutator consists of multiple copper segments insulated from each other and mounted on the shaft. The ends of the armature coils are connected to these segments. Carbon brushes rest on the commutator, making contact with different segments as the commutator rotates.

As the armature rotates, the voltage induced in each coil alternates. However, the commutator segments are arranged such that when the voltage in a coil reverses, the brushes switch to contact a different set of commutator segments, connected to the coil's opposite ends. This switching action effectively reverses the coil's connections to the output terminals, thereby rectifying the alternating voltage into a pulsating direct current.

In a simple DC generator with a single coil, the output voltage would be highly pulsating. To achieve a smoother, more uniform DC output, multiple coils and commutator segments are used. The coils are arranged around the armature such that their voltages add up to produce a relatively constant output voltage, even with a pulsating waveform. The more coils and segments, the smoother the DC output becomes. This smoother output is a result of the commutator's continuous switching action between different coil windings as they pass through their peak AC voltages. The brushes are strategically positioned at the neutral points on the commutator, minimising sparking and ensuring smooth current flow.

Q9 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 9x

(a) Discuss different methods of speed control of a d.c. series motor by adjusting field ampere turns

(b) A 230 V, d.c. shunt motor runs at 1000 r.p.m. and takes 5 amperes. The armature resistance of the motor is 0.025 Ω and shunt field resistance is 230 Ω. Calculate the drop in speed when the motor is loaded and takes the line current of 41 amperes. Neglect armature reaction.

Appeared In: Jul 2026 Apr 2024 Jan 2024 Dec 2023 Sep 2022 Jul 2022 Dec 2020 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Controlling the speed of a DC series motor by adjusting the field ampere-turns:

1. Field Diverter Method:

A variable resistor, known as a diverter, is connected in parallel with the series field winding. By adjusting the diverter's resistance, a portion of the current is shunted away from the field winding, reducing the field current and, consequently, the magnetic flux. This reduction in flux leads to an increase in motor speed, as speed is inversely proportional to flux.

2. Tapped Field Control:

In this method, the field winding is divided into sections with taps at various points. A selector switch allows the operator to choose different numbers of turns in the field winding, effectively varying the total ampere-turns. Selecting fewer turns reduces the magnetic flux, resulting in higher motor speed. This method provides discrete speed settings based on the available taps.

3. Armature Diverter Method:

Here, a variable resistor is connected in parallel with the armature winding. Adjusting this resistor changes the current distribution between the armature and the diverter. For a constant load torque, reducing the armature current increases the field current, enhancing the magnetic flux and decreasing the motor speed. Conversely, increasing the armature current reduces the field current, decreasing the flux and increasing the speed.

Part (b)

Given:

$$R_a \space = \space 0.025Ω$$

$$R_{sh} \space = \space 230Ω$$

$$I_1 \space = \space 5A$$

$$V \space = \space 230V$$

$$N_1 \space = \space 1000rpm$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space {{230} \over 230} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a1} \space = 5 - 1 \space = \space 4A$$

$$E_{b1} \space = \space V - I_{a1}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 4 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229.9V$$

On load,

$$I_2 \space = \space 41A$$

$$I_{sh} \space = \space 1A$$

$$I_{a2} \space = \space 41 - 1 \space = \space 40A$$

$$N_2 \space = \space ?$$

$$E_{b2} \space = \space V - I_{a2}R_a$$

$$= \space 230 - 40 \times 0.025$$

$$= \space 229V$$

Since Ф remains the same,

$$E_b \space ∝ \space N$$

$${{N_2} \over N_1} \space = \space {{E_{b2}} \over E_{b1}} \space$$

$$N_2 \space = \space {{229} \over 229.9} \times 1000$$

$$N_2 \space = \space 996.08rpm$$

Drop in speed:

$$= \space 1000 - 996.08 \space = \space 3.92rpm$$

Q10 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x

(a) Why is a synchronous motor not self-starting? What are the various ways in which it can be started?

(b) A 500 V, single phase synchronous motor gives a net output mechanical power of 7.46 kw and operates at 0.9 power factor lagging. Its effective resistance is 0.8. If the iron and friction losses are 500 w and excitation losses are 800 w, calculate the armature current and the commercial efficiency.

Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A Synchronous motor is not self-starting because,

at the start of the motor, the average torque on the rotor is zero. This is because when a DC supply is applied to the stationary rotor, the unlike poles try to attract each other, causing the rotor to be subjected to an instantaneous torque in one direction. However, the rotor's inertia prevents it from rotating, and as the stator poles continue to rotate, the direction of the torque on the rotor changes. This cycle continues, resulting in an average torque on the rotor of zero, so an external force is required to bring the motor up to the synchronous speed.

Ways to start a synchronous motor:

Pony Motor

  • A smaller auxiliary motor (the "pony motor"), either AC or DC, is mechanically coupled to the synchronous motor. The pony motor accelerates the synchronous motor to a speed slightly above synchronous speed. Once this speed is reached, the pony motor is disconnected, and the synchronous motor's field is energized, allowing it to lock into synchronism with the AC supply.

Induction Motor Starting (Damper Windings)

  • The rotor of the synchronous motor can be equipped with a "cage winding," essentially an embedded squirrel cage. This cage winding enables the motor to operate as an induction motor during the starting phase. The induction motor action accelerates the rotor up to near synchronous speed. Once close to synchronous speed, the DC field is applied, pulling the rotor into synchronism and allowing it to operate as a synchronous motor

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

  • A VFD gradually increases the supply frequency from zero, enabling the synchronous motor to accelerate smoothly without additional starting mechanisms. This method provides precise control over the motor's acceleration and is commonly used in modern applications.
Q1 (16 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 12x

With reference to an emergency source of electrical power in cargo ships

(a) Describe a typical power source

(b) Give a typical list of essential services which must be supplied simultaneously

(c) Explain how the emergency generator can be periodically tested

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

A typical emergency power source on cargo ships is the Emergency Generator, designed to supply electrical power to essential systems in the event of a failure of the main power supply. It required in maintaining safety and operational continuity during emergencies.

Type and Location:

  • Usually a diesel-driven internal combustion engine connected to an alternator.
  • Installed in a separate compartment, typically on the upper deck or superstructure, and outside the main machinery space to ensure isolation from hazards such as fire or flooding in the engine room.

Automatic and Manual Operation:

  • Equipped with an automatic starting system, which activates within 45 seconds of main power failure.
  • A manual start option must also be available in case of automatic system failure.

Fuel Supply:

  • Supplied by a dedicated day tank, ensuring at least 18 hours (for Cargo ships) and 36 hours (for passenger ships) of continuous operation under full emergency load conditions.

Emergency Switchboard:

  • The generator supplies power to an emergency switchboard, from which electrical power is distributed to essential services such as
    • Emergency lighting
    • Fire detection and alarm systems
    • Emergency communication systems
    • Steering gear and navigation equipment
    • Fire pumps and bilge pumps

    Battery Backup:

    • In addition to the generator, emergency batteries are provided to supply immediate power to lighting, communication, and control systems during the delay in generator starting.

    Capacity:

    • The emergency generator is sized adequately to supply simultaneous power to all essential systems required for the safety of the ship and personnel during emergencies.
    Part (b)

    List of Essential Services That Must Be Supplied Simultaneously1. Emergency Lighting

    • Navigational bridge
    • Engine control room and Engine room
    • Escape routes and stairways
    • Emergency generator room
    • Emergency lights throughout vital areas

    2. Navigation and Control Equipment

    • At least one steering gear motor
    • Navigation lights and signal lights
    • Bridge control and monitoring instruments
    • Navigation equipment

    3. Communication Systems

    • Internal communication systems (PA system, intercom)
    • External communication systems (GMDSS)
    • Emergency alarms (general, fire, CO₂ warning)

    4. Fire Detection and Firefighting Systems

    • Emergency fire pump or fire pumps
    • Sprinkler / Hi-fog / water spray systems
    • Fire detection panels and fire detectors

    5. Emergency Machinery and Systems

    • Emergency air compressor
    • BA (Breathing Apparatus) compressor
    • CO₂ room exhaust fan
    • One engine room vent fan
    • Emergency generator fuel oil pumps and ventilation
    • Engine room pumps and systems required for first start from dead ship condition
    • Essential ventilation and fuel pumps for emergency equipment

    6. Lifesaving Equipment

    • Lifeboat davits
    • Watertight door control systems
    • Bilge alarm systems

    7. Electrical and Monitoring Systems

    • Emergency battery charging circuits
    • Battery chargers
    • UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system
    • Engine room alarm system
    Part (c)

    Periodic Testing of Emergency Installation

    1. Weekly Testing (No Load / Manual Start)

    • The emergency generator is started manually and run without load.
    • Primary and secondary starting systems are tested (if available).
    • Parameters such as voltage, frequency, oil level, and fuel level are checked.
    • Exhaust temperature and sump oil level are monitored.
    • The automatic starting system is tested by simulating a power failure to verify functionality.

    2. Monthly Testing (Simulated Automatic Start)

    • A simulated power failure is carried out by opening the interconnector breaker between the main and emergency switchboards.
    • The emergency generator should start automatically and connect to the emergency switchboard.
    • Battery voltage and electrolyte levels are also checked.

    3. Quarterly Testing (On Load)

    • The emergency generator is operated on load for at least 30 minutes.
    • As much of the emergency load as safely possible is connected.
    • This test confirms the generator's ability to supply essential services and reach normal operating temperatures and pressures.
    • Transfer switches are also tested to ensure seamless transition.

    4. Annual Testing (Class Survey / Blackout Test)

    • A controlled blackout test may be performed by shutting down the main power (if safe and permitted).
    • The test confirms that the generator automatically starts, connects to the emergency switchboard, and restores all essential services.
    • A full inspection or overhaul of the emergency generator is carried out.
    • Auto-start and auto-transfer logic are verified.
    • The emergency switchboard, wiring, and circuits are thoroughly inspected.

    5. Battery Testing

    • Accumulator or emergency batteries are tested for:
      • Charge levels
      • Discharge capability
      • Terminal condition and connections
    • Controlled discharge tests (typically done in port or during drydock) may be used to assess actual capacity.

    6. Testing of Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)

    • Automatic transfer switches are checked to ensure they:
      • Detect power failure
      • Initiate generator start
      • Transfer load smoothly

      7. Fuel Supply Verification

      • Regular checks to confirm:
        • Adequate fuel quantity
        • Correct fuel quality
        • Cleanliness of fuel tank and supply lines

        8. Log Book Entry

        • All tests must be logged with:
          • Date and time
          • Load details
          • Duration
          • Any observed faults or anomalies
Q2 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x

The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:

(a) High starting current

(b) Low starting torque.

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:

(i) Star-Delta Starting:

  • The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
  • These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
  • Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
  • Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.

(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:

  • An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
  • Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
  • As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
  • Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.

(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:

(i) Wound Rotor Motor:

  • The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
  • External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
  • At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
  • As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.

(ii) Double Cage Rotor:

  • The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
    • Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
    • Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
  • At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
  • As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
Q3 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 8x

(a) (i) Discuss the various hazards and problems which are associated with electric cable insualtion in the event of fire.

(ii) Suggest remedies of these problesm

(b) State how the spread of fire may be reduced by the method used for installing electric cables

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

(i) Hazards and problems associated with electric cable insulation in the event of fire:

The insulation of electric cables is typically made from rubber or plastic. The type and quantity of smoke produced during the combustion of plastic materials depend on various factors, such as:

  • The nature of the plastic
  • The presence of additives
  • Whether the fire is flaming or smouldering
  • The availability of ventilation

Most plastics decompose when heated, producing dense to very dense smoke. Ventilation may help in dispersing the smoke, but usually not enough to maintain clear visibility. Plastics that burn cleanly emit less dense smoke when subjected to heat and flame.

Urethane foam, when exposed to both flaming and non-flaming heat, generally produces dense smoke, and visibility can be lost within seconds.

Hydrogen chloride, a deadly gas with a pungent and irritating odour, is released during the combustion of chlorine-containing plastics such as PVC—commonly used in electrical wiring insulation.

Burning rubber produces dense, black, oily smoke, which has toxic properties. Two of the harmful gases released in the combustion of rubber are hydrogen sulphide and sulphur dioxide, both of which are dangerous and potentially lethal.

(ii) Remedies for these problems:

  • Use cables with Fire-Resistant (FFR) insulation combined with flame-retardant sheathing, such as FEP or XLPE, and stainless steel (SS) armouring.
  • The SS armouring must be properly earthed.
  • The combustibility of insulation material is assessed by its oxygen index number, which represents the minimum percentage of oxygen required to sustain combustion:
    • Materials with an oxygen index below 21 will continue to burn.
    • Materials with an oxygen index of 27 or above are self-extinguishing.
  • Therefore, insulation materials should have an oxygen index greater than 27 to ensure fire resistance.
Part (b)

Reducing the spread of fire by cable installation methods:

  • All electric cables installed externally to equipment must be of flame-retardant type and installed in a way that preserves their flame-retarding properties.
  • Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency power, lighting, internal communications, or signals should, wherever possible, be routed away from high-risk areas such as galleys, laundries, refrigerated cargo (r/c) spaces of category 'A', their casings, and other hazardous zones.
  • In hazardous areas where cables could cause fire or explosions during an electrical fault, special precautions must be taken.
  • Cables should be installed and supported in a manner that avoids chafing or other physical damage.
  • Terminations and joints must maintain the fire-resistant properties of the original cable.
  • Every individual circuit should be protected against short-circuiting and overloading.
  • When a cable passes through a bulkhead or exits a gland box, a fireproof compression gland must be fitted to prevent the spread of fire.
Q4 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 8x

Defferentiate betweeen squirrel cage and wound rotor motors of the three phase a.c induction type, in respect to the following:

(a) Rotor construction

(b) Troque characteristics

(c) Speed variations

Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2020 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Differences between squirrel cage and wound rotor motors

(a) Rotor Construction

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Rotor consists of aluminum or copper bars embedded in a laminated steel core.
  • These bars are short-circuited at both ends using end rings, forming a cage-like structure.
  • Construction is simple, robust, and cost-effective.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Rotor contains a three-phase winding similar to the stator winding.
  • The winding is connected to slip rings and brushes.
  • Slip rings enable connection of external resistors to the rotor, allowing for control of rotor current.
  • Construction is more complex and expensive compared to squirrel cage motors.
Part (b)

Torque Characteristics

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Provides low to moderate starting torque.
  • Exhibits low slip at full load, resulting in nearly constant speed operation.
  • Suitable for applications where high starting torque is not required and simple, reliable operation is preferred.

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Has higher starting torque compared to squirrel cage motors due to the addition of external resistance in the rotor circuit.
  • Allows torque control by varying external rotor resistance.
  • Suitable for high-inertia loads and applications requiring smooth starting and controlled acceleration.

(c) Speed Variations

Squirrel Cage Motor:

  • Speed is almost constant at a fixed frequency due to low slip.
  • Speed regulation is poor, with minor variations under load.
  • Limited speed control, typically achieved through supply voltage variation or by using variable frequency drives (VFDs).

Wound Rotor Motor:

  • Allows wide speed variation by adjusting external resistance connected to the rotor winding.
  • Offers good speed regulation with proper control methods.
  • Capable of adjustable speed, making it suitable for applications requiring speed control.
Q5 (10 Marks) Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 2x

Sketch and describe an arrangement for automatic connection of emergency batteries upon loss of main power. Include in your answer:

(a) Means of obtaining d.c. charging supply from a.c. mains:

(b) A method of maintaining charge on lead acid batteries;

(c) The arrangement to check that batteries operate at loss of main power

(d) The length of time for which emergency batteries of passenger and cargo ships must provide power.

Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
  • The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
  • When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
  • A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
  • ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
  • When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
  • Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
  • A test switch provides means for testing the battery.
Part (a)

Means of charging DC from AC:

from the mainline through a bridge rectifier, which converts AC to DC.

Part (b)

Method of maintaining charge:

  • Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
  • Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.
Part (c)

To check operation at loss of main power:

test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made

Part (d)

Duration:

for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship

Q6 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 12x

With respect to the High Voltage power systems installation, explain the different types of circuit breaker that are used, comparing them on merits and demerits. Describe the theory of are phenomenon and the mechanism fitted to mitigate the arc.

Appeared In: Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Feb 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Feb 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Types of Circuit Breakers

1. Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB):

In VCBs, the fixed and moving contacts, along with the arc shield, are housed in an arc-interrupting chamber with a high vacuum. The vacuum's excellent dielectric strength allows for very short contact separation and rapid recovery of insulation strength after each interruption.

Merits:

  • Compact size and quick operation due to minimal contact travel.
  • Low maintenance and long operational life.
  • No need for periodic refilling (unlike oil or gas CBs).
  • Rapid recovery of dielectric strength.

Demerits:

  • System failure is possible if there is a minor vacuum leakage.
  • High cost of manufacturing.

2. SF₆ (Sulfur Hexafluoride) Gas Circuit Breaker:

These breakers utilize high-pressure SF₆ gas as an arc-extinguishing medium. The gas absorbs free electrons from the arc path, forming ions that increase the medium's dielectric strength. The gas is later recycled back to a high-pressure reservoir for reuse.

Merits:

  • Excellent arc-extinguishing and insulating properties.
  • Non-flammable and chemically stable.
  • Does not produce toxic fumes or explosive decomposition products.
  • Noiseless operation and requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • SF₆ gas is a potent greenhouse gas and harmful if leaked.
  • Requires a dry atmosphere; moisture can lead to operational failures.
  • Suffocating gas that settles at the bottom due to its weight.

3. Oil Circuit Breaker:

When an arc forms, the surrounding oil evaporates and dissociates, producing hydrogen gas. The hydrogen displaces the oil around the arc, cools it, and provides a cooling effect to extinguish the arc.

Merits:

  • The oil absorbs arc energy and provides effective cooling.

Demerits:

  • Risk of fire and explosion due to the combustible nature of oil.
  • Oil quality deteriorates over time, requiring periodic renewal.

4. Air Blast Circuit Breaker:

High-pressure air is introduced into the arc chamber through a nozzle when a fault occurs. The air cools the arc and sweeps away ionized particles, increasing the dielectric strength of the medium

Merits:

  • Faster arc quenching and breaking speed.
  • No risk of fire.
  • Requires minimal maintenance.

Demerits:

  • High maintenance requirements for the air compressor system.
  • Possibility of air leakage from the system.

Arc Phenomenon:

When the contacts of a circuit breaker begin to separate under fault conditions, the contact area reduces rapidly. This reduction, combined with high fault current, increases the current density and causes a rise in temperature. The heat ionizes the surrounding medium, creating a conductive path for the current, which results in the formation of an arc between the breaker contacts. This arc persists as long as the ionized medium provides a low-resistance path, keeping the circuit energized.

Arc Mitigation Techniques:

  • Increase the separation between the contacts to ensure that the potential difference across them is insufficient to sustain the arc.
  • Use mediums like high-pressure SF₆ gas, vacuum, or air blasts to de-ionize the medium and extinguish the arc.
  • Employ materials with high dielectric strength to recover insulation between contacts rapidly.
Q7 (10 Marks) Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x

Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system.Mention the significance of PI Test, why ssing ine instillion testers are user in HV insulation measurements?

Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer

Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:

  • AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
  • DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
  • Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.

Ships High Voltage Distribution System:

  • 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
  • High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
  • HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
  • High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
  • High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
  • High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
  • Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
  • Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.

Methods of Testing HV Insulation

Megger Testing:

  • This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.

Polarization Index (PI) Test:

  • This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
  • The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.

3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.

Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:

  • Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
  • Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
Q8 (10 Marks) Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x

(a) What is meant by negative and positive feed backs? Explain the characteristics of negative feed back. (6)

(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates.

Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

Negative and positive feedback:

Negative Feedback: When a portion of the output signal is fed back to the input in such a way that it is out of phase with the input signal and opposes it.

  • Reduces system gain, improves stability, and increases accuracy.
  • Commonly used in control systems, amplifiers, and oscillators to stabilise performance.

Positive Feedback: When a portion of the output signal is fed back to the input in such a way that it is in phase with the input signal and adds to it.

  • Increases system gain, but can lead to instability and oscillations.
  • Used in circuits like regenerative amplifiers and oscillators.

Characteristics of negative feedback:

  • Negative feedback promotes stability by correcting deviations, helping the system settle to a stable state or equilibrium.
  • The output impedance of the system becomes very low, making the closed-loop amplification nearly independent of the load.
  • The system's gain remains stable and less sensitive to variations in component values or external disturbances.
  • Negative feedback extends the range of frequencies over which the system can operate effectively.
  • It ensures that only the right amount of correction is applied, preventing overcompensation.
  • The system becomes more precise and reliable, with reduced distortion and noise.
  • The response time to input changes is improved, leading to better dynamic performance.
Q9 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) A 4-pole machine running at 1500 r.p.m. has an armature with 80 slots and 6 conductors per pole. The flux per pole is 6 × 10^6 lines. Determine the terminal e.m.f. of d.c. generator if the coils are lap connected. If the current per conductor is 100 Amps, determine the electrical power.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.

Q10 (10 Marks) Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x

(a) Describe the no-load saturation characteristic of a d.c. generator. (6)

(b) A 4-pole machine running at 1500 r.p.m. has an armature with 80 slots and 6 conductors per pole. The flux per pole is 6 × 10^6 lines. Determine the terminal e.m.f. of d.c. generator if the coils are lap connected. If the current per conductor is 100 Amps, determine the electrical power.

Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer
Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer) Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Part (a)

The no-load saturation characteristic of a DC generator, also known as the magnetic or open-circuit characteristic, is a curve illustrating the relationship between the field current (If) and the generated voltage (Eo) in the armature under no-load conditions.

To obtain this characteristic, the generator is operated at a constant speed without any load connected. The field current is gradually increased, and the corresponding terminal voltage is recorded. This data is then plotted, with field current on the x-axis and generated voltage on the y-axis.

The generated EMF (Eg) is directly proportional to the flux (Φ), expressed by the equation Eg = KΦ, where K is a constant. Initially, as the field current increases, the generated voltage increases proportionally due to the increasing magnetic flux. However, once the magnetic field reaches saturation, the flux (Φ) essentially plateaus, regardless of further increases in field current. As a result, the generated voltage also levels off, resulting in a nearly straight-line portion on the saturation curve.

Even when the field current is zero, a small amount of EMF is generated due to residual magnetism in the field poles. This is represented by a non-zero intercept on the voltage axis in the graph of the no-load saturation characteristic.